Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Preface
Thank you for choosing DELTA’s high-performance VFD-E Series. The VFD-E Series is
manufactured with high-quality components and materials and incorporate the latest microprocessor
technology available.
This manual is to be used for the installation, parameter setting, troubleshooting, and daily
maintenance of the AC motor drive. To guarantee safe operation of the equipment, read the following
safety guidelines before connecting power to the AC motor drive. Keep this operating manual at
hand and distribute to all users for reference.
To ensure the safety of operators and equipment, only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor
drive are to do installation, start-up and maintenance. Always read this manual thoroughly before
using VFD-E series AC Motor Drive, especially the WARNING, DANGER and CAUTION notes.
Failure to comply may result in personal injury and equipment damage. If you have any questions,
please contact your dealer.
PLEASE READ PRIOR TO INSTALLATION FOR SAFETY.
DANGER!
1.
AC input power must be disconnected before any wiring to the AC motor drive is made.
A charge may still remain in the DC-link capacitors with hazardous voltages, even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that power has turned off before
opening the AC motor drive and wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage
levels.
2.
3.
4.
Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
The AC motor drive may be destroyed beyond repair if incorrect cables are connected to the
input/output terminals. Never connect the AC motor drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and
W/T3 directly to the AC mains circuit power supply.
5.
6.
7.
Ground the VFD-E using the ground terminal. The grounding method must comply with the laws
of the country where the AC motor drive is to be installed. Refer to the Basic Wiring Diagram.
VFD-E series is used only to control variable speed of 3-phase induction motors, NOT for 1-
phase motors or other purpose.
VFD-E series shall NOT be used for life support equipment or any life safety situation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARNING!
1.
2.
DO NOT use Hi-pot test for internal components. The semi-conductor used in AC motor drive
easily damage by high-voltage.
There are highly sensitive MOS components on the printed circuit boards. These components
are especially sensitive to static electricity. To prevent damage to these components, do not
touch these components or the circuit boards with metal objects or your bare hands.
Only qualified persons are allowed to install, wire and maintain AC motor drives.
3.
CAUTION!
1.
2.
Some parameters settings can cause the motor to run immediately after applying power.
DO NOT install the AC motor drive in a place subjected to high temperature, direct sunlight,
high humidity, excessive vibration, corrosive gases or liquids, or airborne dust or metallic
particles.
3.
4.
5.
Only use AC motor drives within specification. Failure to comply may result in fire, explosion or
electric shock.
To prevent personal injury, please keep children and unqualified people away from the
equipment.
When the motor cable between AC motor drive and motor is too long, the layer insulation of the
motor may be damaged. Please use a frequency inverter duty motor or add an AC output
reactor to prevent damage to the motor. Refer to appendix B Reactor for details.
The rated voltage for AC motor drive must be ≤ 240V (≤ 480V for 460V models) and the short
circuit must be ≤ 5000A RMS (≤10000A RMS for the ≥ 40hp (30kW) models).
6.
DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc. Lonwork is a
registered trademark of Echelon Corporation. Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus
International. CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation (CiA). Other trademarks
belong to their respective owners.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
Table of Contents.......................................................................................... iii
Chapter 1 Introduction................................................................................1-1
1.1 Receiving and Inspection ................................................................... 1-2
2.2 External Wiring................................................................................. 2-12
2.4 Control Terminals............................................................................. 2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Operation Method...............................................................................3-2
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting.........................................................................5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6.1 Fault Code Information....................................................................... 6-1
B.4.3 Applications ..............................................................................B-12
B.7 PU06................................................................................................B-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keypad...............................................................................................B-21
B.9.1 Relay Card................................................................................B-22
B.9.2 Digital I/O Card .........................................................................B-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
C.1 Capacity Formulas.............................................................................C-2
C.2 General Precaution............................................................................C-4
D.2 Start-up..............................................................................................D-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.3.2 Introduction................................................................................ D-8
D.4.10 Communication Addresses for Devices (only for PLC2 mode).. D-
27
D.4.11 Function Code (only for PLC2 mode) .................................... D-28
D.5 Commands...................................................................................... D-28
D.5.1 Basic Commands..................................................................... D-28
D.5.2 Output Commands................................................................... D-29
D.5.3 Timer and Counters................................................................. D-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
D.5.4 Main Control Commands..........................................................D-29
D.5.5 Rising-edge/falling-edge Detection Commands of Contact......D-29
D.5.6 Rising-edge/falling-edge Output Commands............................D-30
D.5.7 End Command .........................................................................D-30
D.5.8 Explanation for the Commands ................................................D-30
D.5.9 Description of the Application Commands................................D-45
D.5.10 Explanation for the Application Commands............................D-46
D.5.11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive .........D-58
D.6 Error Code .......................................................................................D-65
Appendix E CANopen Function .................................................................E-1
E.1 Overview............................................................................................E-2
E.1.1 CANopen Protocol......................................................................E-2
E.1.2 RJ-45 Pin Definition....................................................................E-3
E.1.3 Pre-Defined Connection Set.......................................................E-3
E.1.4 CANopen Communication Protocol............................................E-4
E.1.4.1 NMT (Network Management Object) ..................................E-4
E.1.4.2 SDO (Service Data Object).................................................E-6
E.1.4.3 PDO (Process Data Object)................................................E-7
E.1.4.4 EMCY (Emergency Object).................................................E-9
E.2 How to Control by CANopen............................................................E-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This page intentionally left blank
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction
The AC motor drive should be kept in the shipping carton or crate before installation. In order to
retain the warranty coverage, the AC motor drive should be stored properly when it is not to be used
for an extended period of time. Storage conditions are:
CAUTION!
1.
Store in a clean and dry location free from direct sunlight or corrosive fumes.
Store within an ambient temperature range of -20 °C to +60 °C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment.
Store within an air pressure range of 86 kPA to 106kPA.
DO NOT place on the ground directly. It should be stored properly. Moreover, if the surrounding
environment is humid, you should put exsiccator in the package.
6.
7.
DO NOT store in an area with rapid changes in temperature. It may cause condensation and
frost.
If the AC motor drive is stored for more than 3 months, the temperature should not be higher
than 30 °C. Storage longer than one year is not recommended, it could result in the degradation
of the electrolytic capacitors.
8.
When the AC motor drive is not used for longer time after installation on building sites or places
with humidity and dust, it’s best to move the AC motor drive to an environment as stated above.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.1 Receiving and Inspection
This VFD-E AC motor drive has gone through rigorous quality control tests at the factory before
shipment. After receiving the AC motor drive, please check for the following:
„
Check to make sure that the package includes an AC motor drive, the User Manual/Quick
Start and CD.
„
„
Inspect the unit to assure it was not damaged during shipment.
Make sure that the part number indicated on the nameplate corresponds with the part
number of your order.
1.1.1 Nameplate Information
Example for 1HP/0.75kW 3-phase 230V AC motor drive
AC Drive Model
Input Spec.
Output Spec.
MODEL:VFD007E23A
INPUT :3PH 200-240V 50/60Hz 5.1A
OUTPUT :3PH 0-240V 4.2A 1.6kVA 0.75kW/1HP
FREQUENCY RANGE : 0.1~400Hz
Output Frequency Range
Serial Number & Bar Code
007E23A0T5011230
01.03
02.03
Power Board
Software Version
Control Board
1.1.2 Model Explanation
A: Standard drive
C: CANopen
P: Cold plate drive (frame A only)
23
A
VFD 007
E
Version Type
T: Frame A, built-in brake chopper
Mains Input Voltage
11:115V Single phase
21:230V Single phase
23:230V Three phase 43:460V Three phase
E Series
Applicable motor capacity
002: 0.25 HP(0.2kW) 037: 5 HP(3.7kW)
004: 0.5 HP(0.4kW)
055: 7.5 HP(5.5kW)
015: 2 HP(1.5kW)
022: 3 HP(2.2kW)
110: 15 HP(11kW)
Series Name (
V
ariable
F
requency
Drive)
1-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.1.3 Series Number Explanation
007E23A 7T 7 01
Production number
Production week
Production year 2007
Production factory
T: Taoyuan, W: Wujiang
230V 3-phase 1HP(0.75kW)
Model
If the nameplate information does not correspond to your purchase order or if there are
any problems, please contact your distributor.
1.1.4 Drive Frames and Appearances
0.25-2HP/0.2-1.5kW (Frame A)
Input terminals
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Case body
Keypad cover
Control board case
Control board cover
Output terminals
(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1-15HP/0.75-11kW (Frame B&C)
Input terminals cover
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
Keypad cover
Case body
Control board cover
Output terminals cover
(U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)
Internal Structure
READY: power indicator
RUN: status indicator
FAULT: fault indicator
1. Switch to ON for 50Hz, refer to
P 01.00 to P01.02 for details
2.
Switch to ON for free run to stop
refer to P02.02
Switch to ON for setting frequency
source to ACI (P 02.00=2)
3.
ACI terminal (ACI/AVI2 switch )
NPN/PNP
Mounting port for extension card
RS485 port (RJ-45)
NOTE
The LED “READY” will light up after applying power. The light won’t be off until the capacitors are
discharged to safe voltage levels after power off.
1-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
RFI Jumper Location
Frame A: near the output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, W/T3)
Frame B: above the nameplate
Frame C: above the warning label
Frame
Power range
Models
VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A,
VFD007E21A/23A/43A, VFD015E23A/43A
A
0.25-2hp (0.2-1.5kW)
VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C,
VFD007E21C/23C/43C, VFD015E23C/43C
VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T,
VFD007E21T/23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Frame
Power range
Models
VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P,
VFD007E21P/23P/43P, VFD015E23P
VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A,
VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C,
VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C
B
C
1-5hp (0.75-3.7kW)
7.5-15hp (5.5-11kW)
VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A,
VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C
RFI Jumper
RFI Jumper: The AC motor drive may emit the electrical noise. The RFI jumper is used to suppress
the interference (Radio Frequency Interference) on the power line.
Main power isolated from earth:
If the AC motor drive is supplied from an isolated power (IT power), the RFI jumper must be cut off.
Then the RFI capacities (filter capacitors) will be disconnected from ground to prevent circuit damage
(according to IEC 61800-3) and reduce earth leakage current.
CAUTION!
1.
2.
After applying power to the AC motor drive, do not cut off the RFI jumper. Therefore,
please make sure that main power has been switched off before cutting the RFI jumper.
The gap discharge may occur when the transient voltage is higher than 1,000V. Besides,
electro-magnetic compatibility of the AC motor drives will be lower after cutting the RFI
jumper.
3.
4.
Do NOT cut the RFI jumper when main power is connected to earth.
The RFI jumper cannot be cut when Hi-pot tests are performed. The mains power and
motor must be separated if high voltage test is performed and the leakage currents are
too high.
5.
To prevent drive damage, the RFI jumper connected to ground shall be cut off if the AC
motor drive is installed on an ungrounded power system or a high resistance-grounded
(over 30 ohms) power system or a corner grounded TN system.
1.1.5 Remove Instructions
1-6
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Remove Keypad
Remove Front Cover
1.
Press and hold in the tabs on each side
of the cover.
2.
Pull the cover up to release.
Step 1
Step 2
Remove RST Terminal Cover
Remove UVW Terminal Cover
(For Frame B and Frame C)
(For Frame B and Frame C)
For frame A, it doesn’t have cover and can be
wired directly.
For frame A, it doesn’t have cover and can be
wired directly.
Remove Fan
Remove Extension Card
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.2 Preparation for Installation and Wiring
1.2.1 Ambient Conditions
Install the AC motor drive in an environment with the following conditions:
-10 ~ +50°C (14 ~ 122°F) for UL & cUL
Air Temperature:
-10 ~ +40°C (14 ~ 104°F) for side-by-side mounting
Relative Humidity:
<90%, no condensation allowed
Atmosphere
pressure:
86 ~ 106 kPa
Operation
Installation Site
Altitude:
<1000m
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max
Vibration:
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max
Temperature:
-20°C ~ +60°C (-4°F ~ 140°F)
<90%, no condensation allowed
86 ~ 106 kPa
Relative Humidity:
Storage
Transportation
Atmosphere
pressure:
<20Hz: 9.80 m/s2 (1G) max
Vibration:
20 ~ 50Hz: 5.88 m/s2 (0.6G) max
Pollution
Degree
2: good for a factory type environment.
Minimum Mounting Clearances
Frame A Mounting Clearances
Air flow
Option 1 (-10 to +50°C)
Option 2 (-10 to +40°C)
120mm
120mm
Air Flow
120mm
120mm
1-8
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Frame B and C Mounting Clearances
Option 1 (-10 to +50°C)
150mm
Air flow
Option 2 (-10 to +40°C)
150mm
Air Flow
150mm
150mm
For VFD-E-P series: heat sink system example
Air-extracting apparatus
User's heat sink should comply
with following conditions:
1. Flatness <0.1mm
C
Control panel
Duct temperature 40
Air flow speed 2m/sec
2. Roughness <6um
3. Grease 10um~12um
4. Screw torque: 16Kgf-cm
5. Recommended temperature <80
dust collector
C
AC motor drive
fan
CAUTION!
1.
Operating, storing or transporting the AC motor drive outside these conditions may cause
damage to the AC motor drive.
2.
3.
Failure to observe these precautions may void the warranty!
Mount the AC motor drive vertically on a flat vertical surface object by screws. Other directions
are not allowed.
4.
The AC motor drive will generate heat during operation. Allow sufficient space around the unit
for heat dissipation.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
5.
The heat sink temperature may rise to 90°C when running. The material on which the AC motor
drive is mounted must be noncombustible and be able to withstand this high temperature.
When AC motor drive is installed in a confined space (e.g. cabinet), the surrounding
temperature must be within 10 ~ 40°C with good ventilation. DO NOT install the AC motor drive
in a space with bad ventilation.
6.
7.
8.
Prevent fiber particles, scraps of paper, saw dust, metal particles, etc. from adhering to the
heatsink.
When installing multiple AC more drives in the same cabinet, they should be adjacent in a row
with enough space in-between. When installing one AC motor drive below another one, use a
metal separation between the AC motor drives to prevent mutual heating.
Installation with Metal Separation
Installation without Metal Separation
120mm
150mm
120mm
150mm
B
A
120mm
120mm
150mm
150mm
B
A
Air flow
120mm
150mm
150mm
120mm
Frame A
Frame B and C
Frame A
Frame B and C
1-10
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.2.2 DC-bus Sharing: Connecting the DC-bus of the AC Motor Drives
in Parallel
1.
2.
This function is not for VFD-E-T series.
The AC motor drives can absorb mutual voltage that generated to DC bus when
deceleration.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Enhance brake function and stabilize the voltage of the DC bus.
The brake module can be added to enhance brake function after connecting in parallel.
Only the same power system can be connected in parallel.
It is recommended to connect 5 AC motor drives in parallel (no limit in horsepower).
power should be applied at the same time
(only the same power system can be connected in parallel)
Power 115/208/220/230/380/440/480 (depend on models)
U
V
W
U
V
W
U
V
W
U
V
W
Brake
module
IM
IM
IM
IM
For frame A, terminal + (-) is connected to the terminal + (-) of the brake module.
For frame B and C, terminal +/B1 (-) is connected to the terminal + (-) of the brake module.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
1.3 Dimensions
(Dimensions are in millimeter and [inch])
W
D
W1
H
D
H1
Frame
W
W1
H
H1
D
Ø
ØD
A
B
C
72.0[2.83] 60.0[2.36] 142.0[5.59] 120.0[4.72] 152.0[5.98] 5.2[0.04] 7.6[0.06]
100.0[3.94] 89.0[3.50] 174.0[6.86] 162.0[6.38] 152.0[5.98] 5.5[0.22] 9.3[0.36]
130.0[5.12] 116.0[4.57] 260.0[10.24] 246.5[9.70] 169.2[6.66] 5.5[0.22] 9.8[0.38]
NOTE
Frame A: VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A,
VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C, VFD007E21C/23C/43C,
VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T,
VFD015E23T/43T
Frame B: VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C,
VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C
Frame C: VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C,
VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C
1-12
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
Dimensions for VFD-E-P series
W
W1
D
D1
H1
H2
H
W2
Unit: mm [inch]
W
W1
W2
H
H1
H2
D
D1
Ø
72.0
56.0
30.0
155.0
[6.10]
143.0
[5.63]
130.0
[5.12]
111.5
[4.39]
9.5
5.3
[2.83]
[2.20]
[1.18]
[0.37]
[0.21]
NOTE
Frame A: VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD007E11P/21P/23P/43P,
VFD015E23P/43P
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1 Introduction|
This page intentionally left blank
1-14
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring
After removing the front cover, check if the power and control terminals are clear. Be sure to observe
the following precautions when wiring.
„
General Wiring Information
Applicable Codes
All VFD-E series are Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and Canadian Underwriters
Laboratories (cUL) listed, and therefore comply with the requirements of the National
Electrical Code (NEC) and the Canadian Electrical Code (CEC).
Installation intended to meet the UL and cUL requirements must follow the instructions
provided in “Wiring Notes” as a minimum standard. Follow all local codes that exceed UL
and cUL requirements. Refer to the technical data label affixed to the AC motor drive and
the motor nameplate for electrical data.
The "Line Fuse Specification" in Appendix B, lists the recommended fuse part number for
each VFD-E Series part number. These fuses (or equivalent) must be used on all
installations where compliance with U.L. standards is a required.
CAUTION!
1.
Make sure that power is only applied to the R/L1, S/L2, T/L3 terminals. Failure to comply may
result in damage to the equipment. The voltage and current should lie within the range as
indicated on the nameplate.
2.
3.
4.
All the units must be grounded directly to a common ground terminal to prevent lightning strike
or electric shock.
Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks which is
made by the loose screws due to vibration.
Check following items after finishing the wiring:
A. Are all connections correct?
B. No loose wires?
C. No short-circuits between terminals or to ground?
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
DANGER!
1.
A charge may still remain in the DC bus capacitors with hazardous voltages even if the power
has been turned off. To prevent personal injury, please ensure that the power is turned off and
wait ten minutes for the capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels before opening the AC
motor drive.
2.
3.
Only qualified personnel familiar with AC motor drives is allowed to perform installation, wiring
and commissioning.
Make sure that the power is off before doing any wiring to prevent electric shock.
2.1 Wiring
Users must connect wires according to the circuit diagrams on the following pages. Do not plug a
modem or telephone line to the RS-485 communication port or permanent damage may result. The
pins 1 & 2 are the power supply for the optional copy keypad only and should not be used for RS-485
communication.
2-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 1 for models of VFD-E Series
VFD002E11A/21A, VFD004E11A/21A, VFD007E21A, VFD002E11C/21C, VFD004E11C/21C,
VFD007E21C, VFD002E11P/21P, VFD004E11P/21P, VFD007E21P
brake resistor
BR
(optional)
BUE
brake unit
(optional)
Fuse/NFB(None Fuse Breaker)
-
+
Motor
R(L1)
S(L2)
R(L1)
S(L2)
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
E
IM
3~
E
SA
Recommended Circuit
RB
RC
RA
MC
when power supply
is turned OFF by a
fault output
Multi-function contact output
Refer to chapter 2.4 for details.
Factory setting is
ON
OFF
RB
RC
MC
malfunction indication
+24V
FWD/Stop
REV/Stop
MO1
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Factory setting:
Drive is in operation
48V50mA Max.
Factory setting:
NPN Mode
NPN
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
Factory
setting
Sw1
Multi-function
Photocoulper Output
PNP
MCM
AFM
Please refer to Figure 7
for wiring of NPN
mode and PNP
mode.
Analog Multi-function Output
Ter minal
factory setting: Analog freq.
Digital Signal Common
DCM
E
/ current meter 0~10VDC/2mA
ACM
E
Analog Signal common
Factory setting: output frequency
+10V
RS-485 serial interface
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Power supply
+10V 20m A
3
Factory setting:
ACI Mode
AVI
2
AVI
1: Reserved
2: EV
3: GND
5K
Master Frequency
0 to 10V 47K
Sw2
1
4: SG-
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
ACI
ACI
4-20mA/0-10V
ACI/AVI switch
When switching to AVI,
it indicates AVI2
ACM
1
8
Analog Signal Common
E
For VFD*E*C models,
please refer to figure 8.
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Shielded leads & Cable
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 2 for models of VFD-E Series
VFD002E23A, VFD004E23A/43A, VFD007E23A/43A, VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E23C,
VFD004E23C/43C, VFD007E23C/43C, VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E23P, VFD004E23P/43P,
VFD007E23P/43P, VFD015E23P
brake resistor
BR
(optional)
BUE
brake unit
(optional)
Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker)
-
+
Motor
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
R(L1)
S(L2)
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
E
IM
3~
T(L3)
E
SA
ON
Recommended Circuit
RB
RC
RA
MC
when power supply
is turned OFF by a
fault output
Multi-function contact output
Refer to chapter 2.4 for details.
Factory setting is
OFF
RB
RC
MC
malfunction indication
+24V
FWD/Stop
REV/Stop
MO1
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Factory setting:
Drive is in operation
48V50mA Max.
Factory setting:
NPN Mode
NPN
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
Factory
setting
Sw1
Multi-function
Photocoulper Output
PNP
MCM
AFM
Please refer to Figure 7
for wiring of NPN
mode and PNP
mode.
Analog Multi-function Output
Terminal
factory setting: Analog freq.
Digital Signal Common
DCM
E
/ current meter 0~10VDC/2mA
ACM
E
Analog Signal common
Factory setting: output frequency
+10V
RS-485 serial interface
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Power supply
+10V 20mA
3
Factory setting:
ACI Mode
AVI
1: Reserved
2: EV
3: GND
4: SG-
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
2
AVI
5K
Master Frequency
0 to 10V 47K
Sw2
1
ACI
ACI
4-20mA/0-10V
ACI/AVI switch
When switching to AVI,
it indicates AVI2
ACM
1
8
Analog Signal Common
E
For VFD*E*C models,
please refer to figure 8.
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Shielded leads & Cable
2-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 3 for models of VFD-E Series
VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A, VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C
brake resistor
(optional)
BR
Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker)
-
+/B1
B2
Motor
R(L1)
S(L2)
R(L1)
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
E
IM
3~
S(L2)
E
SA
Recommended Circuit
RB
RC
RA
MC
when power supply
is turned OFF by a
fault output
Multi-function contact output
Refer to chapter2.4 for details.
Factory setting is
ON
OFF
RB
RC
MC
malfunction indication
+24V
FWD/Stop
REV/Stop
MO1
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Factory setting:
Drive is in operation
48V50mA Max.
Factory setting:
NPN Mode
NPN
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
Factory
setting
Sw1
Multi-function
Photocoulper Output
PNP
MCM
AFM
Please refer to Figure 7
for wiring of NPN
mode and PNP
mode.
Analog Multi-function
Output Terminal
factory setting: Analog
freq./ current meter
0~10VDC/2mA
Digital Signal Common
DCM
E
ACM
E
Analog Signal common
Factory setting: output
frequency
+10V
RS-485 serial interface
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Power supply
+10V 20mA
3
Factory setting:
ACI Mode
AVI
2
1: Reserved
2: EV
3: GND
AVI
5K
Master Frequency
0 to 10V 47K
Sw2
1
4: SG-
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
ACI
ACI
4-20mA/0-10V
ACI/AVI switch
When switching to AVI,
it indicates AVI2
ACM
1
8
Analog Signal Common
E
For VFD*E*C models,
please refer to figure 8.
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Shielded leads & Cable
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 4 for models of VFD-E Series
VFD022E23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A,
VFD022E23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C, VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C
brake resistor
(optional)
BR
Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker)
-
+/B1
B2
Motor
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
R(L1)
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
IM
3~
S(L2)
T(L3)
E
E
SA
Recommended Circuit
RB
RC
RA
MC
when power supply
is turned OFF by a
fault output
Multi-function contact output
Refer to chapter2.4 for details.
Factory setting is
ON
OFF
RB
RC
MC
malfunction indication
+24V
FWD/Stop
REV/Stop
MO1
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Factory setting:
Drive is in operation
48V50mA Max.
Factory setting:
NPN Mode
NPN
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
Factory
setting
Sw1
Multi-function
Photocoulper Output
PNP
MCM
AFM
Please refer to Figure 7
for wiring of NPN
mode and PNP
mode.
Analog Multi-function
Output Terminal
factory setting: Analog
freq./ current meter
0~10VDC/2mA
Digital Signal Common
DCM
E
ACM
E
Analog Signal common
Factory setting: output
frequency
+10V
RS-485 serial interface
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Power supply
+10V 20mA
3
Factory setting:
ACI Mode
AVI
2
1: Reserved
2: EV
3: GND
4: SG-
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
AVI
5K
Master Frequency
0 to 10V 47K
Sw2
1
ACI
ACI
4-20mA/0-10V
ACI/AVI switch
When switching to AVI,
it indicates AVI2
ACM
1
8
Analog Signal Common
E
For VFD*E*C models,
please refer to figure 8.
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Shielded leads & Cable
2-6
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 5 for models of VFD-E Series
VFD002E11T/21T, VFD004E11A/21T, VFD007E21T
BR
brake resistor
(optional)
Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker)
B1
B2
Motor
R(L1)
S(L2)
R(L1)
S(L2)
U(T1)
V(T2)
IM
3~
W(T3)
E
E
SA
Recommended Circuit
RB
RC
RA
MC
when power supply
is turned OFF by a
fault output
Multi-function contact output
Refer to chapter2.4 for details.
Factory setting is
ON
OFF
RB
RC
MC
malfunction indication
+24V
FWD/Stop
REV/Stop
MO1
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Factory setting:
Drive is in operation
48V50mA Max.
Factory setting:
NPN Mode
NPN
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
Factory
setting
Sw1
Multi-function
Photocoulper Output
PNP
MCM
AFM
Please refer to Figure 7
for wiring of NPN
mode and PNP
mode.
Analog Multi-function
Output Terminal
factory setting: Analog
freq./ current meter
0~10VDC/2mA
Analog Signal common
Digital Signal Common
DCM
E
ACM
E
Factory setting: output
frequency
+10V
Power supply
+10V 20mA
3
Factory setting:
ACI Mode
AVI
RS-485
2
AVI
5K
Serial interface
Master Frequency
0 to 10V 47K
Sw2
1
1: Reserved
2: EV
3: GND
ACI
ACI
4-20mA/0-10V
ACI/AVI switch
When switching to AVI,
it indicates AVI2
4: SG-
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
ACM
1
8
Analog Signal Common
E
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Shielded leads & Cable
NOTE
For VFD-E-T series, the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals (B1 and B2) directly. But
it can't connect DC-BUS in parallel.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 6 for models of VFD-E Series
VFD002E23T, VFD004E23T/43T, VFD007E23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T
BR
brake resistor
(optional)
Fuse/NFB(No Fuse Breaker)
B1
R(L1)
S(L2)
B2
Motor
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
U(T1)
V(T2)
IM
3~
T(L3)
E
W(T3)
E
SA
Recommended Circuit
RB
RC
RA
MC
when power supply
is turned OFF by a
fault output
Multi-function contact output
Refer to chapter2.4 for details.
Factory setting is
ON
OFF
RB
RC
MC
malfunction indication
+24V
FWD/Stop
REV/Stop
MO1
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Factory setting:
Drive is in operation
48V50mA Max.
Factory setting:
NPN Mode
NPN
Multi-step 1
Multi-step 2
Multi-step 3
Multi-step 4
Factory
setting
Sw1
Multi-function
Photocoulper Output
PNP
MCM
AFM
Please refer to Figure 7
for wiring of NPN
mode and PNP
mode.
Analog Multi-function
Output Terminal
factory setting: Analog
freq./ current meter
0~10VDC/2mA
Analog Signal common
Digital Signal Common
DCM
E
ACM
E
Factory setting: output
frequency
+10V
Power supply
+10V 20mA
3
Factory setting:
ACI Mode
AVI
RS-485
2
AVI
5K
Serial interface
Master Frequency
0 to 10V 47K
Sw2
1
1: Reserved
2: EV
3: GND
ACI
ACI
4-20mA/0-10V
ACI/AVI switch
When switching to AVI,
it indicates AVI2
4: SG-
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
ACM
1
8
Analog Signal Common
E
Main circuit (power) terminals
Control circuit terminals
Shielded leads & Cable
NOTE
For VFD-E-T series, the braking resistor can be used by connecting terminals (B1 and B2) directly. But
it can't connect DC-BUS in parallel.
2-8
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Figure 7 Wiring for NPN mode and PNP mode
A. NPN mode without external power
NPN
PNP
Factory
setting
B. NPN mode with external power
24
Vdc
NPN
+
-
PNP
Factory
setting
C. PNP mode without external power
NPN
Sw1
PNP
Factory
setting
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
D. PNP mode with external power
NPN
Sw1
PNP
Factory
setting
+
24
Vdc
-
Figure 8 RJ-45 pin definition for VFD*E*C models
PIN
1
Signal
CAN_H
CAN_L
CAN_GND
SG+
Description
CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
Ground / 0V /V-
2
3
4
485 communication
5
SG-
485 communication
7
CAN_GND
Ground / 0V /V-
CAUTION!
1.
2.
The wiring of main circuit and control circuit should be separated to prevent erroneous actions.
Please use shield wire for the control wiring and not to expose the peeled-off net in front of the
terminal.
3.
4.
5.
Please use the shield wire or tube for the power wiring and ground the two ends of the shield
wire or tube.
Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it
comes in contact with high voltage.
The AC motor drive, motor and wiring may cause interference. To prevent the equipment
damage, please take care of the erroneous actions of the surrounding sensors and the
equipment.
6.
When the AC drive output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 are connected to the motor terminals
U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3, respectively. To permanently reverse the direction of motor rotation,
switch over any of the two motor leads.
2-10
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
7.
With long motor cables, high capacitive switching current peaks can cause over-current, high
leakage current or lower current readout accuracy. To prevent this, the motor cable should be
less than 20m for 3.7kW models and below. And the cable should be less than 50m for 5.5kW
models and above. For longer motor cables use an AC output reactor.
The AC motor drive, electric welding machine and the greater horsepower motor should be
grounded separately.
8.
9.
Use ground leads that comply with local regulations and keep them as short as possible.
10. No brake resistor is built in the VFD-E series, it can install brake resistor for those occasions
that use higher load inertia or frequent start/stop. Refer to Appendix B for details.
11. Multiple VFD-E units can be installed in one location. All the units should be grounded directly
to a common ground terminal, as shown in the figure below. Ensure there are no ground
loops.
Excellent
Good
Not allowed
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2.2 External Wiring
Items
Power
Explanations
Power Supply
Please follow the specific power
supply requirements shown in
Appendix A.
supply
There may be an inrush current
during power up. Please check the
chart of Appendix B and select the
correct fuse with rated current. Use of
an NFB is optional.
FUSE/NFB
Fuse/NFB
(Optional)
Magnetic
contactor
Please do not use a Magnetic
Magnetic
contactor
(Optional)
contactor as the I/O switch of the AC
motor drive, as it will reduce the
operating life cycle of the AC drive.
Used to improve the input power
factor, to reduce harmonics and
provide protection from AC line
disturbances. (surges, switching
spikes, short interruptions, etc.). AC
line reactor should be installed when
the power supply capacity is 500kVA
or more or advanced capacity is
activated .The wiring distance should
Input AC
Line Reactor
Input AC
Line Reactor
(Optional)
Zero-phase
Reactor
EMI Filter
S/L2
be 10m. Refer to appendix B for
≤
details.
Zero phase reactors are used to
reduce radio noise especially when
audio equipment is installed near the
inverter. Effective for noise reduction
on both the input and output sides.
Attenuation quality is good for a wide
range from AM band to 10MHz.
Appendix B specifies the zero phase
reactor. (RF220X00A)
R/L1
T/L3
Zero-phase
Reactor
(Ferrite Core
Common
Choke)
+/B1
B2
-
(Optional)
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
To reduce electromagnetic
interference.
Zero-phase
Reactor
EMI filter
Brake
Used to reduce the deceleration time
resistor and of the motor. Please refer to the chart
Output AC
Line Reactor
Brake unit
(Optional)
in Appendix B for specific Brake
resistors.
Motor surge voltage amplitude
depends on motor cable length. For
applications with long motor cable
(>20m), it is necessary to install a
Motor
Output AC
Line Reactor
(Optional)
2-12
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2.3 Main Circuit
2.3.1 Main Circuit Connection
Figure 1
For frame A: VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A,
VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C,
VFD007E21C/23C/43C, VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P,
VFD007E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD015E23P
Brake Resistor(Optional)
BR
Brake Unit
(Optional)
BUE
No fuse breaker
(NFB)
-
+
MC
Motor
R
S
T
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
IM
3~
E
E
Figure 2
For frame B: VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A,
VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C
For frame C: VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C,
VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C
Brake Resistor(Optional)
BR
No fuse breaker
(NFB)
-
+/B1
B2
MC
Motor
R
S
T
R(L1)
U(T1)
V(T2)
W(T3)
IM
3~
S(L2)
T(L3)
E
E
Figure 3
For Frame A: VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T,
VFD015E23T/43T
Brake Resistor
(Optional)
BR
No fuse breaker
(NFB)
B1
B2
MC
Motor
R
S
T
R(L1)
S(L2)
T(L3)
U(T1)
V(T2)
IM
3~
W(T3)
E
E
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Terminal Symbol
Explanation of Terminal Function
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
AC line input terminals (1-phase/3-phase)
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
+/B1~ B2
AC drive output terminals for connecting 3-phase induction motor
Connections for Brake resistor (optional)
+/B1, -
Connections for External Brake unit (BUE series)
Earth connection, please comply with local regulations.
CAUTION!
Mains power terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)
„
„
„
Connect these terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) via a no-fuse breaker or earth leakage breaker
to 3-phase AC power (some models to 1-phase AC power) for circuit protection. It is
unnecessary to consider phase-sequence.
It is recommended to add a magnetic contactor (MC) in the power input wiring to cut off
power quickly and reduce malfunction when activating the protection function of AC motor
drives. Both ends of the MC should have an R-C surge absorber.
Please make sure to fasten the screw of the main circuit terminals to prevent sparks
which is made by the loose screws due to vibration.
„
„
Please use voltage and current within the regulation shown in Appendix A.
When using a general GFCI (Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter), select a current sensor
with sensitivity of 200mA or above, and not less than 0.1-second operation time to avoid
nuisance tripping. For the specific GFCI of the AC motor drive, please select a current
sensor with sensitivity of 30mA or above.
„
„
Do NOT run/stop AC motor drives by turning the power ON/OFF. Run/stop AC motor
drives by RUN/STOP command via control terminals or keypad. If you still need to
run/stop AC drives by turning power ON/OFF, it is recommended to do so only ONCE per
hour.
Do NOT connect 3-phase models to a 1-phase power source.
Output terminals for main circuit (U, V, W)
2-14
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
„
„
The factory setting of the operation direction is forward running. The methods to control
the operation direction are: method 1, set by the communication parameters. Please refer
to the group 9 for details. Method2, control by the optional keypad KPE-LE02. Refer to
Appendix B for details.
When it needs to install the filter at the output side of terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3 on the
AC motor drive. Please use inductance filter. Do not use phase-compensation capacitors
or L-C (Inductance-Capacitance) or R-C (Resistance-Capacitance), unless approved by
Delta.
„
„
DO NOT connect phase-compensation capacitors or surge absorbers at the output
terminals of AC motor drives.
Use well-insulated motor, suitable for inverter operation.
Terminals [+/B1, B2] for connecting brake resistor
BR
BR
B1
B2
for m odels VFDxxExxT
+/B1
B2
or
„
„
„
Connect a brake resistor or brake unit in applications with frequent deceleration ramps,
short deceleration time, too low brake torque or requiring increased brake torque.
If the AC motor drive has a built-in brake chopper (frame B, frame C and VFDxxxExxT
models), connect the external brake resistor to the terminals [+/B1, B2].
Models of frame A don’t have a built-in brake chopper. Please connect an external
optional brake unit (BUE-series) and brake resistor. Refer to BUE series user manual for
details.
Brake resistor/unit(optional)
Please refer to Appendix B for details.
BR
BUE
+
-
„
„
Connect the terminals [+(P), -(N)] of the brake unit to the AC motor drive terminals [+/B1, -
]. The length of wiring should be less than 5m with cable.
When not used, please leave the terminals [+/B1, -] open.
WARNING!
Short-circuiting [B2] or [-] to [+/B1] can damage the AC motor drive.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
2.3.2 Main Circuit Terminals
Frame A
Frame C
Frame B
Frame
A
Power Terminals
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
Torque
Wire
Wire type
14kgf-cm
(12in-lbf)
12-14 AWG.
(3.3-2.1mm2)
Copper only, 75oC
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
18kgf-cm
8-18 AWG.
B
C
Copper only, 75oC
(8.4-0.8mm2)
(15.6in-lbf)
+/B1, B2, -,
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
30kgf-cm
(26in-lbf)
8-16 AWG.
Copper only, 75oC
(8.4-1.3mm2)
+/B1, B2, -
2-16
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
NOTE
Frame A: VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A,
VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C, VFD007E21C/23C/43C,
VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T,
VFD015E23T/43T, VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD007E21P/23P/43P,
VFD015E23P
Frame B: VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C,
VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C
Frame C: VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C,
VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C
For frame C: To connect 6 AWG (13.3 mm2) wires, use Recognized Ring Terminals
2.4 Control Terminals
Circuit diagram for digital inputs (NPN current 16mA.)
NPN Mode
PNP Mode
DCM
+24
Multi-Input
Terminal
multi-input
terminal
+24V
DCM
Internal Circuit
Internal Circuit
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
The position of the control terminals
RA
RB RC
AFM MCM MO1
RS-485
MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V
Terminal symbols and functions
Terminal
Factory Settings (NPN mode)
ON: Connect to DCM
Terminal Function
Symbol
ON:
Run in MI1 direction
MI1
Forward-Stop command
Reverse-Stop command
OFF:
Stop acc. to Stop Method
ON:
Run in MI2 direction
MI2
OFF:
Stop acc. to Stop Method
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
Multi-function Input 3
Multi-function Input 4
Multi-function Input 5
Multi-function Input 6
Refer to Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08 for programming the
Multi-function Inputs.
ON: the activation current is 5.5mA.
μ
OFF: leakage current tolerance is 10 A.
+24V
DCM
DC Voltage Source
+24VDC, 20mA used for PNP mode.
Common for digital inputs and used for NPN
mode.
Digital Signal Common
Resistive Load:
Multi-function Relay output
(N.O.) a
RA
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 240VAC
5A(N.O.)/3A(N.C.) 24VDC
Inductive Load:
Multi-function Relay output
(N.C.) b
RB
RC
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 240VAC
1.5A(N.O.)/0.5A(N.C.) 24VDC
Refer to Pr.03.00 for programming
Multi-function Relay common
2-18
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Factory Settings (NPN mode)
ON: Connect to DCM
Terminal
Symbol
Terminal Function
Maximum 48VDC, 50mA
Refer to Pr.03.01 for programming
Max: 48Vdc
50mA
MO1-DCM
Mo1
Multi-function Output 1
(Photocoupler)
MO1
MCM
internal circuit
MCM
+10V
Multi-function output common Common for Multi-function Outputs
Potentiometer power supply
Analog voltage Input
+10VDC 3mA
Impedance:
Resolution:
Range:
47kΩ
+10V
10 bits
AVI circuit
0 ~ 10VDC =
AVI
0 ~ Max. Output Frequency
(Pr.01.00)
AVI
Selection:
Set-up:
Pr.02.00, Pr.02.09, Pr.10.00
ACM
Pr.04.11 ~ Pr.04.14, 04.19~04.23
internal circuit
Analog control signal
(common)
ACM
ACI
Common for AVI, ACI, AFM
Analog current Input
Impedance:
Resolution:
Range:
250Ω
ACI circuit
10 bits
ACI
4 ~ 20mA =
0 ~ Max. Output Frequency
(Pr.01.00)
Selection:
Set-up:
Pr.02.00, Pr.02.09, Pr.10.00
Pr.04.15 ~ Pr.04.18
ACM
internal circuit
Analog output meter
ACM circuit
0 to 10V, 2mA
Impedance:
Output current
Resolution:
Range:
100kΩ
AFM
2mA max
AFM
0~10V
potentiometer
Max. 2mA
8 bits
0 ~ 10VDC
Pr.03.03 to Pr.03.04
ACM
Function:
internal circuit
NOTE: Control signal wiring size: 18 AWG (0.75 mm2) with shielded wire.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
Analog inputs (AVI, ACI, ACM)
„
Analog input signals are easily affected by external noise. Use shielded wiring and keep it
as short as possible (<20m) with proper grounding. If the noise is inductive, connecting
the shield to terminal ACM can bring improvement.
„
If the analog input signals are affected by noise from the AC motor drive, please connect
μ
a capacitor (0.1 F and above) and ferrite core as indicated in the following diagrams:
AVI/ACI
C
ACM
ferrite core
wind each wires 3 times or more around the core
Digital inputs (MI1~MI6, DCM)
When using contacts or switches to control the digital inputs, please use high quality
components to avoid contact bounce.
Digital outputs (MO1, MCM)
„
„
„
Make sure to connect the digital outputs to the right polarity, see wiring diagrams.
When connecting a relay to the digital outputs, connect a surge absorber or fly-back diode
across the coil and check the polarity.
General
„
Keep control wiring as far away as possible from the power wiring and in separate
conduits to avoid interference. If necessary let them cross only at 90º angle.
The AC motor drive control wiring should be properly installed and not touch any live
power wiring or terminals.
„
DANGER!
Damaged insulation of wiring may cause personal injury or damage to circuits/equipment if it comes
in contact with high voltage.
2-20
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
The specification for the control terminals
RA
RB RC
The position of the control terminals
AFM MCM MO1
Terminals 1
Terminals 2
RS-485 port
MI1 MI2 MI3 MI4 MI5 MI6 DCM DCM 24V ACM AVI ACI 10V
Frame
A, B, C
Control Terminals
Terminals 1
Torque
Wire
5 kgf-cm (4.4 in-lbf)
2 kgf-cm (1.7 in-lbf)
12-24 AWG (3.3-0.2mm2)
16-24 AWG (1.3-0.2mm2)
Terminals 2
NOTE
Frame A: VFD002E11A/21A/23A, VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A,
VFD015E23A/43A, VFD002E11C/21C/23C, VFD004E11C/21C/23C/43C, VFD007E21C/23C/43C,
VFD015E23C/43C, VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T, VFD007E21T/23T/43T,
VFD015E23T/43T, VFD002E11P/21P/23P, VFD004E11P/21P/23P/43P, VFD007E21P/23P/43P,
VFD015E23P
Frame B: VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A, VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A, VFD007E11C,
VFD015E21C, VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C
Frame C: VFD055E23A/43A, VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C,
VFD075E23C/43C, VFD110E43C
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring|
This page intentionally left blank
2-22
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up
„
Make sure that the wiring is correct. In particular, check that the
output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3. are NOT connected to power
and that the drive is well grounded.
„
„
„
Verify that no other equipment is connected to the AC motor drive
Do NOT operate the AC motor drive with humid hands.
Please check if READY LED is ON when power is applied. Check if
the connection is well when option from the digital keypad KPE-
LE02.
„
It should be stopped when fault occurs during running and refer to
“Fault Code Information and Maintenance” for solution. Please do
NOT touch output terminals U, V, W when power is still applied to
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T even when the AC motor drive has stopped. The
DC-link capacitors may still be charged to hazardous voltage
levels, even if the power has been turned off.
3.1 Keypad
There are three LEDs on the keypad:
LED READY: It will light up after applying power. The light won’t be off until the capacitors are
discharged to safe voltage levels after power off.
LED RUN: It will light up when the motor is running.
LED FAULT: It will light up when fault occurs.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
3-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up|
3.2 Operation Method
The operation method can be set via communication, control terminals and optional keypad KPE-
LE02.
RS485 port (RJ-45)
It needs to use VFD-USB01 or
IFD8500 converter to connect
to the PC.
3-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up|
Operation
Method
Operation Command
Source
Frequency Source
When setting communication by the PC, it needs to use VFD-USB01 or
IFD8500 converter to connect to the PC.
Operate from the
communication
Refer to the communication address 2000H and 2101H setting for details.
+24V
FWD/Stop
MI1
Factory setting:
REV/Stop
NPN Mode
MI2
NPN
Multi-step 1
Factory
MI3
Sw1
setting
Multi-step 2
MI4
PNP
Multi-step 3
MI5
Multi-step 4
MI6
Digital Signal Common
DCM
E
* Don't apply the mains voltage directly
to above terminals.
+10V
Operate from
external signal
Power supply
3
Factory setting:
+10V 3mA
ACI Mode
2
AVI
5K
AVI
Master Frequency
0 to 10V 47K
Sw2
1
ACI
ACI
4-20mA/0-10V
ACI/AVI switch
When switching to AVI,
it indicates AVI2
ACM
Analog Signal Common
Figure 3-1
E
External terminals input:
MI1-DCM
MI3-DCM (Set Pr.04.05=10)
MI4-DCM (Set Pr.04.06=11)
MI2-DCM
Operate from the
optional keypad
(KPE-LE02)
3.3 Trial Run
The factory setting of the operation source is from the external terminal (Pr.02.01=2).
1.
Both MI1-DCM and MI2-DCM need to connect a switch for switching FWD/STOP and
REV/STOP.
2.
Please connect a potentiometer among AVI, 10V and DCM or apply power 0-10Vdc to
AVI-DCM (as shown in figure 3-1)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3 Keypad and Start Up|
3.
4.
Setting the potentiometer or AVI-DCM 0-10Vdc power to less than 1V.
Setting MI1=On for forward running. And if you want to change to reverse running, you
should set MI2=On. And if you want to decelerate to stop, please set MI1/MI2=Off.
5.
Check following items:
„
„
„
Check if the motor direction of rotation is correct.
Check if the motor runs steadily without abnormal noise and vibration.
Check if acceleration and deceleration are smooth.
If you want to perform a trial run by using optional digital keypad, please operate by the following
steps.
1.
2.
3.
Connect digital keypad to AC motor drive
correctly.
After applying the power, verify that LED
display shows F 0.0Hz.
Set Pr.02.00=0 and Pr.02.01=0. (Refer to
Appendix B operation flow for detail)
4.
5.
Press
around 5Hz.
key to set frequency to
key for forward running.
Press
And if you want to change to reverse
running, you should press
in
page. And if you want to
decelerate to stop, please press
key.
6.
Check following items:
„
Check if the motor direction of rotation
is correct.
„
„
Check if the motor runs steadily
without abnormal noise and vibration.
Check if acceleration and deceleration
are smooth.
If the results of trial run are normal, please start the formal run.
3-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters
The VFD-E parameters are divided into 14 groups by property for easy setting. In most applications,
the user can finish all parameter settings before start-up without the need for re-adjustment during
operation.
The 14 groups are as follows:
Group 0: User Parameters
Group 1: Basic Parameters
Group 2: Operation Method Parameters
Group 3: Output Function Parameters
Group 4: Input Function Parameters
Group 5: Multi-Step Speed Parameters
Group 6: Protection Parameters
Group 7: Motor Parameters
Group 8: Special Parameters
Group 9: Communication Parameters
Group 10: PID Control Parameters
Group 11: Multi-function Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card
Group 12: Analog Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card
Group 13: PG function Parameters for Extension Card
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4.1 Summary of Parameter Settings
ꢀ: The parameter can be set during operation.
Group 0 User Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
00.00
Identity Code of the Read-only
AC motor drive
##
00.01
Rated Current
Display of the AC
motor drive
Read-only
#.#
0: Parameter can be read/written
1: All parameters are read only
6: Clear PLC program (NOT for VFD*E*C
models)
00.02
Parameter Reset
0
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings
(50Hz, 230V/400V or 220V/380V depends on
Pr.00.12)
10: All parameters are reset to factory
settings (60Hz, 220V/440V)
0: Display the frequency command value
(Fxxx)
1: Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx)
2: Display the content of user-defined unit
(Uxxx)
Start-up Display
Selection
ꢀ00.03
0
0
3: Multifunction display, see Pr.00.04
4: FWD/REV command
5: PLCx (PLC selections: PLC0/PLC1/PLC2)
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Content of Multi-
function Display
0: Display the content of user-defined unit
(Uxxx)
ꢀ00.04
1: Display the counter value (c)
2: Display PLC D1043 value (C) (NOT for
VFD*E*C models)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (u)
4: Display output voltage (E)
4-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
5: Display PID analog feedback signal value
(b) (%)
6: Output power factor angle (n)
7: Display output power (P)
8: Display the estimated value of torque as it
relates to current (t)
9: Display AVI (I) (V)
10: Display ACI / AVI2 (i) (mA/V)
11: Display the temperature of IGBT (h) (°C)
12: Display AVI3/ACI2 level (I.)
13: Display AVI4/ACI3 level (i.)
14: Display PG speed in RPM (G)
15: Display motor number (M)
User-Defined
Coefficient K
ꢀ00.05
0. 1 to 160.0
Read-only
1.0
00.06
Power Board
#.##
Software Version
00.07
Control Board
Read-only
#.##
Software Version
00.08
00.09
Password Input
Password Set
0 to 9999
0 to 9999
0
0
0: V/f Control
00.10
00.11
00.12
Control Method
Reserved
0
1: Vector Control
0: 230V/400V
1: 220V/380V
50Hz Base Voltage
Selection
0
Group 1 Basic Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Maximum Output
Frequency (Fmax)
01.00
50.00 to 600.0 Hz
60.00
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Maximum Voltage
Frequency (Fbase)
(Motor 0)
01.01
0.10 to 600.0 Hz
60.00
Maximum Output
Voltage (Vmax)
(Motor 0)
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
220.0
440.0
01.02
Mid-Point Frequency
(Fmid) (Motor 0)
01.03
01.04
0.10 to 600.0 Hz
1.50
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
10.0
20.0
Mid-Point Voltage
(Vmid) (Motor 0)
Minimum Output
Frequency (Fmin)
(Motor 0)
01.05
01.06
0.10 to 600.0 Hz
1.50
Minimum Output
Voltage (Vmin)
(Motor 0)
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
0.1 to 120.0%
10.0
20.0
Output Frequency
Upper Limit
01.07
01.08
110.0
0.0
Output Frequency
Lower Limit
0.0 to100.0 %
ꢀ01.09
ꢀ01.10
ꢀ01.11
ꢀ01.12
ꢀ01.13
Accel Time 1
Decel Time 1
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
10.0
10.0
10.0
10.0
Jog Acceleration
Time
1.0
ꢀ01.14
ꢀ01.15
Jog Deceleration
Time
0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
1.0
Jog Frequency
0.10 Hz to Fmax (Pr.01.00) Hz
0: Linear Accel/Decel
6.00
1: Auto Accel, Linear Decel
2: Linear Accel, Auto Decel
3: Auto Accel/Decel (Set by load)
Auto acceleration /
deceleration (refer
to Accel/Decel time
setting)
01.16
0
4: Auto Accel/Decel (set by Accel/Decel
Time setting)
4-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
Acceleration S-
Curve
01.17
0.0 to 10.0 / 0.00 to 10.00 sec
0.0
0.0
Deceleration S-
Curve
01.18
01.19
0.0 to 10.0 / 0.00 to 10.00 sec
0: Unit: 0.1 sec
1: Unit: 0.01 sec
0.00 to 600.00 sec
Accel/Decel Time
Unit
0
Delay Time at 0Hz
for Simple Position
01.20
01.21
01.22
01.23
01.24
01.25
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00 to 600.00 sec
0.00 to 600.00 sec
0.00 to 600.00 sec
0.00 to 600.00 sec
0.00 to 600.00 sec
Delay Time at 10Hz
for Simple Position
Delay Time at 20Hz
for Simple Position
Delay Time at 30Hz
for Simple Position
Delay Time at 40Hz
for Simple Position
Delay Time at 50Hz
for Simple Position
Maximum Voltage
01.26
01.27
Frequency (Fbase) 0.10 to 600.0 Hz
(Motor 1)
60.00
Maximum Output
Voltage (Vmax)
(Motor 1)
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
220.0
440.0
Mid-Point
01.28
01.29
01.30
01.31
Frequency (Fmid)
(Motor 1)
0.10 to 600.0 Hz
1.50
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
10.0
20.0
Mid-Point Voltage
(Vmid) (Motor 1)
Minimum Output
Frequency (Fmin)
(Motor 1)
0.10 to 600.0 Hz
1.50
Minimum Output
Voltage (Vmin)
(Motor 1)
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
10.0
20.0
Maximum Voltage
01.32
Frequency (Fbase) 0.10 to 600.0 Hz
(Motor 2)
60.00
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
Customer
Maximum Output
Voltage (Vmax)
(Motor 2)
220.0
440.0
01.33
Mid-Point
01.34
01.35
01.36
01.37
Frequency (Fmid)
(Motor 2)
0.10 to 600.0 Hz
1.50
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
10.0
20.0
Mid-Point Voltage
(Vmid) (Motor 2)
Minimum Output
Frequency (Fmin)
(Motor 2)
0.10 to 600.0 Hz
1.50
Minimum Output
Voltage (Vmin)
(Motor 2)
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
10.0
20.0
Maximum Voltage
01.38
01.39
Frequency (Fbase) 0.10 to 600.0 Hz
(Motor 3)
60.00
Maximum Output
Voltage (Vmax)
(Motor 3)
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
220.0
440.0
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
Mid-Point
01.40
01.41
01.42
01.43
Frequency (Fmid)
(Motor 3)
0.10 to 600.0 Hz
1.50
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
10.0
20.0
Mid-Point Voltage
(Vmid) (Motor 3)
Minimum Output
Frequency (Fmin)
(Motor 3)
0.10 to 600.0 Hz
1.50
Minimum Output
Voltage (Vmin)
(Motor 3)
115V/230V series: 0.1V to 255.0V
460V series: 0.1V to 510.0V
10.0
20.0
4-6
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 2 Operation Method Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-
function Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used
frequency saved.
Source of First
Master Frequency
Command
1: 0 to +10V from AVI
ꢀ02.00
1
2: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from
AVI2
3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication
4: Digital keypad potentiometer
5: CANopen communication
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET
enabled.
2: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET
disabled.
Source of First
Operation
Command
ꢀ02.01
1
3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication.
Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
4: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication.
Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
5: CANopen communication. Keypad
STOP/RESET disabled.
0: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: coast to stop
1: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: coast to stop
2: STOP: ramp to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop
3: STOP: coast to stop; E.F.: ramp to stop
02.02
Stop Method
0
PWM Carrier
Frequency
Selections
02.03
02.04
02.05
1 to 15kHz
8
0
1
0: Enable forward/reverse operation
1: Disable reverse operation
Motor Direction
Control
2: Disabled forward operation
0: Disable. Operation status is not changed
even if operation command source Pr.02.01
is changed.
Line Start Lockout
1: Enable. Operation status is not changed
even if operation command source Pr.02.01
is changed.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
2: Disable. Operation status will change if
operation command source Pr.02.01 is
changed.
3: Enable. Operation status will change if
operation command source Pr.02.01 is
changed.
0: Decelerate to 0 Hz
Loss of ACI Signal
(4-20mA)
1: Coast to stop and display “AErr”
02.06
1
2: Continue operation by last frequency
command
0: by UP/DOWN Key
1: Based on accel/decel time
2: Constant speed (Pr.02.08)
3: Pulse input unit (Pr.02.08)
02.07
02.08
Up/Down Mode
0
Accel/Decel Rate of
Change of
UP/DOWN
0.01~10.00 Hz
0.01
Operation with
Constant Speed
0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-
function Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used
frequency saved.
1: 0 to +10V from AVI
Source of Second
Frequency
Command
2: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from
AVI2
ꢀ02.09
0
3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication
4: Digital keypad potentiometer
5: CANopen communication
0: First Master Frequency Command
Combination of the
First and Second
Master Frequency
Command
1: First Master Frequency Command+
Second Master Frequency Command
ꢀ02.10
0
2: First Master Frequency Command -
Second Master Frequency Command
Keypad Frequency
Command
0.00 to 600.0Hz
ꢀ02.11
ꢀ02.12
60.00
60.00
Communication
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0Hz
Command
4-8
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
0: Save Keypad & Communication
Frequency
The Selections for
Saving Keypad or
Communication
Frequency
1: Save Keypad Frequency only
02.13
0
Command
2: Save Communication Frequency only
0: by Current Freq Command
1: by Zero Freq Command
Initial Frequency
Selection (for
keypad &
02.14
02.15
0
RS485/USB)
2: by Frequency Display at Stop
Initial Frequency
Setpoint (for keypad 0.00 ~ 600.0Hz
& RS485/USB)
60.00
Read Only
Bit0=1: by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00)
Display the Master
Freq Command
Source
Bit1=1: by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09)
Bit2=1: by Multi-input function
02.16
##
Bit3=1: by PLC Freq command (NOT for
VFD*E*C models)
Read Only
Bit0=1: by Digital Keypad
Bit1=1: by RS485 communication
Bit2=1: by External Terminal 2/3 wire mode
Bit3=1: by Multi-input function
Display the
Operation
Command Source
02.17
##
Bit4=1: by PLC Operation Command (NOT
for VFD*E*C models)
Group 3 Output Function Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
0: No function
8
Multi-function
Output Relay (RA1,
RB1, RC1)
1: AC drive operational
2: Master frequency attained
3: Zero speed
03.00
4: Over torque detection
5: Base-Block (B.B.) indication
6: Low-voltage indication
7: Operation mode indication
1
Multi-function
Output Terminal
MO1
03.01
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
8: Fault indication
9: Desired frequency 1 attained
10: Terminal count value attained
11: Preliminary count value attained
12: Over Voltage Stall supervision
13: Over Current Stall supervision
14: Heat sink overheat warning
15: Over Voltage supervision
16: PID supervision
17: Forward command
18: Reverse command
19: Zero speed output signal
20: Warning(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, SAvE)
21: Brake control (Desired frequency
attained)
22: Drive ready
23: Desired frequency 2 attained
0.00 to 600.0Hz
03.02
Desired Frequency
1 Attained
0.00
0
Analog Output
Signal Selection
(AFM)
0: Analog frequency meter
1: Analog current meter
ꢀ03.03
ꢀ03.04 Analog Output Gain 1 to 200%
100
0
03.05
Terminal Count
Value
0 to 9999
Preliminary Count
Value
03.06
0 to 9999
0
0: Terminal count value attained, no EF
display
EF Active When
Terminal Count
Value Attained
03.07
03.08
0
0
1: Terminal count value attained, EF active
0: Fan always ON
Fan Control
1: 1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan
will be OFF
2: Fan ON when AC motor drive runs, fan
OFF when AC motor drive stops
4-10
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
3: Fan ON when preliminary heatsink
temperature attained
Read only
Bit0=1:RLY used by PLC
Bit1=1:MO1 used by PLC
Bit2=1:MO2/RA2 used by PLC
Bit3=1:MO3/RA3 used by PLC
Bit4=1:MO4/RA4 used by PLC
Bit5=1:MO5/RA5 used by PLC
Bit6=1:MO6/RA6 used by PLC
Bit7=1:MO7/RA7 used by PLC
Read only
The Digital Output
Used by PLC
03.09
##
(NOT for VFD*E*C
models)
The Analog Output
Used by PLC
Bit0=1:AFM used by PLC
Bit1=1: AO1 used by PLC
Bit2=1: AO2 used by PLC
03.10
##
(NOT for VFD*E*C
models)
Brake Release
Frequency
03.11
03.12
0.00 to 20.00Hz
0.00 to 20.00Hz
0.00
0.00
Brake Engage
Frequency
Read only
Bit0: RLY Status
Bit1: MO1 Status
Bit2: MO2/RA2 Status
Bit3: MO3/RA3 Status
Bit4: MO4/RA4 Status
Bit5: MO5/RA5 Status
Bit6: MO6/RA6 Status
Bit7: MO7/RA7 Status
Display the Status of
Multi-function
Output Terminals
03.13
03.14
##
Desired Frequency
2 Attained
0.00 to 600.0Hz
0.00
Group 4 Input Function Parameters
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Keypad
Potentiometer Bias
ꢀ04.00
0.0 to 100.0 %
0.0
00
Keypad
Potentiometer Bias
Polarity
0: Positive bias
1: Negative bias
ꢀ04.01
ꢀ04.02
Keypad
Potentiometer Gain
0.1 to 200.0 %
100.0
0
Keypad
0: No negative bias command
Potentiometer
Negative Bias,
Reverse Motion
Enable/Disable
04.03
04.04
1: Negative bias: REV motion enabled
2-wire/3-wire
Operation Control
Modes
0: 2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
1: 2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP
2: 3-wire operation
0
1
04.05
04.06
04.07
04.08
Multi-function Input 0: No function
Terminal (MI3)
1: Multi-Step speed command 1
2: Multi-Step speed command 2
Multi-function Input 3: Multi-Step speed command 3
Terminal (MI4)
2
3
4
4: Multi-Step speed command 4
5: External reset
Multi-function Input 6: Accel/Decel inhibit
Terminal (MI5)
7: Accel/Decel time selection command
8: Jog Operation
Multi-function Input 9: External base block
Terminal (MI6)
10: Up: Increment master frequency
11: Down: Decrement master frequency
12: Counter Trigger Signal
13: Counter reset
14: E.F. External Fault Input
15: PID function disabled
16: Output shutoff stop
4-12
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
17: Parameter lock enable
18: Operation command selection (external
terminals)
19: Operation command selection(keypad)
20: Operation command selection
(communication)
21: FWD/REV command
22: Source of second frequency command
23: Run/Stop PLC Program (PLC1) (NOT for
VFD*E*C models)
23: Quick Stop (Only for VFD*E*C models)
24: Download/execute/monitor PLC Program
(PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
25: Simple position function
26: OOB (Out of Balance Detection)
27: Motor selection (bit 0)
28: Motor selection (bit 1)
Bit0:MI1
Bit1:MI2
Bit2:MI3
Bit3:MI4
Bit4:MI5
Bit5:MI6
Bit6:MI7
Multi-function Input
Contact Selection
04.09
0
Bit7:MI8
Bit8:MI9
Bit9:MI10
Bit10:MI11
Bit11:MI12
0:N.O., 1:N.C.
P.S.:MI1 to MI3 will be invalid when it is 3-
wire control.
Digital Terminal
Input Debouncing
Time
04.10
1 to 20 (*2ms)
1
Min AVI Voltage
0.0 to 10.0V
04.11
04.12
0.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
Min AVI Frequency
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
04.13
Explanation
Max AVI Voltage
Max AVI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0%
Settings
Customer
0.0 to 10.0V
10.0
100.0
4.0
04.14
Min ACI Current
Min ACI Frequency
Max ACI Current
0.0 to 20.0mA
0.0 to 100.0%
04.15
04.16
0.0
0.0 to 20.0mA
04.17
20.0
100.0
Max ACI Frequency 0.0 to 100.0%
04.18
0: ACI
ACI/AVI2 Selection
1: AVI2
04.19
0
Min AVI2 Voltage
Min AVI2 Frequency
Max AVI2 Voltage
0.0 to 10.0V
04.20
04.21
04.22
0.0
0.0
0.0 to 100.0%
0.0 to 10.0V
10.0
Max AVI2
Frequency
0.0 to 100.0%
Read only
04.23
100.0
Bit0=1:MI1 used by PLC
Bit1=1:MI2 used by PLC
Bit2=1:MI3 used by PLC
Bit3=1:MI4 used by PLC
Bit4=1:MI5 used by PLC
Bit5=1:MI6 used by PLC
Bit6=1: MI7 used by PLC
Bit7=1: MI8 used by PLC
Bit8=1: MI9 used by PLC
Bit9=1: MI10 used by PLC
Bit10=1: MI11 used by PLC
Bit11=1: MI12 used by PLC
The Digital Input
Used by PLC
04.24
##
(NOT for VFD*E*C
models)
4-14
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
Read only
Bit0=1:AVI used by PLC
Bit1=1:ACI/AVI2 used by PLC
Bit2=1: AI1 used by PLC
Bit3=1: AI2 used by PLC
Read only
The Analog Input
Used by PLC
04.25
##
(NOT for VFD*E*C
models)
Bit0: MI1 Status
Bit1: MI2 Status
Bit2: MI3 Status
Bit3: MI4 Status
Bit4: MI5 Status
Display the Status
of Multi-function
Input Terminal
04.26
##
Bit5: MI6 Status
Bit6: MI7 Status
Bit7: MI8 Status
Bit8: MI9 Status
Bit9: MI10 Status
Bit10: MI11 Status
Bit11: MI12 Status
0~4095
0
0
Internal/External
ꢀ04.27 Multi-function Input
Terminals Selection
Internal Terminal
Status
0~4095
ꢀ04.28
Group 5 Multi-Step Speeds Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
ꢀ05.00
1st Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00
ꢀ05.01
2nd Step Speed
Frequency
0.00
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
ꢀ05.02
3rd Step Speed
Frequency
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
ꢀ05.03
ꢀ05.04
ꢀ05.05
ꢀ05.06
ꢀ05.07
ꢀ05.08
ꢀ05.09
ꢀ05.10
ꢀ05.11
ꢀ05.12
ꢀ05.13
ꢀ05.14
4th Step Speed
Frequency
5th Step Speed
Frequency
6th Step Speed
Frequency
7th Step Speed
Frequency
8th Step Speed
Frequency
9th Step Speed
Frequency
10th Step Speed
Frequency
11th Step Speed
Frequency
12th Step Speed
Frequency
13th Step Speed
Frequency
14th Step Speed
Frequency
15th Step Speed
Frequency
Group 6 Protection Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
115/230V series: 330.0V to 410.0V
460V series: 660.0V to 820.0V
390.0V
780.0V
Over-Voltage Stall
Prevention
06.00
0.0: Disable over-voltage stall prevention
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Accel
0:Disable
06.01
170
20 to 250%
4-16
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Operation
0:Disable
06.02
170
20 to 250%
0: Disabled
1: Enabled during constant speed operation.
After the over-torque is detected, keep
running until OL1 or OL occurs.
0
2: Enabled during constant speed operation.
After the over-torque is detected, stop
running.
Over-Torque
Detection Mode
(OL2)
06.03
3: Enabled during accel. After the over-torque
is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL
occurs.
4: Enabled during accel. After the over-torque
is detected, stop running.
Over-Torque
Detection Level
ꢀ06.04
10 to 200%
150
0.1
Over-Torque
Detection Time
06.05
0.1 to 60.0 sec
Electronic Thermal
Overload Relay
Selection
0: Standard motor (self cooled by fan)
1: Special motor (forced external cooling)
2: Disabled
06.06
06.07
2
Electronic Thermal
Characteristic
30 to 600 sec
60
0
0: No fault
1: Over current (oc)
2: Over voltage (ov)
3: IGBT Overheat (oH1)
4: Power Board Overheat (oH2)
5: Overload (oL)
Present Fault
Record
06.08
6: Overload1 (oL1)
7: Motor over load (oL2)
8: External fault (EF)
06.09
Second Most
Recent Fault Record
9: Current exceeds 2 times rated current
during accel.(ocA)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current
during decel.(ocd)
11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current
during steady state operation (ocn)
12: Ground fault (GFF)
13: Reserved
14: Phase-Loss (PHL)
15: Reserved
16: Auto Acel/Decel failure (CFA)
17: SW/Password protection (codE)
18: Power Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.0)
19: Power Board CPU READ failure (cF2.0)
06.10
06.11
Third Most Recent
Fault Record
20: CC, OC Hardware protection failure
(HPF1)
Fourth Most Recent 21: OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2)
Fault Record
22: GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3)
23: OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4)
24: U-phase error (cF3.0)
25: V-phase error (cF3.1)
Fifth Most Recent
06.12
Fault Record
26: W-phase error (cF3.2)
27: DCBUS error (cF3.3)
28: IGBT Overheat (cF3.4)
29: Power Board Overheat (cF3.5)
30: Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.1)
31: Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF2.1)
32: ACI signal error (AErr)
33: Reserved
34: Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1)
35-39: Reserved
40: Communication time-out error of control
board and power board (CP10)
4-18
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 7 Motor Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
07.00
Motor Rated Current 30 %FLA to 120% FLA
(Motor 0)
FLA
Motor No-Load
07.01
0%FLA to 99% FLA
Current (Motor 0)
0.4*FLA
Torque
ꢀ07.02
ꢀ07.03
Compensation
(Motor 0)
0.0 to 10.0
0.0
Slip Compensation
(Used without PG)
(Motor 0)
0.00 to 10.00
0.00
0: Disable
Motor Parameters
Auto Tuning
07.04
07.05
1: Auto tuning R1
0
0
2: Auto tuning R1 + no-load test
Motor Line-to-line
Resistance R1
(Motor 0)
0~65535 mΩ
Motor Rated Slip
(Motor 0)
07.06
07.07
0.00 to 20.00 Hz
0 to 250%
3.00
200
Slip Compensation
Limit
Torque
07.08
07.09
07.10
Compensation Time 0.01 ~10.00 Sec
Constant
0.10
0.20
0
Slip Compensation
0.05 ~10.00 sec
Time Constant
Accumulative Motor
Operation Time
(Min.)
0 to 1439 Min.
0 to 65535 Day
Accumulative Motor
Operation Time
(Day)
07.11
07.12
07.13
0
0
0: Disable
1: Enable
Motor PTC
Overheat Protection
Input Debouncing
Time of the PTC
Protection
0~9999(*2ms)
100
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Motor PTC
07.14
Overheat Protection 0.1~10.0V
Level
2.4
1.2
0.6
Motor PTC
07.15
07.16
Overheat Warning
Level
0.1~10.0V
0.1~5.0V
Motor PTC
Overheat Reset
Delta Level
0: Warn and RAMP to stop
1: Warn and COAST to stop
2: Warn and keep running
Treatment of the
Motor PTC
Overheat
07.17
0
Motor Rated Current
(Motor 1)
07.18
07.19
30 %FLA to 120% FLA
0%FLA to 99% FLA
FLA
Motor No-Load
Current (Motor 1)
0.4*FLA
Torque
ꢀ07.20
ꢀ07.21
07.22
Compensation
(Motor 1)
0.0 to 10.0
0.0
0.00
0
Slip Compensation
(Used without PG)
(Motor 1)
0.00 to 10.00
0~65535 mΩ
Motor Line-to-line
Resistance R1
(Motor 1)
Motor Rated Slip
(Motor 1)
07.23
07.24
07.25
07.26
0.00 to 20.00 Hz
2 to 10
3.00
4
Motor Pole Number
(Motor 1)
Motor Rated Current
(Motor 2)
30 %FLA to 120% FLA
0%FLA to 99% FLA
FLA
Motor No-Load
Current (Motor 2)
0.4*FLA
Torque
ꢀ07.27
ꢀ07.28
Compensation
(Motor 2)
0.0 to 10.0
0.0
Slip Compensation
(Used without PG)
(Motor 2)
0.00 to 10.00
0.00
4-20
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Motor Line-to-line
Resistance R1
(Motor 2)
07.29
0
0~65535 mΩ
Motor Rated Slip
(Motor 2)
07.30
07.31
07.32
07.33
0.00 to 20.00 Hz
2 to 10
3.00
4
Motor Pole Number
(Motor 3)
Motor Rated Current
(Motor 3)
30 %FLA to 120% FLA
0%FLA to 99% FLA
FLA
Motor No-Load
Current (Motor 3)
0.4*FLA
Torque
ꢀ07.34
ꢀ07.35
07.36
Compensation
(Motor 3)
0.0 to 10.0
0.0
0.00
0
Slip Compensation
(Used without PG)
(Motor 3)
0.00 to 10.00
0~65535 mΩ
Motor Line-to-line
Resistance R1
(Motor 3)
Motor Rated Slip
(Motor 3)
07.37
07.38
0.00 to 20.00 Hz
2 to 10
3.00
4
Motor Pole Number
(Motor 3)
Group 8 Special Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
08.00
Explanation
Settings
Customer
DC Brake Current
Level
0 to 100%
0
DC Brake Time
during Start-Up
08.01
0.0 to 60.0 sec
0.0 to 60.0 sec
0.0
0.0
DC Brake Time
during Stopping
08.02
Start-Point for DC
Brake
08.03
0.00 to 600.0Hz
0.00
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
0: Operation stops after momentary power
loss
1: Operation continues after momentary
power loss, speed search starts with the
Master Frequency reference value
Momentary Power
Loss Operation
Selection
08.04
0
2: Operation continues after momentary
power loss, speed search starts with the
minimum frequency
Maximum Allowable
Power Loss Time
08.05
08.06
0.1 to 5.0 sec
2.0
1
0: Disable speed search
Base-block Speed
Search
1: Speed search starts with last frequency
command
2: Starts with minimum output frequency
B.B. Time for Speed
Search
08.07
08.08
08.09
08.10
08.11
08.12
08.13
0.1 to 5.0 sec
0.5
Current Limit for
Speed Search
30 to 200%
150
Skip Frequency 1
Upper Limit
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
Skip Frequency 1
Lower Limit
Skip Frequency 2
Upper Limit
Skip Frequency 2
Lower Limit
Skip Frequency 3
Upper Limit
Skip Frequency 3
Lower Limit
08.14
08.15
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.00
0
Auto Restart After
Fault
0 to 10 (0=disable)
Auto Reset Time at 0.1 to 6000 sec
Restart after Fault
08.16
08.17
60.0
0
0: Disable
Auto Energy Saving
1: Enable
4-22
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
0: AVR function enable
1: AVR function disable
08.18
AVR Function
0
2: AVR function disable for decel.
3: AVR function disable for stop
115V / 230V series: 370.0to 430.0V
460V series: 740.0 to 860.0V
0.0~5.0
380.0
760.0
Software Brake
Level
08.19
Compensation
Coefficient for Motor
Instability
ꢀ08.20
0.0
0.1 to 120.0 sec
00 to 32
08.21
08.22
OOB Sampling Time
1.0
20
Number of OOB
Sampling Times
OOB Average
Sampling Angle
Read only
08.23
#.#
0: Disable
1: Enable
08.24
08.25
DEB Function
0
0
0 to 250 sec
DEB Return Time
Group 9 Communication Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Communication
Address
ꢀ09.00
1 to 254
1
0: Baud rate 4800bps
1: Baud rate 9600bps
ꢀ09.01
ꢀ09.02
Transmission Speed
1
2: Baud rate 19200bps
3: Baud rate 38400bps
0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
3: No warning and keep operating
Transmission Fault
Treatment
3
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
0.1 ~ 120.0 seconds
Customer
ꢀ09.03
Time-out Detection
0.0
0.0: Disable
0: 7,N,2 (Modbus, ASCII)
1: 7,E,1 (Modbus, ASCII)
2: 7,O,1 (Modbus, ASCII)
3: 8,N,2 (Modbus, RTU)
4: 8,E,1 (Modbus, RTU)
5: 8,O,1 (Modbus, RTU)
6: 8,N,1 (Modbus, RTU)
7: 8,E,2 (Modbus, RTU)
8: 8,O,2 (Modbus, RTU)
9: 7,N,1 (Modbus, ASCII)
10: 7,E,2 (Modbus, ASCII)
11: 7,O,2 (Modbus, ASCII)
Communication
Protocol
ꢀ09.04
0
09.05
09.06
Reserved
Reserved
0 ~ 200 (unit: 2ms)
Response Delay
Time
ꢀ09.07
1
2
0: Baud rate 4800 bps
1: Baud rate 9600 bps
2: Baud rate 19200 bps
3: Baud rate 38400 bps
4: Baud rate 57600 bps
Transmission Speed
for USB Card
ꢀ09.08
0: 7,N,2 for ASCII
1: 7,E,1 for ASCII
2: 7,O,1 for ASCII
3: 8,N,2 for RTU
4: 8,E,1 for RTU
5: 8,O,1 for RTU
Communication
Protocol for USB
Card
ꢀ09.09
1
4-24
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
6: 8,N,1 (Modbus, RTU)
Customer
Setting
7: 8,E,2 (Modbus, RTU)
8: 8,O,2 (Modbus, RTU)
9: 7,N,1 (Modbus, ASCII)
10: 7,E,2 (Modbus, ASCII)
11: 7,O,2 (Modbus, ASCII)
Communication
Protocol for USB
Card
ꢀ09.09
0: Warn and keep operating
1: Warn and ramp to stop
2: Warn and coast to stop
Transmission Fault
Treatment for USB
Card
ꢀ09.10
0
3: No warning and keep operating
0.1 ~ 120.0 seconds
0.0: Disable
Time-out Detection
for USB Card
ꢀ09.11
0.0
0
COM port for PLC
Communication
0: RS485
1: USB card
09.12
(NOT for VFD*E*C
models)
Group 10 PID Control Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
0: Disable PID operation
1: Keypad (based on Pr.02.00)
2: 0 to +10V from AVI
PID Set Point
Selection
10.00
0
3: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from
AVI2
4: PID set point (Pr.10.11)
0: Positive PID feedback from external
terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC)
1: Negative PID feedback from external
terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC)
Input Terminal for
PID Feedback
2: Positive PID feedback from external
terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2 (0 ~
+10VDC).
10.01
0
3: Negative PID feedback from external
terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2 (0 ~
+10VDC).
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
ꢀ10.02
ꢀ10.03
ꢀ10.04
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Proportional Gain
(P)
0.0 to 10.0
1.0
0.00 to 100.0 sec (0.00=disable)
0.00 to 1.00 sec
Integral Time (I)
1.00
0.00
Derivative Control
(D)
Upper Bound for
Integral Control
10.05
10.06
10.07
0 to 100%
100
0.0
Primary Delay Filter
Time
0.0 to 2.5 sec
0 to 110%
PID Output Freq
Limit
100
PID Feedback
Signal Detection
Time
10.08
0.0 to 3600 sec (0.0 disable)
60.0
0: Warn and RAMP to stop
1: Warn and COAST to stop
2: Warn and keep operation
Treatment of the
Erroneous PID
Feedback Signals
10.09
10.10
0
Gain Over the PID
Detection Value
0.0 to 10.0
1.0
Source of PID Set
point
0.00 to 600.0Hz
ꢀ10.11
10.12
0.00
10.0
5.0
PID Offset Level
1.0 to 50.0%
Detection Time of
PID Offset
10.13
0.1 to 300.0 sec
Sleep/Wake Up
Detection Time
10.14
0.0 to 6550 sec
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
0.0
10.15
10.16
Sleep Frequency
0.00
0.00
Wakeup Frequency 0.00 to 600.0 Hz
Minimum PID
Output Frequency
Selection
0: By PID control
10.17
0
1: By minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05)
Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card
4-26
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
0: No function
Multi-function
Output Terminal
MO2/RA2
1: AC drive operational
11.00
0
0
2: Master frequency attained
3: Zero speed
4: Over torque detection
Multi-function
Output Terminal
MO3/RA3
5: Base-Block (B.B.) indication
6: Low-voltage indication
11.01
11.02
7: Operation mode indication
8: Fault indication
Multi-function
Output Terminal
MO4/RA4
9: Desired frequency 1 attained
10: Terminal count value attained
11: Preliminary count value attained
12: Over Voltage Stall supervision
13: Over Current Stall supervision
14: Heat sink overheat warning
15: Over Voltage supervision
0
0
Multi-function
Output Terminal
MO5/RA5
11.03
11.04
16: PID supervision
Multi-function
Output Terminal
MO6/RA6
17: Forward command
18: Reverse command
19: Zero speed output signal
0
0
20: Warning(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE, SAvE)
21: Brake control (Desired frequency
attained)
Multi-function
Output Terminal
MO7/RA7
11.05
22: Drive ready
23: Desired frequency 2 attained
0: No function
0
0
Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI7)
11.06
11.07
1: Multi-Step speed command 1
2: Multi-Step speed command 2
Multi-function Input 3: Multi-Step speed command 3
Terminal (MI8)
4: Multi-Step speed command 4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
5: External reset
6: Accel/Decel inhibit
0
0
0
Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI9)
11.08
7: Accel/Decel time selection command
8: Jog Operation
9: External base block
Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI10)
11.09
10: Up: Increment master frequency
11: Down: Decrement master frequency
12: Counter Trigger Signal
13: Counter reset
Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI11)
11.10
11.11
14: E.F. External Fault Input
15: PID function disabled
Multi-function Input 16: Output shutoff stop
0
Terminal (MI12)
17: Parameter lock enable
18: Operation command selection (external
terminals)
19: Operation command selection (keypad)
20: Operation command selection
(communication)
21: FWD/REV command
22: Source of second frequency command
23: Run/Stop PLC Program (PLC1)
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
23: Quick Stop (Only for VFD*E*C models)
24: Download/execute/monitor PLC Program
(PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
25: Simple position function
26: OOB (Out of Balance Detection)
27: Motor selection (bit 0)
28: Motor selection (bit 1)
4-28
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 12: Analog Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
0: Disabled
1: Source of the 1st frequency
2: Source of the 2nd frequency
3: PID Set Point (PID enable)
4: Positive PID feedback
AI1 Function
Selection
12.00
0
5: Negative PID feedback
0: ACI2 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA)
1: AVI3 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V)
AI1 Analog Signal
Mode
12.01
1
Min. AVI3 Input
Voltage
12.02
12.03
12.04
12.05
12.06
12.07
12.08
12.09
0.0 to 10.0V
0.0
0.0
Min. AVI3 Scale
Percentage
0.0 to 100.0%
0.0 to 10.0V
Max. AVI3 Input
Voltage
10.0
100.0
4.0
Max. AVI3 Scale
Percentage
0.0 to 100.0%
0.0 to 20.0mA
0.0 to 100.0%
0.0 to 20.0mA
0.0 to 100.0%
Min. ACI2 Input
Current
Min. ACI2 Scale
Percentage
0.0
Max. ACI2 Input
Current
20.0
100.0
Max. ACI2 Scale
Percentage
0: Disabled
1: Source of the 1st frequency
2: Source of the 2nd frequency
3: PID Set Point (PID enable)
4: Positive PID feedback
5: Negative PID feedback
AI2 Function
Selection
12.10
12.11
0
1
0: ACI3 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA)
1: AVI4 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V)
AI2 Analog Signal
Mode
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Min. AVI4 Input
Voltage
12.12
0.0 to 10.0V
0.0
0.0
Min. AVI4 Scale
Percentage
12.13
12.14
12.15
12.16
12.17
12.18
12.19
0.0 to 100.0%
0.0 to 10.0V
Max. AVI4 Input
Voltage
10.0
100.0
4.0
Max. AVI4 Scale
Percentage
0.0 to 100.0%
0.0 to 20.0mA
0.0 to 100.0%
0.0 to 20.0mA
Min. ACI3 Input
Current
Min. ACI3 Scale
Percentage
0.0
Max. ACI3 Input
Current
20.0
100.0
Max. ACI3 Scale
Percentage
0.0 to 100.0%
0: AVO1
AO1 Terminal
Analog Signal Mode
12.20
0
1: ACO1 (analog current 0.0 to 20.0mA)
2: ACO1 (analog current 4.0 to 20.0mA)
0: Analog Frequency
AO1 Analog Output
Signal
12.21
12.22
0
1: Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current)
AO1 Analog Output
Gain
1 to 200%
100
0: AVO2
AO2 Terminal
Analog Signal Mode
12.23
0
1: ACO2 (analog current 0.0 to 20.0mA)
2: ACO2 (analog current 4.0 to 20.0mA)
0: Analog Frequency
AO2 Analog Output
Signal
12.24
12.25
0
1: Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current)
AO2 Analog Output
Gain
1 to 200%
100
4-30
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 13: PG function Parameters for Extension Card
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
0: Disabled
1: Single phase
13.00
PG Input
0
2: Forward/Counterclockwise rotation
3: Reverse/Clockwise rotation
1 to 20000
13.01
13.02
PG Pulse Range
600
4
Motor Pole Number
(Motor 0)
2 to 10
Proportional Gain
(P)
0.0 to 10.0
1.0
ꢀ13.03
ꢀ13.04
Integral Gain (I)
0.00 to 100.00 sec
1.00
Speed Control
Output Frequency
Limit
0.00 to 100.00Hz
0 to 9999 (*2ms)
10.00
500
1
ꢀ13.05
ꢀ13.06
ꢀ13.07
Speed Feedback
Display Filter
Detection Time for
Feedback Signal
Fault
0.0: disabled
0.1 to 10.0 sec
0: Warn and RAMP to stop
1: Warn and COAST to stop
2: Warn and keep operation
Treatment of the
Feedback Signal
Fault
1
ꢀ13.08
Speed Feedback
Filter
0 to 9999 (*2ms)
16
ꢀ13.09
0: PG card
Source of the High-
speed Counter
Read
Only
13.10
1: PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4.2 Parameter Settings for Applications
Speed Search
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
Windmill, winding
machine, fan and all
inertia loads
Restart free-
running motor
Before the free-running motor is
08.04~08.08
completely stopped, it can be restarted
without detection of motor speed. The
AC motor drive will auto search motor
speed and will accelerate when its
speed is the same as the motor speed.
DC Brake before Running
Applications
Related
Parameters
Purpose
Functions
When e.g. windmills,
Keep the free-
If the running direction of the free-
running motor is not steady, please
execute DC brake before start-up.
08.00
08.01
fans and pumps rotate running motor at
freely by wind or flow standstill.
without applying power
Energy Saving
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
Punching machines
fans, pumps and
precision machinery
Energy saving and Energy saving when the AC motor
08.17
less vibrations
drive runs at constant speed, yet full
power acceleration and deceleration
For precision machinery it also helps
to lower vibrations.
Multi-step Operation
Applications
Related
Parameters
Purpose
Functions
04.05~04.08
05.00~05.14
Cyclic operation by To control 15-step speeds and duration
multi-step speeds. by simple contact signals.
Conveying machinery
Switching acceleration and deceleration times
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
Switching
acceleration and
conveying machinery deceleration times
by external signal
01.09~01.12
04.05~04.08
When an AC motor drive drives two or
more motors, it can reach high-speed
but still start and stop smoothly.
Auto turntable for
4-32
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Overheat Warning
Applications
Related
Parameters
Purpose
Functions
When AC motor drive overheats, it
uses a thermal sensor to have
overheat warning.
03.00~03.01
04.05~04.08
Air conditioner
Safety measure
Two-wire/three-wire
Applications
Related
Parameters
Purpose
Functions
02.00
02.01
02.09
04.04
MI1:("OPEN":STOP)
FWD/STOP
("CLOSE":FWD)
MI2:("OPEN": STOP)
REV/STOP
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD-E
MI1:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":RUN)
RUN/STOP
FWD/REV
To run, stop,
forward and
reverse by external
terminals
MI2:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
General application
DCM
VFD-E
3-wire
STOP RUN
REV/FWD
MI1:("CLOSE":RUN)
MI3:("OPEN":STOP)
MI2:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD-E
Operation Command
Applications
Related
Parameters
Purpose
Functions
Selecting the
source of control
signal
Selection of AC motor drive control by
external terminals, digital keypad or
RS485.
02.01
General application
04.05~04.08
Frequency Hold
Applications
Related
Parameters
Purpose
Functions
Acceleration/
deceleration pause Acceleration/deceleration
Hold output frequency during
04.05~04.08
General application
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Auto Restart after Fault
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
For continuous and
reliable operation
without operator
intervention
08.15~08.16
The AC motor drive can be
restarted/reset automatically up to 10
times after a fault occurs.
Air conditioners,
remote pumps
Emergency Stop by DC Brake
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
AC motor drive can use DC brake for
emergency stop when quick stop is
needed without brake resistor. When
used often, take motor cooling into
consideration.
08.00
08.02
08.03
Emergency stop
without brake
resistor
High-speed rotors
Over-torque Setting
Applications
Related
Parameters
Purpose
Functions
The over-torque detection level can be 06.00~06.05
set. Once OC stall, OV stall and over-
torque occurs, the output frequency
will be adjusted automatically. It is
suitable for machines like fans and
pumps that require continuous
To protect
Pumps, fans and
extruders
machines and to
have continuous/
reliable operation
operation.
Upper/Lower Limit Frequency
Applications Purpose
Related
Functions
Parameters
When user cannot provide
01.07
01.08
Control the motor
speed within
upper/lower limit
upper/lower limit, gain or bias from
external signal, it can be set
individually in AC motor drive.
Pump and fan
Skip Frequency Setting
Applications
Related
Parameters
Purpose
Functions
The AC motor drive cannot run at
08.09~08.14
To prevent
constant speed in the skip frequency
Pumps and fans
machine vibrations range. Three skip frequency ranges
can be set.
4-34
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Carrier Frequency Setting
Applications
Related
Parameters
Purpose
Functions
The carrier frequency can be
increased when required to reduce
motor noise.
02.03
General application
Low noise
Keep Running when Frequency Command is Lost
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
When the frequency command is lost
by system malfunction, the AC motor
drive can still run. Suitable for
intelligent air conditioners.
02.06
For continuous
operation
Air conditioners
Output Signal during Running
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
Signal available to stop braking (brake 03.00~03.01
release) when the AC motor drive is
running. (This signal will disappear
when the AC motor drive is free-
running.)
Provide a signal for
running status
General application
Output Signal in Zero Speed
Related
Functions
Applications
Purpose
Parameters
When the output frequency is lower
03.00~03.01
Provide a signal for than the min. output frequency, a
General application
running status
signal is given for external system or
control wiring.
Output Signal at Desired Frequency
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
When the output frequency is at the
desired frequency (by frequency
command), a signal is given for
external system or control wiring
(frequency attained).
03.00~03.01
Provide a signal for
running status
General application
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Output Signal for Base Block
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
When executing Base Block, a signal
is given for external system or control
wiring.
03.00~03.01
Provide a signal for
running status
General application
Overheat Warning for Heat Sink
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
When heat sink is overheated, it will
send a signal for external system or
control wiring.
03.00~03.01
General application
For safety
Multi-function Analog Output
Related
Parameters
Applications
Purpose
Functions
The value of frequency, output
current/voltage can be read by
connecting a frequency meter or
voltage/current meter.
03.06
Display running
status
General application
4-36
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4.3 Description of Parameter Settings
Group 0: User Parameters
ꢀThis parameter can be set during operation.
00.00 Identity Code of the AC Motor Drive
Settings
00.01 Rated Current Display of the AC Motor Drive
Settings Read Only
Read Only
Factory setting: ##
Factory setting: #.#
Pr. 00.00 displays the identity code of the AC motor drive. The capacity, rated current, rated
voltage and the max. carrier frequency relate to the identity code. Users can use the following
table to check how the rated current, rated voltage and max. carrier frequency of the AC motor
drive correspond to the identity code.
Pr.00.01 displays the rated current of the AC motor drive. By reading this parameter the user
can check if the AC motor drive is correct.
115V/230V Series
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
0.2
0.25
0
0.4
0.5
2
0.75
1.0
4
1.5
2.0
6
2.2
3.0
8
3.7
5.0
10
5.5
7.5
12
7.5
10
14
Rated Output
Current (A)
Max. Carrier
Frequency
1.6
2.5
4.2
7.5
11.0
17
25
33
15kHz
460V Series
kW
HP
Pr.00-00
0.4
0.5
3
0.75
1.0
5
1.5
2.0
7
2.2
3.0
9
3.7
5.0
11
5.5
7.5
13
7.5
10
15
11
15
17
Rated Output
Current (A)
Max. Carrier
Frequency
1.5
2.5
4.2
5.5
8.5
13
18
24
15kHz
00.02
Parameter Reset
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
6
9
Parameter can be read/written
All parameters are read-only
Clear PLC program (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
All parameters are reset to factory settings (50Hz, 230V/400V or
220V/380V depends on Pr.00.12)
10 All parameters are reset to factory settings (60Hz, 115V/220V/440V)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
This parameter allows the user to reset all parameters to the factory settings except the fault
records (Pr.06.08 ~ Pr.06.12).
50Hz: Pr.01.00 and Pr.01.01 are set to 50Hz and Pr.01.02 will be set by Pr.00.12.
60Hz: Pr.01.00 and Pr.01.01 are set to 60Hz and Pr.01.02 is set to 115V, 230V or 460V.
When Pr.00.02=1, all parameters are read-only. To write all parameters, set Pr.00.02=0.
ꢀStart-up Display Selection
00.03
Factory Setting: 0
Settings 0
Display the frequency command value (Fxxx)
1
2
Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx)
Display the output current in A supplied to the motor
(Axxx)
3
4
5
Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx)
FWD/REV command
PLCx (PLC selections: PLC0/PLC1/PLC2)
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
This parameter determines the start-up display page after power is applied to the drive.
For setting 5, PLC0: disable, PLC1: run PLC, PLC2: read/write PLC programs into AC motor
drive.
00.04 ꢀContent of Multi-function Display
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Display the content of user-defined unit (Uxxx)
Display the counter value which counts the number of
pulses on TRG terminal
Display PLC D1043 value (C)
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
2
3
4
5
Display the actual DC BUS voltage in VDC of the AC
motor drive
Display the output voltage in VAC of terminals U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3 to the motor.
Display PID analog feedback signal value in %
4-38
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00.04 ꢀContent of Multi-function Display
Display the power factor angle in º of terminals U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3 to the motor
6
Display the output power in kW of terminals U, V and W
to the motor.
7
Display the estimated value of torque in Nm as it relates
to current.
8
Display the signal of AVI analog input terminal (V).
9
Display the signal of ACI analog input terminal (mA)or
display the signal of AVI2 analog input terminal-(V).
10
11
Display the temperature of IGBT (h) in °C
12 Display AVI3/ACI2 level (I.)
13 Display AVI4/ACI3 level (i.)
14 Display PG speed in RPM (G)
15 Display motor number (M)
When Pr00.03 is set to 03, the display is according to the setting of Pr00.04.
00.05
ꢀUser Defined Coefficient K
Settings 0. 1 to d 160.0
Unit: 0. 1
Factory Setting: 1.0
The coefficient K determines the multiplying factor for the user-defined unit.
The display value is calculated as follows:
U (User-defined unit) = Actual output frequency * K (Pr.00.05)
Example:
A conveyor belt runs at 13.6m/s at motor speed 60Hz.
K = 13.6/60 = 0.22 (0.226667 rounded to 1 decimal), therefore Pr.00.05=0.2
With Frequency command 35Hz, display shows U and 35*0.2=7.0m/s.
(To increase accuracy, use K=2.2 or K=22.7 and disregard decimal point.)
00.06 Power Board Software Version
Settings
Display
Read Only
#.##
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00.07 Control Board Software Version
Settings
Display
Read Only
#.##
00.08
Unit: 1
Password Input
Settings
Display
0 to 9999
0~2 (times of wrong password)
Factory Setting: 0
The function of this parameter is to input the password that is set in Pr.00.09. Input the correct
password here to enable changing parameters. You are limited to a maximum of 3 attempts.
After 3 consecutive failed attempts, a blinking “codE” will show up to force the user to restart
the AC motor drive in order to try again to input the correct password.
Password Set
Unit: 1
00.09
Settings
Display
0 to 9999
Factory Setting: 0
0
1
No password set or successful input in Pr. 00.08
Password has been set
To set a password to protect your parameter settings.
If the display shows 0, no password is set or password has been correctly entered in Pr.00.08.
All parameters can then be changed, including Pr.00.09.
The first time you can set a password directly. After successful setting of password the display
will show 1.
Be sure to record the password for later use.
To cancel the parameter lock, set the parameter to 0 after inputting correct password into Pr.
00.08.
The password consists of min. 1 digits and max. 4 digits.
How to make the password valid again after decoding by Pr.00.08:
Method 1: Re-input original password into Pr.00.09 (Or you can enter a new password if you
want to use a changed or new one).
Method 2: After rebooting, password function will be recovered.
Password Decode Flow Chart
4-40
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
00.09
00.08
Displays 0 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00.08.
Incorrect Password
Correct Password
END
END
00.09
00.08
Displays 0 when
entering correct
password into
Pr.00.08.
3 chances to enter the correct
password.
1st time displays "1" if
password is incorrect.
2nd time displays "2", if
password is incorrect.
3rd time displays " code"
(blinking)
If the password was entered
incorrectly after three tries,
the keypad will be locked.
Turn the power OFF/ON to
re-enter the password.
00.10
Control Method
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
V/f Control
Vector Control
This parameter determines the control method of the AC motor drive.
00.11
Reserved
00.12
50Hz Base Voltage Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
230V/400V
220V/380V
This parameter determines the base voltage for 50Hz.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 1: Basic Parameters
Unit: 0.01
01.00
Maximum Output Frequency (Fmax)
Settings 50.00 to 600.0 Hz
Factory Setting: 60.00
This parameter determines the AC motor drive’s Maximum Output Frequency. All the AC
motor drive frequency command sources (analog inputs 0 to +10V and 4 to 20mA) are scaled
to correspond to the output frequency range.
01.01 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 0)
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 60.00
This value should be set according to the rated frequency of the motor as indicated on the
motor nameplate. Maximum Voltage Frequency determines the v/f curve ratio. For example, if
the drive is rated for 460 VAC output and the Maximum Voltage Frequency is set to 60Hz, the
drive will maintain a constant ratio of 7.66 V/Hz (460V/60Hz=7.66V/Hz). This parameter value
must be equal to or greater than the Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01.03).
01.02 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 0)
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 220.0
Factory Setting: 440.0
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
460V series
0.1 to 510.0V
This parameter determines the Maximum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. The Maximum
Output Voltage setting must be smaller than or equal to the rated voltage of the motor as
indicated on the motor nameplate. This parameter value must be equal to or greater than the
Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01.04).
01.03 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 0)
Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
Factory Setting: 1.50
This parameter sets the Mid-Point Frequency of the V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio
between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point frequency can be determined. This parameter
must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) and equal to or less
than Maximum Voltage Frequency (Pr.01.01).
This setting must be greater than Pr.01.05.
4-42
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
01.04 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 0)
Unit: 0.1
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 10.0
Factory Setting: 20.0
460V series
0.1 to 510.0V
This parameter sets the Mid-Point Voltage of any V/f curve. With this setting, the V/f ratio
between Minimum Frequency and Mid-Point Frequency can be determined. This parameter
must be equal to or greater than Minimum Output Voltage (Pr.01.06) and equal to or less than
Maximum Output Voltage (Pr.01.02).
This setting should be greater than Pr.01.06.
01.05 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 0)
Unit: 0.01
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
Factory Setting: 1.50
This parameter sets the Minimum Output Frequency of the AC motor drive. This parameter
must be equal to or less than Mid-Point Frequency (Pr.01.03).
The settings of 01.03, 01.04, and 01.06 are invalid in Vector Control mode.
01.06 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 0)
Unit: 0.1
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 10.0
Factory Setting: 20.0
460V series
0.1 to 510.0V
This parameter sets the Minimum Output Voltage of the AC motor drive. This parameter must
be equal to or less than Mid-Point Voltage (Pr.01.04).
The settings of Pr.01.01 to Pr.01.06 have to meet the condition of Pr.01.02 ≥ Pr.01.04 ≥
Pr.01.06 and Pr.01.01 ≥ Pr.01.03 ≥ Pr.01.05.
In vector control mode (Pr.00.10 is set to 1), Pr.01.03, Pr.01.04 and Pr.01.06 are disabled.
01.07 Output Frequency Upper Limit
Unit: 0.1
Settings 0.1 to 120.0%
Factory Setting: 110.0
This parameter must be equal to or greater than the Output Frequency Lower Limit (Pr.01.08).
The Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) is regarded as 100%.
Output Frequency Upper Limit value = (Pr.01.00 * Pr.01.07)/100.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
01.08
01.07
Output Frequency
Lower Limit
Output Frequency
Upper Limit
Voltage
01.02
Maximum
Output
Voltage
01.04
Mid-point
Voltage
The limit of
Output
Frequency
Frequency
01.06
Minimum
Output
01.05
Minimum
Output
Freq.
01.03
Mid-point
Freq.
01.01
01.00
Maximum Voltage
Frequency
Maximum
Voltage
Output
(Base Frequency)
Frequency
V/f Curve
01.08
Unit: 0.1
Output Frequency Lower Limit
Settings 0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 0.0
The Upper/Lower Limits are to prevent operation errors and machine damage.
If the Output Frequency Upper Limit is 50Hz and the Maximum Output Frequency is 60Hz, the
Output Frequency will be limited to 50Hz.
If the Output Frequency Lower Limit is 10Hz, and the Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) is
set to 1.0Hz, then any Command Frequency between 1.0-10Hz will generate a 10Hz output
from the drive.
This parameter must be equal to or less than the Output Frequency Upper Limit (Pr.01.07).
The Output Frequency Lower Limit value = (Pr.01.00 * Pr.01.08) /100.
01.09 ꢀAcceleration Time 1 (Taccel 1)
01.10 ꢀDeceleration Time 1 (Tdecel 1)
01.11 ꢀAcceleration Time 2 (Taccel 2)
01.12 ꢀDeceleration Time 2 (Tdecel 2)
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Settings
0.1 to 600.0 sec / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
Factory Setting: 10.0
Acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2 can be switched by setting the external terminals MI3~
MI12 to 7 (set Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 7 or Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11 to 7).
01.19 Accel/Decel Time Unit
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Unit: 0.1 sec
Unit: 0.01 sec
4-44
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
The Acceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to ramp
from 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00). The rate is linear unless S-Curve is
“Enabled”; see Pr.01.17.
The Deceleration Time is used to determine the time required for the AC motor drive to
decelerate from the Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) down to 0 Hz. The rate is linear
unless S-Curve is “Enabled.”, see Pr.01.18.
The Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1, 2, 3, 4 are selected according to the Multi-function Input
Terminals Settings. See Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08 for more details.
In the diagram shown below, the Acceleration/Deceleration Time of the AC motor drive is the
time between 0 Hz to Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00). Suppose the Maximum Output
Frequency is 60 Hz, Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) is 1.0 Hz, and
Acceleration/Deceleration Time is 10 seconds. The actual time for the AC motor drive to
accelerate from start-up to 60 Hz and to decelerate from 60Hz to 1.0Hz is in this case 9.83
seconds. ((60-1) * 10/60=9.83secs).
Frequency
01.00
Max. output
Frequency
setting
operation
frequency
01.05
Min. output
frequency
0 Hz
Decel. Time
01.10 01.12
Accel. Time
01.11
Time
01.09
The definition of
Accel./Decel. Time
Resulting
Decel. Time
Resulting
Accel. Time
Resulting Accel./Decel. Time
01.13 ꢀJog Acceleration Time
Settings 0.1 to 600.0/0.01 to 600.0 sec
01.14 ꢀJog Deceleration Time
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Factory Setting: 1.0
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Settings
0.1 to 600.0/0.01 to 600.0 sec
Factory Setting: 1.0
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
01.15 ꢀJog Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Settings
0.10 to Fmax (Pr.01.00)Hz
Factory Setting: 6.00
Only external terminal JOG (MI3 to MI12) can be used. When the Jog command is “ON”, the
AC motor drive will accelerate from Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05) to Jog Frequency
(Pr.01.15). When the Jog command is “OFF”, the AC motor drive will decelerate from Jog
Frequency to zero. The used Accel/Decel time is set by the Jog Accel/Decel time (Pr.01.13,
Pr.01.14).
Before using the JOG command, the drive must be stopped first. And during Jog operation,
other operation commands are not accepted, except commands via the FORWARD,
REVERSE and STOP keys on the digital keypad.
Frequency
01.15
JOG
Frequency
01.05
Min. output
frequency
0 Hz
JOG Decel. Time
JOG Accel. Time
Time
01.12
01.14
01.13
01.21
The definition of JOG Accel./Decel. Time
01.16 ꢀAuto-Acceleration / Deceleration
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
Linear acceleration / deceleration
Auto acceleration, linear Deceleration.
Linear acceleration, auto Deceleration.
Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by load)
Auto acceleration / deceleration (set by Accel/Decel Time setting)
With Auto acceleration / deceleration it is possible to reduce vibration and shocks during
starting/stopping the load.
During Auto acceleration the torque is automatically measured and the drive will accelerate to
the set frequency with the fastest acceleration time and the smoothest starting current.
4-46
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
During Auto deceleration, regenerative energy is measured and the motor is smoothly stopped
with the fastest deceleration time.
But when this parameter is set to 04, the actual accel/decel time will be equal to or more than
parameter Pr.01.09 ~Pr.01.12.
Auto acceleration/deceleration makes the complicated processes of tuning unnecessary. It
makes operation efficient and saves energy by acceleration without stall and deceleration
without brake resistor.
In applications with brake resistor or brake unit, Auto deceleration shall not be used.
01.17 Acceleration S-Curve
01.18 Deceleration S-Curve
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Unit: 0.1/0.01
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0.0
S-curve disabled
S-curve enabled (10.0/10.00 is the smoothest)
0.1 to 10.0/0.01 to 10.00
This parameter is used to ensure smooth acceleration and deceleration via S-curve.
The S-curve is disabled when set to 0.0 and enabled when set to 0.1 to 10.0/0.01 to 10.00.
Setting 0.1/0.01 gives the quickest and setting 10.0/10.00 the longest and smoothest S-curve.
The AC motor drive will not follow the Accel/Decel Times in Pr.01.09 to Pr.01.12.
The diagram below shows that the original setting of the Accel/Decel Time is only for reference
when the S-curve is enabled. The actual Accel/Decel Time depends on the selected S-curve
(0.1 to 10.0).
The total Accel. Time=Pr.01.09 + Pr.01.17 or Pr.01.11 + Pr.01.17
The total Decel. Time=Pr.01.10 + Pr.01.18 or Pr.01.12 + Pr.01.18
2
1
3
4
2
1
3
4
1
2
3
4
Disable S curve
Enable S curve
Acceleration/deceleration Characteristics
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
01.20 Delay Time at 0Hz for Simple Position
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
01.21 Delay Time at 10Hz for Simple Position
01.22 Delay Time at 20Hz for Simple Position
01.23 Delay Time at 30Hz for Simple Position
01.24 Delay Time at 40Hz for Simple Position
01.25 Delay Time at 50Hz for Simple Position
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Settings
0.00 to 600.00 sec
Factory Setting: 0.00
This simple position function is calculated by the measure of operation area. When the multi-
function input terminal is set to 25 and it is ON, it will start to decelerate after getting the delay
time from Pr.01.20 to Pr.01.25 and get the final position.
This is simple position function NOT the precision position function.
f
t +
tx + t2
2
)
⎛
⎜
⎞
⎟
t
x
S = f ×
tx
t2
MI=25
⎝
⎠
Assume that the radius of the 4-pole motor is r and rotation speed is n (rpm).
n
r
Example 1:
Assume that motor speed is 50Hz, the delay time at 50Hz is 2 sec (Pr.01.25=2) and the
deceleration time from 50Hz to 0Hz is 10 seconds.
The rotation speed n = 120 X 50 /4 (rpm/min) = 25 rpm/sec
The revolution numbers = (25 X (2+12))/2 = 175 (revolutions)
f(Hz)
50
t
2sec
10sec
MI=25
4-48
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Therefore, the distance = revolution numbers X circumference = 175 X 2π r
It also means that the motor will stop to the original position after 175 circles.
Example 2:
Assume that motor speed is 1.5Hz, the delay time at 10Hz is 10 sec (Pr.01.21=10) and the
deceleration time from 60Hz to 0Hz is 40 seconds.
The delay time at 1.5Hz is 1.5 sec and the deceleration from 1.5Hz to 0Hz is 1 sec.
The rotation speed n = 120 X 1.5 /4 (rpm/min) = 1.5/2 rpm/sec = 0.75 rpm/sec
The revolution numbers = (1.5/2X (1.5+2.5))/2 = 1.5 (revolutions)
f(Hz)
1.5
t
1.5sec
1sec
MI=25
Therefore, the distance = revolution numbers X circumference = 1.5 X 2π r
It also means that the motor will stop after running 1.5 circles.
01.26 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 1)
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 60.00
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.10 to 600.0Hz
01.27 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 1)
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 220.0
Factory Setting: 440.0
Unit: 0.01
460V series
0.1 to 510.0V
01.28 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 1)
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
Factory Setting: 1.50
Unit: 0.1
01.29 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 1)
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 10.0
Factory Setting: 20.0
Unit: 0.01
460V series
01.30 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 1)
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
01.31 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 1)
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
460V series 0.1 to 510.0V
01.32 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 2)
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 1.50
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10.0
Factory Setting: 20.0
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 60.00
Unit: 0.1
01.33 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 2)
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 220.0
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
460V series
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 440.0
Unit: 0.01
01.34 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 2)
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
Factory Setting: 1.50
Unit: 0.1
01.35 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 2)
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 10.0
Factory Setting: 20.0
Unit: 0.01
460V series
01.36 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 2)
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
01.37 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 2)
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
460V series 0.1 to 510.0V
01.38 Maximum Voltage Frequency (Fbase) (Motor 3)
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 1.50
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10.0
Factory Setting: 20.0
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 60.00
Unit: 0.1
01.39 Maximum Output Voltage (Vmax) (Motor 3)
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 220.0
Factory Setting: 440.0
Unit: 0.01
460V series
0.1 to 510.0V
01.40 Mid-Point Frequency (Fmid) (Motor 3)
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
Factory Setting: 1.50
Unit: 0.1
01.41 Mid-Point Voltage (Vmid) (Motor 3)
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
Factory Setting: 10.0
Factory Setting: 20.0
Unit: 0.01
460V series
01.42 Minimum Output Frequency (Fmin) (Motor 3)
Settings 0.10 to 600.0Hz
01.43 Minimum Output Voltage (Vmin) (Motor 3)
Settings 115V/230V series 0.1 to 255.0V
460V series 0.1 to 510.0V
0.1 to 510.0V
Factory Setting: 1.50
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10.0
Factory Setting: 20.0
The V/f curve of motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi-function input
terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08) to 27 and 28.
Group 2: Operation Method Parameters
02.00 ꢀSource of First Master Frequency Command
Factory Setting: 1
02.09 ꢀSource of Second Master Frequency Command
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-function Inputs UP/DOWN.
Last used frequency saved. (Digital keypad is optional)
4-50
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
1
2
3
4
5
0 to +10V from AVI
4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from AVI2
RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication
Digital keypad potentiometer
CANopen communication
These parameters set the Master Frequency Command Source of the AC motor drive.
The factory setting for master frequency command is 1. (digital keypad is optional.)
Setting 2: use the ACI/AVI switch on the AC motor drive to select ACI or AVI2. When setting to
AVI, AVI2 is indicated.
When the 3rd switch on the upper-right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following
diagram, the source of first master frequency command (Pr.02.00) will force setting to 2. This
setting(Pr.02.00) can’t be changed till the 3rd switch is set to be OFF.
ON
1
2
3
When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02.05 for details.
The first /second frequency/operation command is enabled/disabled by Multi Function Input
Terminals. Please refer to Pr.04.05 ~ 04.08.
02.01 ꢀSource of First Operation Command
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0
1
2
3
Digital keypad (Digital keypad is optional)
External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET
enabled.
4
5
RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication. Keypad STOP/RESET
disabled.
CANopen communication. Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
The factory setting for source of first operation command is 1. (digital keypad is optional.)
When the AC motor drive is controlled by external terminal, please refer to Pr.02.05/Pr.04.04
for details.
ꢀCombination of the First and Second Master Frequency
Command
02.10
Factory Setting: 0
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0
1
2
First Master Frequency Command Only
First Master Frequency + Second Master Frequency
First Master Frequency - Second Master Frequency
02.02 Stop Method
Factory Setting: 0
E.F.: coast to stop
Settings
0
1
2
3
STOP: ramp to stop
STOP: coast to stop
STOP: ramp to stop
STOP: coast to stop
E.F.: coast to stop
E.F.: ramp to stop
E.F.: ramp to stop
When the 2nd switch on the upper-right corner is set to be ON as shown in the following
diagram, the motor stop method (Pr.02.02) will force setting to 1. This setting (Pr.02.02) can’t
be changed till the 2nd switch is set to be OFF.
ON
1
2
3
The parameter determines how the motor is stopped when the AC motor drive receives a valid
stop command or detects External Fault.
Ramp:
the AC motor drive decelerates to Minimum Output Frequency (Pr.01.05)
according to the deceleration time and then stops.
Coast:
the AC motor drive stops the output instantly upon command, and the motor
free runs until it comes to a complete standstill.
The motor stop method is usually determined by the characteristics of the motor load and
how frequently it is stopped.
(1)
It is recommended to use “ramp to stop” for safety of personnel or to prevent
material from being wasted in applications where the motor has to stop after the
drive is stopped. The deceleration time has to be set accordingly.
(2)
If motor free running is allowed or the load inertia is large, it is recommended to
select “coast to stop”. For example: blowers, punching machines, centrifuges
and pumps.
4-52
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Frequency
output
frequency
Frequency
output
frequency
motor
speed
motor
speed
Time
Time
stops according to
decel eration time
STOP
free run to stop
operation
command
operation
command
RUN
RUN
STOP
ramp to stop and free run to stop
Frequency
Frequency
frequency output
motor
speed
frequency
output
motor
speed
stops according to
decel eration time
free run to stop
operation
command
operation
command
EF
EF
When Pr.02.02 is set to 0 or 1
When Pr.02.02 is set to 2 or 3
02.03
Unit: 1
PWM Carrier Frequency Selections
115V/230V/460V Series
0.25 to 15hp (0.2kW to 11kW)
Power
Setting Range
Factory Setting
1 to 15 kHz
8 kHz
This parameter determines the PWM carrier frequency of the AC motor drive.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Electromagnetic
Noise or leakage
current
Current
Wave
Carrier
Frequency
Heat
Dissipation
Acoustic
Noise
Minimal
Minimal
Minimal
Significant
1kHz
8kHz
15kHz
Minimal
Significant
Significant
Significant
From the table, we see that the PWM carrier frequency has a significant influence on the
electromagnetic noise, AC motor drive heat dissipation, and motor acoustic noise.
The PWM carrier frequency will be decreased automatically by heat sink temperature and
output current of the AC motor drive. It is used as a necessary precaution to prevent the AC
motor drive from overheating and thus extends IGBT’s life. Example for 460V models: Assume
the carrier frequency to be 15kHz, the ambient temperature is 50 degrees C with a single AC
motor drive(mounting method A). If the output current exceeds 80% * rated current, the AC
motor drive will decrease the carrier frequency automatically according to the following chart. If
output current is 100% * rated current, the carrier frequency will decrease from 15kHz to
12kHz.
Mounting method
Method A
Frame A
Frame B & C
120mm
150mm
120mm
150mm
Method B
Frame A
Frame B & C
4-54
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
25
15℃
℃
with mountingmethodA
with mountingmethod B
100%
90%
35
25
℃
℃
with mountingmethod A
with mountingmethod B
80%
70%
60%
50
40℃
℃
with mountingmethod A
with mountingmethod B
50%
40%
Carrier
14kHz
15kHz Frequency
2kHz
6kHz
10kHz
4kHz
For 115V/230V Series
8kHz 12kHz
25
15℃
℃
with mounting method A
with mounting method B
100%
90%
80%
70%
60%
25
℃
with mountingmethod B
50
℃
℃
with mountingmethodA
with mounting method B
40
50%
40%
Carrier
2kHz
6kHz
10kHz
14kHz
Frequency
15kHz
4kHz
8kHz 12kHz
For 460V Series
02.04 Motor Direction Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
Forward/Reverse operation enabled
Reverse operation disabled
Forward operation disabled
This parameter is used to disable one direction of rotation of the AC motor drive direction of
rotation.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
02.05 Line Start Lockout
Factory Setting: 1
Disable. Operation status is not changed even if operation
Settings
0
1
2
3
command source Pr.02.01 is changed.
Enable. Operation status is not changed even if operation command
source Pr.02.01 is changed.
Disable. Operation status will change if operation command source
Pr.02.01 is changed.
Enable. Operation status will change if operation command source
Pr.02.01 is changed.
This parameter determines the response of the drive upon power on and operation command
source is changed.
Operation status when operation
command source is changed
Pr.02.05
Start lockout (Run when power is ON)
0
1
Disable (AC motor drive will run)
Keep previous status
Enable (AC motor drive doesn’t run)
Keep previous status
Change according to the new
operation command source
2
3
Disable (AC motor drive will run)
Change according to the new
operation command source
Enable (AC motor drive doesn’t run)
When the operation command source is from external terminal and operation command is ON
(MI1/MI2-DCM=closed), the AC motor drive will operate according to Pr.02.05 after power is
applied. <For terminals MI1 and MI2 only>
1. When Pr.02.05 is set to 0 or 2, AC motor drive will run immediately.
2. When Pr.02.05 is set to 1 or 3, AC motor drive will remain stopped until operation
command is received after previous operation command is cancelled.
4-56
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
MI1-DCM (close)
Pr.02.01=0
OFF
ON
RUN
RUN
STOP
STOP
output frequency
Pr.02.05=0 or 2
This action will follow MI1/DCM
or MI2/DCM status
(ON is close/OFF is open)
Change operation
command source
Pr.02.01=1 or 2
output frequency
Pr.02.05=1 or 3
When the operation command source isn’t from the external terminals, independently from
whether the AC motor drive runs or stops, the AC motor drive will operate according to
Pr.02.05 if the two conditions below are both met.
1. When operation command source is changed to external terminal (Pr.02.01=1 or 2)
2. The status of terminal and AC motor drive is different.
And the operation of the AC motor drive will be:
1. When setting 0 or 1, the status of AC motor drive is not changed by the terminal status.
2. When setting 2 or 3, the status of AC motor drive is changed by the terminal status.
MI1-DCM (close)
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
power is applied
output frequency
Pr.02.05=0 or 1
it will run
output frequency
Pr.02.05=2 or 3
it won't run
when power is applied
It needs to received a run command
after previous command is cancelled
The Line Start Lockout feature does not guarantee that the motor will never start under this
condition. It is possible the motor may be set in motion by a malfunctioning switch.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
02.06 Loss of ACI Signal (4-20mA)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
Decelerate to 0Hz
Coast to stop and display “AErr”
Continue operation by the last frequency command
This parameter determines the behavior when ACI is lost.
When set to 1, it will display warning message “AErr” on the keypad in case of loss of ACI
signal and execute the setting. When ACI signal is recovered, the warning message will stop
blinking. Please press “RESET” key to clear it.
02.07 Up/Down Mode
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
3
By digital keypad up/down keys mode
Based on Accel/Decel Time acc. to Pr.01.09 to 01.12
Constant speed (acc. to Pr. 02.08)
Pulse input unit (acc. to Pr. 02.08)
Accel/Decel Rate of Change of UP/DOWN Operation with
Constant Speed
Unit: 0.01
02.08
Settings
0.01~10.00 Hz/2ms
Factory Setting: 0.01
These parameters determine the increase/decrease of the master frequency when operated
via the Multi-function Inputs when Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 are set to 10 (Up command) or 11 (Down
command).
When Pr.02.07 is set to 0: increase/decrease the frequency by using UP/DOWN key. It is valid
only when the AC motor drive is running.
600Hz
50.0Hz
9.0Hz
0
t (sec)
3.28 s 3.68 s
4.34 s
4-58
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
When Pr.02.07 is set to 1: increase/decrease the frequency by acceleration/deceleration
settings. It is valid only when the AC motor drive is running.
When Pr.02.07 is set to 2: increase/decrease the frequency by Pr.02.08.
When Pr.02.07 is set to 3: increase/decrease the frequency by Pr.02.08 (unit: pulse input).
02.11 ꢀKeypad Frequency Command
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz
This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read keypad frequency command.
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 60.00
02.12 ꢀCommunication Frequency Command
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 60.00
This parameter can be used to set frequency command or read communication frequency
command.
The Selections for Saving Keypad or Communication Frequency
Command
02.13
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
Save Keypad & Communication Frequency
Save Keypad Frequency only
Save Communication Frequency only
This parameter is used to save keypad or RS-485 frequency command.
02.14 Initial Frequency Selection (for keypad & RS485/USB)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
By Current Freq Command
By Zero Freq Command
By Frequency Display at Stop
02.15 Initial Frequency Setpoint (for keypad & RS485/USB)
Settings 0.00 ~ 600.0Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 60.00
These parameters are used to determinate the frequency at stop:
When setting Pr.02.14 to 0: the initial frequency will be current frequency.
When setting Pr.02.14 to 1: the initial frequency will be 0.
When setting Pr.02.14 to 2: the initial frequency will be Pr.02.15.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
02.16 Display the Master Freq Command Source
Settings
Read Only
Factory setting: ##
You can read the master frequency command source by this parameter.
Display Value
Bit
Function
1
2
4
Bit0=1 Master Freq Command Source by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00).
Bit1=1 Master Freq Command Source by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09).
Bit2=1 Master Freq Command Source by Multi-input function
Master Freq Command Source by PLC Freq command
8
Bit3=1
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
02.17 Display the Operation Command Source
Settings Read Only
You can read the operation source by this parameter.
Factory setting: ##
Display Value
Bit
Function
1
2
4
8
Bit0=1 Operation Command Source by Digital Keypad
Bit1=1 Operation Command Source by RS485 communication
Bit2=1 Operation Command Source by External Terminal
Bit3=1 Operation Command Source by Multi-input function
Operation Command Source by PLC Operation Command
16
Bit4=1
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
4-60
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 3: Output Function Parameters
03.00 Multi-function Output Relay (RA1, RB1, RC1)
Factory Setting: 8
03.01
Multi-function Output Terminal MO1
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
Function
Description
No Function
0
1
AC Drive Operational
Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is “ON”.
Master Frequency
Attained
Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output
frequency setting.
2
Active when Command Frequency is lower than the
Minimum Output Frequency.
3
4
Zero Speed
Active as long as over-torque is detected. (Refer to Pr.06.03
~ Pr.06.05)
Over-Torque Detection
Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off
during baseblock. Base block can be forced by Multi-function
input (setting 09).
Baseblock (B.B.)
Indication
5
6
7
Low-Voltage Indication
Active when low voltage(Lv) is detected.
Operation Mode
Indication
Active when operation command is controlled by external
terminal.
Active when a fault occurs (oc, ov, oH, oL, oL1, EF, cF3,
HPF, ocA, ocd, ocn, GFF).
8
9
Fault Indication
Desired Frequency 1
Attained
Active when the desired frequency 1(Pr.03.02) is attained.
Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value.
Terminal Count Value
Attained
10
Preliminary Count Value
Attained
11
12
Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value.
Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating
Over Voltage Stall
supervision
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Function
Description
Over Current Stall
supervision
13
Active when the Over Current Stall function operating
Heat Sink Overheat
Warning
When heatsink overheats, it will signal to prevent OH turn off
the drive. When it is higher than 85oC (185oF), it will be ON.
14
15
16
Over Voltage supervision
PID supervision
Active when the DC-BUS voltage exceeds level
Active when the PID feedback signal is abnormal (Refer to
Pr.10.12 and Pr.13.)
17
18
Forward command
Reverse command
Active when the direction command is FWD
Active when the direction command is REV
Zero Speed Output
Signal
19
20
Active when the drive is standby or stop
Communication Warning
(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE,
SAvE)
Active when there is a Communication Warning
Brake Control (Desired
Frequency Attained)
Active when output frequency ≥Pr.03.11. Deactivated when
output frequency ≤Pr.03.12 after STOP command.
21
22
23
Drive Ready
Active when the drive is on and no abnormality detected.
Active when the desired frequency 1(Pr.03.14) is attained.
Desired Frequency 2
Attained
03.02 Desired Frequency 1 Attained
03.14 Desired Frequency 2 Attained
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Settings
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
If a multi-function output terminal is set to function as Desired Frequency Attained (Pr.03.00 to
Pr.03.01=09), then the output will be activated when the programmed frequency is attained.
4-62
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Frequency
detection
range
master
frequency
4Hz
2Hz
detection range
detection
-2Hz range
desired
frequency
03.02/03.14
waiting time
for
DC braking tim
during stop
frequency
Time
OFF
run/stop
ON
setting 2
master freq. attained
(output signal)
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
setting 9/23
desired freq. attained
setting 03 zero speed indication
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
setting 19 zero speed indication
output timing chart of multiple function terminals
when setting to frequency attained or zero speed indication
03.03
ꢀAnalog Output Signal (AFM)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Analog Frequency Meter (0 to Maximum Output Frequency)
Analog Current Meter (0 to 250% of rated AC motor drive current)
This parameter sets the function of the AFM output 0~+10VDC (ACM is common).
03.04 ꢀAnalog Output Gain
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
Settings
1 to 200%
This parameter sets the voltage range of the analog output signal AFM.
When Pr.03.03 is set to 0, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output
frequency of the AC motor drive. With Pr.03.04 set to 100%, the Maximum Output Frequency
(Pr.01.00) of the AC motor drive corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output.
Similarly, if Pr.03.03 is set to 1, the analog output voltage is directly proportional to the output
current of the AC drive. With Pr.03.04 set to 100%, then 2.5 times the rated current
corresponds to +10VDC on the AFM output.
NOTE
Any type of voltmeter can be used. If the meter reads full scale at a voltage less than 10V, Pr.
03.04 should be set using the following formula:
Pr. 03.04 = ((meter full scale voltage)/10) x 100%
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
For Example: When using the meter with full scale of 5 volts, adjust Pr.03.04 to 50%. If
Pr.03.03 is set to 0, then 5VDC will correspond to Maximum Output Frequency.
03.05 Terminal Count Value
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0 to 9999
This parameter sets the count value of the internal counter. To increase the internal counter,
one of Pr.04.05 to 04.08 should be set to 12. Upon completion of counting, the specified output
terminal will be activated. (Pr.03.00 to Pr.03.01 set to 10).
When the display shows c555, the drive has counted 555 times. If display shows c555•, it
means that real counter value is between 5,550 and 5,559.
03.06 Preliminary Count Value
Settings 0 to 9999
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
When the counter value reaches this value, the corresponding multi-function output terminal
will be activated, provided one of Pr.03.00 to Pr.03.01 set to 11 (Preliminary Count Value
Setting). This multi-function output terminal will be deactivated upon completion of Terminal
Count Value Attained.
The timing diagram:
2msec
Display
(Pr.00.04=1)
TRG
Counter Trigger
The width of trigger2smisgecnal
should not be less than
2ms(<250 Hz)
Preliminary Count Value
(Pr. 03.00~Pr. 03.01=11)
Ex:03.05=5,03.06=3
Terminal Count Value
(Pr. 03.00~Pr. 03.01=10)
03.07 EF Active when Terminal Count Value Attained
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Terminal count value attained, no EF display
Terminal count value attained, EF active
If this parameter is set to 1 and the desired value of counter is attained, the AC drive will treat
it as a fault. The drive will stop and show the “EF” message on the display.
4-64
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
03.08 Fan Control
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
Fan always ON
1 minute after AC motor drive stops, fan will be OFF
Fan ON when AC motor drive runs, fan OFF when AC motor drive
stops
3
Fan ON when preliminary heatsink temperature attained
This parameter determines the operation mode of the cooling fan.
The Digital Output Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
03.09
Settings
Read Only
Factory setting: ##
Bit0=1: RLY used by PLC
Bit1=1: MO1 used by PLC
Bit2=1: MO2/RA2 used by PLC
Bit3=1: MO3/RA3 used by PLC
Bit4=1: MO4/RA4 used by PLC
Bit5=1: MO5/RA5 used by PLC
Bit6=1: MO6/RA6 used by PLC
Bit7=1: MO7/RA7 used by PLC
The equivalent 8-bit is used to display the status (used or not used) of each digital output. The
value that Pr.03.09 displays is the result after converting 8-bit binary into decimal value.
For standard AC motor drive, it only has 2-bit (bit0 and bit1). When extension card is installed,
the number of the digital output terminals will increase according to the extension card. The
maximum number of the digital output terminals is shown as follows.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
0=not used
1=Used by PLC
Weights
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Relay 1
MO1
MO2/RA2
MO3/RA3
MO4/RA4
MO5/RA5
MO6/RA6
MO7/RA7
For example: when Pr.03.09 is set to 3 (decimal) = 00000011 (binary) that indicates Relay1
and MO1 are used by PLC. (Pr.03.09= 20+21=3)
0=not used
1=Used by PLC
Weights
Bit
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
Relay 1
MO1
MO2/RA2
MO3/RA3
MO4/RA4
MO5/RA5
MO6/RA6
MO7/RA7
03.10 The Analog Output Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Settings
Read Only
Factory setting: ##
Bit0=1: AFM used by PLC
Bit1=1: AO1 used by PLC
Bit2=1: AO2 used by PLC
The equivalent 1-bit is used to display the status (used or not used) of each analog output. The
value that Pr.03.10 displays is the result after converting 1-bit binary into decimal value.
0=not used
Weights
1=Used by PLC
Bit
2
1
0
AFM
AO1 (optional)
AO2 (optional)
For Example:
If Pr.03.10 displays 1, it means that AFM is used by PLC.
4-66
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
03.11 Brake Release Frequency
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz
03.12 Brake Engage Frequency
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
These two parameters are used to set control of mechanical brake via the output terminals
(Relay or MO1) when Pr.03.00~03.01 is set to 21. Refer to the following example for details.
Example:
1. Case 1: Pr.03.12 ≥ Pr.03.11
2. Case 2: Pr.03.12 ≤ Pr.03.11
Frequency
Output
Case 1: Pr.03.12
Pr. 03.11
Case 2: Pr.03.12
Time
Run/Stop
Case 1: MO1=21
Case 2: MO1=21
Note: MO1: setting value of Pr.03.01
03.13 Display the Status of Multi-function Output Terminals
Settings
Read Only
Factory setting: ##
Bit0: RLY Status
Bit1: MO1 Status
Bit2: MO2/RA2 Status
Bit3: MO3/RA3 Status
Bit4: MO4/RA4 Status
Bit5: MO5/RA5 Status
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Bit6: MO6/RA6 Status
Bit7: MO7/RA7 Status
For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the multi-function output terminals are
falling-edge triggered and Pr.03.13 will display 3 (11) for no action.
0=Active
Weights
1=Off
Bit
1
0
Relay 1
MO1
For Example:
If Pr.03.13 displays 2, it means Relay 1 is active.
The display value 2 =bit 1 X 21
When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function output terminals will
increase according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function output
terminals is shown as follows.
0=Active
Weights
1=Off
Bit
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Relay 1
MO1
MO2/RA2
MO3/RA3
MO4/RA4
MO5/RA5
MO6/RA6
MO7/RA7
4-68
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 4: Input Function Parameters
04.00 ꢀKeypad Potentiometer Bias
Unit: 0. 1
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 0.0
04.01 ꢀKeypad Potentiometer Bias Polarity
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Positive Bias
Negative Bias
04.02 ꢀKeypad Potentiometer Gain
Settings 0.1 to 200.0%
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 100.0
Keypad Potentiometer Negative Bias, Reverse Motion
Enable/Disable
04.03
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
No Negative Bias Command
Negative Bias: REV Motion Enabled
Example 1: Standard application
This is the most used setting. The user only needs to set Pr.02.00 to 04. The frequency command
comes from keypad potentiometer.
60Hz
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias
30Hz
Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
0Hz
0V
Example 2: Use of bias
10V
5V
This example shows the influence of changing the bias. When the input is 0V the output frequency is
10 Hz. At mid-point a potentiometer will give 40 Hz. Once the Maximum Output Frequency is reached,
any further increase of the potentiometer or signal will not increase the output frequency. (To use the
full potentiometer range, please refer to Example 3.) The value of external input voltage/current 0-
8.33V corresponds to the setting frequency 10-60Hz.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =16.7%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias
60Hz
40Hz
Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
10Hz
Bias
Adjustment
Gain:100%
0V
10V
5V
0Hz
Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=16.7%
Example 3: Use of bias and gain for use of full range
This example also shows a popular method. The whole scale of the potentiometer can be used as
desired. In addition to signals of 0 to 10V, the popular voltage signals also include signals of 0 to 5V,
or any value under 10V. Regarding the setting, please refer to the following examples.
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
60Hz
Pr.04.00 =20.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias
Pr.04.02 =83.3%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
10Hz
Bias
Gain:(10V/(10V+2V))*100%=83.3%
Adjustment
0Hz0V
Bias adjustment:((10Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=20.0%
10V
5V
-2V
XV
Example 4: Use of 0-5V potentiometer range via gain adjustment
This example shows a potentiometer range of 0 to 5 Volts. Instead of adjusting gain as example
below, you can set Pr. 01.00 to 120Hz to achieve the same results.
Gain
adjustment
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
60Hz
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =0.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias
Pr.04.02 =200%--Input gain
30Hz
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200%
10V
5V
0Hz 0V
4-70
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Example 5: Use of negative bias in noisy environment
In this example, a 1V negative bias is used. In noisy environments it is advantageous to use negative
bias to provide a noise margin (1V in this example).
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =10.0%--Bias adjustment
60Hz
54Hz
Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias
Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
Gain:100%
0Hz
Negative
bias 6Hz
0V
1V
10V
Bias adjustment:((6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0%
Example 6: Use of negative bias in noisy environment and gain adjustment to use full
potentiometer range
In this example, a negative bias is used to provide a noise margin. Also a potentiometer frequency
gain is used to allow the Maximum Output Frequency to be reached.
Bias
adjustment
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
60Hz
Pr.04.00 =10.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias
Pr.04.02 =111%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =0--No negative bias command
Gain:(10V/9V)*100%=111%
0Hz
Negative
bias 6.6Hz
0V
1V
10V
Bias adjustment:((6.6Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=10.0%
Example 7: Use of 0-10V potentiometer signal to run motor in FWD and REV direction
In this example, the input is programmed to run a motor in both forward and reverse direction. The
motor will be idle when the potentiometer position is at mid-point of its scale. Using the settings in this
example disables the external FWD and REV controls.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
Potentiometer
Pr.04.00 =50.0%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =1--Negative bias
Pr.04.02 =200%--Input gain
60Hz
FWD
30Hz
0Hz
0V
5V
10V
Pr.04.03 =1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled
30Hz
Gain:(10V/5V)*100%=200%
REV
60Hz
Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=200%
Example 8: Use negative slope
In this example, the use of negative slope is shown. Negative slopes are used in applications for
control of pressure, temperature or flow. The sensor that is connected to the input generates a large
signal (10V) at high pressure or flow. With negative slope settings, the AC motor drive will slow stop
the motor. With these settings the AC motor drive will always run in only one direction (reverse). This
can only be changed by exchanging 2 wires to the motor.
Pr.01.00=60Hz--Max. output Freq.
60Hz
Potentiometer
negative slope
Pr.04.00 =100%--Bias adjustment
Pr.04.01 =0--Positive bias
Pr.04.02 =100%--Input gain
Pr.04.03 =1--Negative bias: REV motion enabled
Gain:(10V/10V)*100%=100%
0Hz
0V
10V
Bias adjustment:((60Hz/60Hz)/(Gain/100%))*100%=100%
04.11 Minimum AVI Voltage
Settings
Unit: 0.1
0.0 to 10.0V
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.1
04.12 Minimum AVI Frequency (percentage of Pr.01.00)
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.1
04.13 Maximum AVI Voltage
Settings
0.0 to 10.0V
Factory Setting: 10.0
Unit: 0.1
04.14 Maximum AVI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00)
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 100.0
Unit: 0.1
04.15 Minimum ACI Current
Settings
0.0 to 20.0mA
Factory Setting: 4.0
Unit: 0.1
04.16 Minimum ACI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00)
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 0.0
4-72
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
04.17 Maximum ACI Current
Unit: 0.01
Settings
0.0 to 20.0mA
Factory Setting: 20.0
Unit: 0.1
04.18 Maximum ACI Frequency (percentage of Pr. 01.00)
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 100.0
04.19 ACI Terminal Mode Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
ACI
AVI2
04.20 Minimum AVI2 Voltage
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.0 to 10.0V
04.21 Minimum AVI2 Frequency (percentage of Pr.1-00)
Settings
04.22 Maximum AVI2 Voltage
Settings 0.0 to 10.0V
04.23 Maximum AVI2 Frequency (percentage of Pr.1-00)
Settings 0.0 to 100.0%
0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10.0
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 100.0
Please note the ACI/AVI switch on the AC motor drive. Switch to ACI for 4 to 20mA analog
current signal (ACI) (Pr.04.19 should be set to 0) and AVI for analog voltage signal (AVI2)
(Pr.04.19 should be set to 1).
The above parameters are used to set the analog input reference values. The min and max
frequencies are based on Pr.01.00 (during open-loop control) as shown in the following.
01.00
04.14
04.18
04.12
04.16
04.21
04.11
04.17
04.22
04.15
04.20
analog input
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
01.00=60.00 Hz
04.14=70
04.18=50
AVI
ACI
04.12=30
04.16=0
analog input
04.13=10V
04.17=20mA
04.11=0V
04.15=4mA
04.04 Multi-function Input Terminal (MI1, MI2) 2-wire/ 3-wire Operation Control Modes
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2-wire: FWD/STOP, REV/STOP
2-wire: FWD/REV, RUN/STOP
2
3-wire Operation
There are three different types of control modes:
External Terminal
04.04
MI1:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":FWD)
2-wire
FWD/STOP
REV/STOP
0
1
FWD /STOP
REV / STOP
MI2:("OPEN": STOP)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD-E
MI1:("OPEN":STOP)
("CLOSE":RUN)
2-wire
RUN/STOP
FWD/REV
FWD/ REV
RUN / STOP
MI2:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
DCM
VFD-E
4-74
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
External Terminal
STOP RUN
04.04
MI1:("CLOSE":RUN)
MI3:("OPEN":STOP)
2
3-wire
MI2:("OPEN": FWD)
("CLOSE": REV)
REV/FWD
DCM
VFD-E
04.05
04.06
04.07
04.08
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI3)
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI4)
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI5)
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI6)
Factory Setting: 1
Factory Setting: 2
Factory Setting: 3
Factory Setting: 4
Settings
Function
Description
Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they
have no effect on operation.
0
No Function
Multi-Step Speed
Command 1
1
2
These four inputs select the multi-speed defined by Pr.05.00 to
Pr.05.14 as shown in the diagram at the end of this table.
Multi-Step Speed
Command 2
NOTE: Pr.05.00 to Pr.05.14 can also be used to control output
speed by programming the AC motor drive’s internal PLC
function. There are 17 step speed frequencies (including
Master Frequency and Jog Frequency) to select for
application.
Multi-Step Speed
Command 3
3
4
Multi-Step Speed
Command 4
The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on
the Digital keypad. After faults such as O.H., O.C. and O.V. are
cleared this input can be used to reset the drive.
5
External Reset
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Function
Description
When the command is active, acceleration and deceleration is
stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed.
6
Accel/Decel Inhibit
Accel/Decel Time
Selection
Used to select the one of 2 Accel/Decel Times (Pr.01.09 to
Pr.01.12). See explanation at the end of this table.
7
8
Command
Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi-function Input
Terminals MI3 ∼ MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) for Jog control.
Jog Operation
Control
NOTE: Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be
done while the motor is stopped. (Refer to parameter
Pr.01.13~Pr.01.15)
Parameter value 09 programs a Multi-function Input Terminals for
external Base Block control.
External Base
Block
NOTE: When a Base-Block signal is received, the AC motor
drive will block all output and the motor will free run. When
9
(Refer to Pr. 08.06) base block control is deactivated, the AC drive will start its
speed search function and synchronize with the motor
speed, and then accelerate to Master Frequency.
Increase/decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is
received or continuously when the input stays active. When both
inputs are active at the same time, the Master Frequency
increase/decrease is halted. Please refer to Pr.02.07, 02.08. This
function is also called “motor potentiometer”.
UP: Increase
10
11
Master Frequency
DOWN: Decrease
Master Frequency
Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi-function Input
Terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) to increment the AC
drive’s internal counter. When an input is received, the counter is
incremented by 1.
12
Counter Trigger
When active, the counter is reset and inhibited. To enable
counting the input should be OFF. Refer to Pr.03.05 and 03.06.
13
14
Counter Reset
External Fault
Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi-function Input
Terminals MI3~MI6 (Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08) to be External Fault
(E.F.) inputs.
4-76
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Function
Description
PID function
disabled
When an input ON with this setting is ON, the PID function will be
disabled.
15
AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of
16
17
Output Shutoff Stop these settings is enabled. If the status of terminal is changed, AC
motor drive will restart from 0Hz.
Parameter lock
enable
When this setting is enabled, all parameters will be locked and
write parameters is disabled.
Operation
ON: Operation command via Ext. Terminals
OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting
Command
18
19
20
Selection (Pr.02.01
setting/external
terminals)
When the settings 18, 19 and 20 are ON at the same time, the
priority should be setting 18 > setting19 > setting20.
Operation
ON: Operation command via Digital Keypad
OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting
Command
Selection (Pr 02.01
setting/Digital
Keypad)
When the settings 18, 19 and 20 are ON at the same time, the
priority should be setting 18 > setting19 > setting20.
Operation
ON: Operation command via Communication
OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting
Command
Selection (Pr 02.01
setting/
When the settings 18, 19 and 20 are ON at the same time, the
priority should be setting 18 > setting19 > setting20.
Communication)
This function has top priority to set the direction for running (If
“Pr.02.04=0”)
21
22
Forward/Reverse
Used to select the first/second frequency command source. Refer
to Pr.02.00 and 02.09.
ON: 2nd Frequency command source
Source of second
frequency
command enabled
OFF: 1st Frequency command source
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Function
Description
ON: Run PLC Program
OFF: Stop PLC Program
When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is
enabled, it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC
program. When this function is disabled, it will display PLC0 in the
PLC page and stop executing PLC program. The motor will be
stopped by Pr.02.02.
Run/Stop PLC
Program (PLC1)
23
(NOT for VFD*E*C
models)
When operation command source is external terminal, the keypad
cannot be used to change PLC status. And this function will be
invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status.
Quick Stop
23
It is only valid when Pr.02.01 is set to 5 in VFD*E*C models.
(ONLY for
VFD*E*C models)
When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is
enabled, it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can
download/execute/monitor PLC. When this function is disabled, it
will display PLC0 in the PLC page and stop executing PLC
program. The motor will be stopped by Pr.02.02.
Download/Execute/
Monitor PLC
Program (PLC2)
24
(NOT for VFD*E*C
models)
When operation command source is external terminal, the keypad
cannot be used to change PLC status. And this function will be
invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC1 status.
Simple position
function
This function should be used with Pr.01.20~Pr.01.25 for simple
position. Refer to Pr.01.25 for details.
25
26
27
The OOB (Out Of Balance Detection) function can be used with
PLC for washing machine. When this setting is enabled, it will get
OOB (Out of
Balance Detection) Δθ value from the settings of Pr.08.21 and Pr.08.22. PLC or host
controller will decide the motor speed by this t Δθ value (Pr.08.23)
When this setting is enabled, it can be used for motor selection
Motor selection (bit
(Pr. 01.01~01.06, 01.26~01.43, 07.18~07.38, 07.00~07.06).
0)
For example: MI1=27, MI2=28
When MI1 and MI2 are OFF, it selects motor 0.
Motor selection (bit
When MI1 is ON and MI2 is OFF, it selects motor 1.
28
1)
When MI1 is OFF and MI2 is ON, it selects motor 2.
When MI1 and MI2 are ON, it selects motor 3.
4-78
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Accel/Decel Time Selection
Frequency
Master
Freq.
Acceleration
Delceleration
Decel time 1
Accel time 2
01.11
01.10
Decel time 2
01.12
Accel time 1
01.09
Time
1
2
1
2
RUN/STOP
PU External terminal
communication
OFF
OFF
ON
Accel/Decel time 1 & 2
Multi-function Input
Terminals Pr.04.05 to
Pr.04.08(MI3 to MI6)
ON
Accel/Decel Time and Multi-function Input Terminals
Multi-Step Speed
05.07
Frequency
05.06
05.08
05.05
05.09
05.04
05.10
05.03
05.11
05.02
05.12
JOG Freq.
01.15
05.01
05.00
Master Speed
05.13
05.14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
Run/Stop
PU/external terminals
ON
ON
ON
/communication
1st speed
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
(MI3 to MI6 1)
2nd speed
(MI3 to MI6 2)
3rd speed
(MI3 to MI6 3)
ON
OFF
ON
ON
4th speed
(MI3 to MI6 4)
OFF
OFF
ON
Jog Freq.
Multi-speed via External Terminals
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
MI6=4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
MI5=3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
MI4=2
OFF
OFF
ON
MI3=1
OFF
ON
Master frequency
1st speed
2nd speed
3rd speed
4th speed
5th speed
6th speed
7th speed
8th speed
9th speed
10th speed
11th speed
12th speed
13th speed
14th speed
15th speed
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Multi-function Input Contact Selection
Settings 0 to 4095
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
04.09
This parameter can be used to set the status of multi-function terminals (MI1~MI6 (N.O./N.C.)
for standard AC motor drive).
The MI1~MI3 setting will be invalid when the operation command source is external terminal
(2/3wire).
0=N.O
Weights
Bit
1=N.C
5
4
3
2
1
0
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
The Setting method: It needs to convert binary number (6-bit) to decimal number for input.
For example: if setting MI3, MI5, MI6 to be N.C. and MI1, MI2, MI4 to be N.O. The setting
value Pr.04.09 should be bit5X25+bit4X24+bit2X22= 1X25+1X24+1X22= 32+16+4=52 as shown
in the following.
4-80
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
0=N.O
1=N.C
Weights
Bit
MI1
1
1
0
1
0
0
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
The setting value
NOTE:
= bit5x25+bit4x24+bit2x22
214=16384 213=8192 212=4096 211=2048 210=1024
= 1x25+1x24+1x22
29=512
24=16
28=256
23=8
27=128
22=4
26=64
21=2
25=32
20=1
=32+16+4
=52
Setting 04.09
When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function input terminals will increase
according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function input terminals is
shown as follows.
0=N.O
1=N.C
Weights
Bit
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MI9
MI10
MI11
MI12
04.10
Unit: 2ms
Factory Setting: 1
Digital Terminal Input Debouncing Time
Settings
1 to 20
This parameter is to delay the signals on digital input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units are 4
msec, etc. The delay time is to debounce noisy signals that could cause the digital terminals to
malfunction.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
04.24
The Digital Input Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Settings
Read Only
Factory setting: ##
Display
Bit0=1: MI1 used by PLC
Bit1=1: MI2 used by PLC
Bit2=1: MI3 used by PLC
Bit3=1: MI4 used by PLC
Bit4=1: MI5 used by PLC
Bit5=1: MI6 used by PLC
Bit6=1: MI7 used by PLC
Bit7=1: MI8 used by PLC
Bit8=1: MI9 used by PLC
Bit9=1: MI10 used by PLC
Bit10=1: MI11 used by PLC
Bit11=1: MI12 used by PLC
For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the equivalent 6-bit is used to display
the status (used or not used) of each digital input. The value for Pr.04.24 to display is the
result after converting 6-bit binary into decimal value.
0=not used
Weights
Bit
1=used by PLC
5
4
3
2
1
0
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
For example: when Pr.04.24 is set to 52 (decimal) = 110100 (binary) that indicates MI3, MI5
and MI6 are used by PLC.
0=OFF
Weights
1=ON
MI1
1
1
0
1
0
0
Bit
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
4-82
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
When extension card is installed, the number of the digital input terminals will increase
according to the extension card. The maximum number of the digital input terminals is shown
as follows.
0=not used
1=Used by PLC
Weights
Bit
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MI9
MI10
MI11
MI12
04.25 The Analog Input Used by PLC (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Settings
Display
Read Only
Factory setting: ##
Bit0=1: AVI used by PLC
Bit1=1: ACI/AVI2 used by PLC
Bit2=1: AI1 used by PLC
Bit3=1: AI2 used by PLC
The equivalent 2-bit is used to display the status(used or not used) of each analog input. The
value for Pr.04.25 to display is the result after converting 2-bit binary into decimal value.
Weights
Bit
0=not used
1=used by PLC
AVI
2
0
3
1
ACI/AVI2
AI1 (optional)
AI2 (optional)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
04.26 Display the Status of Multi-function Input Terminal
Settings
Display
Read Only
Factory setting: ##
Bit0: MI1 Status
Bit1: MI2 Status
Bit2: MI3 Status
Bit3: MI4 Status
Bit4: MI5 Status
Bit5: MI6 Status
Bit6: MI7 Status
Bit7: MI8 Status
Bit8: MI9 Status
Bit9: MI10 Status
Bit10: MI11 Status
Bit11: MI12 Status
The multi-function input terminals are falling-edge triggered. For standard AC motor drive
(without extension card), there are MI1 to MI6 and Pr.04.26 will display 63 (111111) for no
action.
0=Active
Weights
Bit
1=off
5
4
3
2
1
0
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
For Example:
If Pr.04.26 displays 52, it means MI1, MI2 and MI4 are active.
The display value 52= 32+16+4 =1 X 25+ 1X 24 + 1X 22 = bit 6 X 25+ bit 5 X 24 + bit 3 X 22
4-84
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
0=Active
1=Off
MI1
Weights
Bit
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MI9
When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function input terminals will increase
according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function input terminals is
shown as follows.
0=Active
1=Off
Weights
Bit
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MI9
MI10
MI11
MI12
04.27
Unit: 1
ꢀInternal/External Multi-function Input Terminals Selection
Settings
Factory Setting: 0
0 to 4095
This parameter is used to select the terminals to be internal terminal or external terminal. You
can activate internal terminals by Pr.04.28. A terminal cannot be both internal terminal and
external terminal at the same time.
For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the multi-function input terminals are
MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
0=external terminal
1=internal terminal
MI1
Weights
Bit
5
4
3
2
1
0
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
The Setting method is convert binary number to decimal number for input.
For example: if setting MI3, MI5, MI6 to be internal terminals and MI1, MI2, MI4 to be external
terminals. The setting value should be bit5X25+bit4X24+bit2X22= 1X25+1X24+1X22=
32+16+4=52 as shown in the following.
0=external terminal
Weights
1=internal terminal
MI1
1
1
0
1
0
0
Bit
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function input terminals will increase
according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function input terminals is
shown as follows.
0=external terminal
1=internal terminal
Weights
Bit
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MI9
MI10
MI11
MI12
04.28
Unit: 1
ꢀInternal Terminal Status
Settings
Factory Setting: 0
0 to 4095
This parameter is used to set the internal terminal action via keypad, communication or PLC.
4-86
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
For standard AC motor drive (without extension card), the multi-function input terminals are
MI1 to MI6 as shown in the following.
0=set internal terminal to be OFF
Weights
1=set internal terminal to be ON
Bit
5
4
3
2
1
0
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
For example, if setting MI3, MI5 and MI6 to be ON, Pr.04.28 should be set to
bit5X25+bit4X24+bit2X22= 1X25+1X24+1X22= 32+16+4=52 as shown in the following.
0=OFF
Weights
1=ON
MI1
1
1
0
1
0
0
Bit
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
When extension card is installed, the number of the multi-function input terminals will increase
according to the extension card. The maximum number of the multi-function input terminals is
shown as follows.
0=set internal terminal to be OFF
1=set internal terminal to be ON
Weights
Bit
11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
MI6
MI7
MI8
MI9
MI10
MI11
MI12
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 5: Multi-step Speeds Parameters
05.00 ꢀ1st Step Speed Frequency
05.01 ꢀ2nd Step Speed Frequency
05.02 ꢀ3rd Step Speed Frequency
05.03 ꢀ4th Step Speed Frequency
05.04 ꢀ5th Step Speed Frequency
05.05 ꢀ6th Step Speed Frequency
05.06 ꢀ7th Step Speed Frequency
05.07 ꢀ8th Step Speed Frequency
05.08 ꢀ9th Step Speed Frequency
05.09 ꢀ10th Step Speed Frequency
05.10 ꢀ11th Step Speed Frequency
05.11 ꢀ12th Step Speed Frequency
05.12 ꢀ13th Step Speed Frequency
05.13 ꢀ14th Step Speed Frequency
05.14 ꢀ15th Step Speed Frequency
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Settings
0.00 to 600.0Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
The Multi-function Input Terminals (refer to Pr.04.05 to 04.08) are used to select one of the AC
motor drive Multi-step speeds. The speeds (frequencies) are determined by Pr.05.00 to 05.14
as shown in the following.
4-88
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
05.07
Frequency
05.06
05.05
05.04
05.03
05.02
05.01
05.00
Master Speed
05.08
05.09
05.10
05.11
05.12
05.13
05.14
JOG Freq.
01.15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15
Run/Stop
PU/external terminals
ON
ON
ON
/communication
1st speed
OFF ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
(MI3 to MI6 1)
2nd speed
(MI3 to MI6 2)
3rd speed
(MI3 to MI6 3)
ON
OFF
ON
ON
4th speed
(MI3 to MI6 4)
OFF
OFF
ON
Jog Freq.
Multi-speed via External Terminals
MI6=4
MI5=3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
MI4=2
OFF
OFF
ON
MI3=1
Master frequency
1st speed
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
2nd speed
3rd speed
4th speed
5th speed
6th speed
7th speed
8th speed
9th speed
10th speed
11th speed
12th speed
13th speed
14th speed
15th speed
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 6: Protection Parameters
06.00 Over-Voltage Stall Prevention
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 390.0
Factory Setting: 780.0
Settings 115V/230V series 330.0 to 410.0V
460V series
0
660.0 to 820.0V
Disable Over-voltage Stall Prevention (with brake unit or
brake resistor)
During deceleration, the DC bus voltage may exceed its Maximum Allowable Value due to
motor regeneration. When this function is enabled, the AC motor drive will not decelerate
further and keep the output frequency constant until the voltage drops below the preset value
again.
Over-Voltage Stall Prevention must be disabled (Pr.06.00=0) when a brake unit or brake
resistor is used.
NOTE
With moderate inertia load, over-voltage stall prevention will not occur and the real deceleration time
will be equal to the setting of deceleration time. The AC drive will automatically extend the
deceleration time with high inertia loads. If the deceleration time is critical for the application, a brake
resistor or brake unit should be used.
high voltage at DC side
over-voltage
detection level
time
output
frequency
Frequency Held
Deceleration characteristic
when Over-Voltage Stall
Prevention enabled
time
previous deceleration time
actual time to decelerate to stop when over-voltage
stall prevention is enabled
4-90
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Over-Current Stall Prevention during Acceleration
06.01
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 170
Settings
20 to 250%
0: disable
A setting of 100% is equal to the Rated Output Current of the drive.
During acceleration, the AC drive output current may increase abruptly and exceed the value
specified by Pr.06.01 due to rapid acceleration or excessive load on the motor. When this
function is enabled, the AC drive will stop accelerating and keep the output frequency constant
until the current drops below the maximum value.
06.01
Over-Current
output current
Detection
Level
setting
frequency
Over-Current Stall
prevention during
Acceleration,
Output
Frequency
frequency held
time
previous acceleration time
actual acceleration time when over-current stall
prevention is enabled
06.02
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 170
Over-current Stall Prevention during Operation
Settings
20 to 250%
0: disable
If the output current exceeds the setting specified in Pr.06.02 when the drive is operating, the
drive will decrease its output frequency to prevent the motor stall. If the output current is lower
than the setting specified in Pr.06.02, the drive will accelerate again to catch up with the set
frequency command value.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Over-Current Stall
Prevention during
Operation, output
frequency decrease
Over-Current
Detection
Level
Output Current
06.02
Output
Frequency
over-current stall prevention during operation
06.03 Over-Torque Detection Mode (OL2)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Over-Torque detection disabled.
Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation.
After over-torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs.
2
3
4
Over-Torque detection enabled during constant speed operation.
After over-torque is detected, stop running.
Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After over-
torque is detected, keep running until OL1 or OL occurs.
Over-Torque detection enabled during acceleration. After over-
torque is detected, stop running.
This parameter determines the operation mode of the drive after the over-torque (OL2) is
detected via the following method: if the output current exceeds the over-torque detection level
(Pr.06.04) longer than the setting of Pr.06.05 Over-Torque Detection Time, the warning
message “OL2” is displayed. If a Multi-functional Output Terminal is set to over-torque
detection (Pr.03.00~03.01=04), the output is on. Please refer to Pr.03.00~03.01 for details.
06.04 ꢀOver-Torque Detection Level (OL2)
Settings 10 to 200%
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 150
This setting is proportional to the Rated Output Current of the drive.
06.05 Over-Torque Detection Time (OL2)
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.1 to 60.0 sec
Factory Setting: 0.1
4-92
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
This parameter sets the time for how long over-torque must be detected before “OL2” is
displayed.
06.06 Electronic Thermal Overload Relay Selection (OL1)
Factory Setting: 2
Operate with a Standard Motor (self-cooled by fan)
Settings
0
1
2
Operate with a Special Motor (forced external cooling)
Operation disabled
This function is used to protect the motor from overloading or overheating.
100
100
80
60
40
20
80
60
40
20
25
50
100
150
25
50
100
150
rated frequency of the motor %
rated frequency of the motor %
Standard motor
(self-cooled by fan)
Special Motor
(forced external cooling)
06.07 Electronic Thermal Characteristic
Settings 30 to 600 sec
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 60
The parameter determines the time required for activating the I2t electronic thermal protection
function. The graph below shows I2t curves for 150% output power for 1 minute.
Operation
time (seconds)
350
300
50Hz or more
10Hz
5Hz
250
200
150
100
50
Load
factor (%)
0
50
100
150
200
250
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
06.08 Present Fault Record
06.09 Second Most Recent Fault Record
06.10 Third Most Recent Fault Record
06.11 Fourth Most Recent Fault Record
06.12 Fifth Most Recent Fault Record
Factory Setting: 0
Readings
0
No fault
1
Over-current (oc)
2
Over-voltage (ov)
3
IGBT Overheat (oH1)
Power Board Overheat (oH2)
Overload(oL)
4
5
6
Overload (oL1)
7
Motor Overload (oL2)
External Fault (EF)
Hardware protection failure (HPF)
8
9
10
11
12
Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel.(ocA)
Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel.(ocd)
Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state
operation (ocn)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Reserved
Phase-loss (PHL)
Reserved
Auto accel/decel failure (CFA)
Software/password protection (codE)
Power Board CPU WRITE Failure (cF1.0)
Power Board CPU READ Failure (cF2.0)
CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1)
OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2)
GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3)
OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4)
U-phase error (cF3.0)
V-phase error (cF3.1)
W-phase error (cF3.2)
DCBUS error (cF3.3)
IGBT Overheat (cF3.4)
4-94
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
29
30
31
32
33
34
Power Board Overheat (cF3.5)
Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.1)
Contrsol Board CPU READ failure (cF2.1)
ACI signal error (AErr)
Reserved
Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1)
35-39 Reserved
40 Communication time-out error of control board and power board
(CP10)
In Pr.06.08 to Pr.06.12 the five most recent faults that occurred, are stored. After removing the
cause of the fault, use the reset command to reset the drive.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 7: Motor Parameters
07.00 Motor Rated Current (Motor 0)
Unit: 1
Settings
30% FLA to 120% FLA
Factory Setting: FLA
Use the following formula to calculate the percentage value entered in this parameter:
(Motor Current / AC Drive Current) x 100%
with Motor Current=Motor rated current in A on type shield
AC Drive Current=Rated current of AC drive in A (see Pr.00.01)
Pr.07.00 and Pr.07.01 must be set if the drive is programmed to operate in Vector Control
mode (Pr.00.10 = 1). They also must be set if the "Electronic Thermal Overload Relay"
(Pr.06.06) or "Slip Compensation"(Pr.07-03) functions are selected.
Pr.07.00 must be greater than Pr.07.01.
Motor No-load Current (Motor 0)
Settings 0% FLA to 90% FLA
07.01
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA
The rated current of the AC drive is regarded as 100%. The setting of the Motor no-load
current will affect the slip compensation.
The setting value must be less than Pr.07.00 (Motor Rated Current).
07.02 ꢀTorque Compensation (Motor 0)
Settings 0.0 to 10.0
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
This parameter may be set so that the AC drive will increase its voltage output to obtain a
higher torque. Only to be used for V/f control mode.
Too high torque compensation can overheat the motor.
07.03 ꢀSlip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 0)
Settings 0.00 to 10.00
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
While driving an asynchronous motor, increasing the load on the AC motor drive will cause an
increase in slip and decrease in speed. This parameter may be used to compensate the slip by
increasing the output frequency. When the output current of the AC motor drive is bigger than
the motor no-load current (Pr.07.01), the AC drive will adjust its output frequency according to
this parameter.
4-96
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
07.04 Motor Parameters Auto Tuning
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
Disable
Auto Tuning R1 (motor doesn’t run)
Auto Tuning R1 + No-load Test (with running motor)
Start Auto Tuning by pressing RUN key after this parameter is set to 1 or 2.
When set to 1, it will only auto detect R1 value and Pr.07.01 must be input manually. When set
to 2, the AC motor drive should be unloaded and the values of Pr.07.01 and Pr.07.05 will be
set automatically.
The steps for AUTO-Tuning are:
1.
Make sure that all the parameters are set to factory settings and the motor wiring is
correct.
2.
Make sure the motor has no-load before executing auto-tuning and the shaft is not
connected to any belt or gear motor.
3.
4.
Fill in Pr.01.01, Pr.01.02, Pr.07.00, Pr.07.04 and Pr.07.06 with correct values.
After Pr.07.04 is set to 2, the AC motor drive will execute auto-tuning immediately after
receiving a ”RUN” command. (Note: The motor will run!). The total auto tune time will be
15 seconds + Pr.01.09 + Pr.01.10. Higher power drives need longer Accel/Decel time
(factory setting is recommended). After executing Auto-tune, Pr.07.04 is set to 0.
After executing, please check if there are values filled in Pr.07.01 and Pr.07.05. If not,
please press RUN key after setting Pr.07.04 again.
5.
6.
Then you can set Pr.00.10 to 1 and set other parameters according to your application
requirement.
NOTE
1. In vector control mode it is not recommended to have motors run in parallel.
2. It is not recommended to use vector control mode if motor rated power exceeds the rated power of
the AC motor drive.
07.05 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 0)
Settings
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
0 to 65535 mΩ
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
The motor auto tune procedure will set this parameter. The user may also set this parameter
without using Pr.07.04.
07.06 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 0)
Unit: 0.01
Settings
0.00 to 20.00Hz
Factory Setting: 3.00
Refer to the rated rpm and the number of poles on the nameplate of the motor and use the
following equation to calculate the rated slip.
Rated Slip (Hz) = Fbase (Pr.01.01 base frequency) – (rated rpm x motor pole 120)
07.07 Slip Compensation Limit
Settings 0 to 250%
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 200
This parameter sets the upper limit of the compensation frequency (the percentage of
Pr.07.06).
Example: when Pr.07.06=5Hz and Pr.07.07=150%, the upper limit of the compensation
frequency is 7.5Hz. Therefore, for a 50Hz motor, the max. output is 57.5Hz.
07.08 Torque Compensation Time Constant
Settings 0.01 ~10.00 sec
07.09 Slip Compensation Time Constant
Settings 0.05 ~10.00 sec
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.10
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.20
Setting Pr.07.08 and Pr.07.09 changes the response time for the compensations.
Too long time constants give slow response; too short values can give unstable operation.
07.10 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Min.)
Settings 0~1439
07.11 Accumulative Motor Operation Time (Day)
Settings 0 ~65535
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Pr.07.10 and Pr.07.11 are used to record the motor operation time. They can be cleared by
setting to 0 and time is less than 1 minute is not recorded.
07.12 Motor PTC Overheat Protection
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Disable
Enable
07.14 Motor PTC Overheat Protection Level
Unit: 0.1
4-98
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
0.1~10.0V
Factory Setting: 2.4
When the motor is running at low frequency for a long time, the cooling function of the motor
fan will be lower. To prevent overheating, it needs to have a Positive Temperature Coefficient
thermoistor on the motor and connect its output signal to the drive’s corresponding control
terminals.
When the source of first/second frequency command is set to AVI (02.00=1/02.09=1), it will
disable the function of motor PTC overheat protection (i.e. Pr.07.12 cannot be set to 1).
If temperature exceeds the setting level, motor will be coast to stop and
is
displayed. When the temperature decreases below the level of (Pr.07.15-Pr.07.16) and
stops blinking, you can press RESET key to clear the fault.
Pr.07.14 (overheat protection level) must exceed Pr.07.15 (overheat warning level).
The PTC uses the AVI-input and is connected via resistor-divider as shown below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The voltage between +10V to ACM: lies within 10.4V~11.2V.
The impedance for AVI is around 47kΩ.
Recommended value for resistor-divider R1 is 1~20kΩ.
Please contact your motor dealer for the curve of temperature and resistance value for
PTC.
VFD-E
+10V
resistor-divider
R1
AVI
47kΩ
PTC
ACM
internal circuit
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Refer to following calculation for protection level and warning level.
1.
2.
3.
Protection level
Pr.07.14= V+10 * (RPTC1//47K) / [R1+( RPTC1//47K)]
Warning level
Pr.07.16= V+10 * (RPTC2//47K) / [R1+( RPTC2//47K)]
Definition:
V+10: voltage between +10V-ACM, Range 10.4~11.2VDC
RPTC1: motor PTC overheat protection level. Corresponding voltage level set in
Pr.07.14, RPTC2: motor PTC overheat warning level. Corresponding voltage level set
in Pr.07.15, 47kΩ: is AVI input impedance, R1: resistor-divider (recommended value:
1~20kΩ)
Take the standard PTC thermistor as example: if protection level is 1330Ω, the voltage
between +10V-ACM is 10.5V and resistor-divider R1 is 4.4kΩ. Refer to following calculation
for Pr.07.14 setting.
1330//47000=(1330*47000)/(1330+47000)=1293.4
10.5*1293.4/(4400+1293.4)=2.38(V) ≒2.4(V)
Therefore, Pr.07.14 should be set to 2.4.
resistor value (
Ω)
1330
550
Tr
temperature (
℃)
Tr-5
07.15 Motor PTC Overheat Warning Level
Settings 0.1~10.0V
07.16 Motor PTC Overheat Reset Delta Level
Settings 0.1~5.0V
07.17 Treatment of the motor PTC Overheat
℃
Tr+5℃
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 1.2
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.6
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and COAST to stop
Warn and keep running
4-100
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
If temperature exceeds the motor PTC overheat warning level (Pr.07.15), the drive will act
according to Pr.07.17 and display
. If the temperature decreases below the result
(Pr.07.15 minus Pr.07.16), the warning display will disappear.
07.13 Input Debouncing Time of the PTC Protection
Unit: 2
Settings
0~9999 (is 0-19998ms)
Factory Setting: 100
This parameter is to delay the signals on PTC analog input terminals. 1 unit is 2 msec, 2 units
are 4 msec, etc.
07.18 Motor Rated Current (Motor 1)
Unit: 1
Settings
30% FLA to 120% FLA
Factory Setting: FLA
Motor No-load Current (Motor 1)
07.19
Unit: 1
Settings
07.20 ꢀTorque Compensation (Motor 1)
Settings 0.0 to 10.0
07.21 ꢀSlip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 1)
Settings 0.00 to 10.00
07.22 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 1)
Settings
07.23 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 1)
Settings 0.00 to 20.00Hz
07.24 Motor Pole Number (Motor 1)
Settings 2 to 10
07.25 Motor Rated Current (Motor 2)
0% FLA to 90% FLA
Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Unit: 0.01
0 to 65535 mΩ
Factory Setting: 3.00
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 4
Unit: 1
Settings
30% FLA to 120% FLA
Factory Setting: FLA
Motor No-load Current (Motor 2)
07.26
Unit: 1
Settings
07.27 ꢀTorque Compensation (Motor 2)
Settings 0.0 to 10.0
07.28 ꢀSlip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 2)
Settings 0.00 to 10.00
07.29 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 2)
Settings
07.30 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 2)
Settings 0.00 to 20.00Hz
0% FLA to 90% FLA
Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Unit: 0.01
0 to 65535 mΩ
Factory Setting: 3.00
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
07.31 Motor Pole Number (Motor 2)
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 4
Unit: 1
Settings
2 to 10
07.32 Motor Rated Current (Motor 3)
Settings
30% FLA to 120% FLA
Factory Setting: FLA
Motor No-load Current (Motor 3)
07.33
Unit: 1
Settings
07.34 ꢀTorque Compensation (Motor 3)
Settings 0.0 to 10.0
07.35 ꢀSlip Compensation (Used without PG) (Motor 3)
Settings 0.00 to 10.00
07.36 Motor Line-to-line Resistance R1 (Motor 3)
Settings
07.37 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 3)
Settings 0.00 to 20.00Hz
07.38 Motor Pole Number (Motor 3)
Settings 2 to 10
0% FLA to 90% FLA
Factory Setting: 0.4*FLA
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Unit: 0.01
0 to 65535 mΩ
Factory Setting: 3.00
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 4
The motor 0 to motor 3 can be selected by setting the multi-function input terminals MI3~MI6
(Pr.04.05 to Pr.04.08) to 27 and 28.
4-102
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 8: Special Parameters
08.00 DC Brake Current Level
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0 to 100%
This parameter sets the level of DC Brake Current output to the motor during start-up and
stopping. When setting DC Brake Current, the Rated Current (Pr.00.01) is regarded as 100%.
It is recommended to start with a low DC Brake Current Level and then increase until proper
holding torque has been achieved.
08.01 DC Brake Time during Start-up
Settings 0.0 to 60.0 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current after a RUN command. When
the time has elapsed, the AC motor drive will start accelerating from the Minimum Frequency
(Pr.01.05).
08.02 DC Brake Time during Stopping
Settings 0.0 to 60.0 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
This parameter determines the duration of the DC Brake current during stopping. If stopping
with DC Brake is desired, Pr.02.02 Stop Method must be set to 0 or 2 for Ramp to Stop.
08.03 Start-Point for DC Brake
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
This parameter determines the frequency when DC Brake will begin during deceleration.
Output Frequency
Start-Point for
DC Braking Time
during Stopping
DC Braking
Time during
Stopping
01.05
Minimum Output
Frequency
08.03
Run/Stop
OFF
ON
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
DC Brake during Start-up is used for loads that may move before the AC drive starts, such as
fans and pumps. Under such circumstances, DC Brake can be used to hold the load in
position before setting it in motion.
DC Brake during stopping is used to shorten the stopping time and also to hold a stopped load
in position. For high inertia loads, a brake resistor for dynamic brake may also be needed for
fast decelerations.
08.04 Momentary Power Loss Operation Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Operation stops (coast to stop) after momentary power loss.
Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search
starts with the Master Frequency reference value.
2
Operation continues after momentary power loss, speed search
starts with the minimum frequency.
This parameter determines the operation mode when the AC motor drive restarts from a
momentary power loss.
08.05 Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time
Settings 0.1 to 5.0 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 2.0
If the duration of a power loss is less than this parameter setting, the AC motor drive will
resume operation. If it exceeds the Maximum Allowable Power Loss Time, the AC motor drive
output is then turned off (coast stop).
The selected operation after power loss in Pr.08.04 is only executed when the maximum
allowable power loss time is ≤5 seconds and the AC motor drive displays “Lu”.
But if the AC motor drive is powered off due to overload, even if the maximum allowable power
loss time is ≤5 seconds, the operation mode as set in Pr.08.04 is not executed. In that case it
starts up normally.
08.06 Base Block Speed Search
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0
1
2
Disable
Speed search starts with last frequency command
Speed search starts with minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05)
This parameter determines the AC motor drive restart method after External Base Block is
enabled.
4-104
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Output frequency
(H)
Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time 08.07
Speed Search
Output voltage(V)
A
08.08 Current Limit
for Speed SearchSpeed
Synchronization speed detection
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
Fig 1:B.B. Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart
(Speed Search Current Attains Speed Search Level)
Output frequency
(H)
Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time 08.07
Speed Search
08.08 Current Limit
for Speed SearchSpeed
A
Synchronization speed detection
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
Fig 2: B.B. Speed Search with Last Output Frequency Downward Timing Chart
(Speed Search Current doesn't Attain Speed Search Level)
Input B.B. signal
Stop output voltage
Disable B.B. signal
Waiting time 08.07
Restart
Output frequency
(H)
06.01
Over current
stall prevention
during acceleration
A
A
Synchronization speed detection
Keep accelerating
Time
FWD Run
B.B.
Fig3: B.B. Speed Search with Minimum Output Frequency Upward Timing Chart
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
08.07 Baseblock Time for Speed Search (BB)
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.1 to 5.0 sec
Factory Setting: 0.5
When momentary power loss is detected, the AC motor drive will block its output and then wait
for a specified period of time (determined by Pr.08.07, called Base-Block Time) before
resuming operation. This parameter should be set at a value to ensure that any residual
regeneration voltage from the motor on the output has disappeared before the drive is
activated again.
This parameter also determines the waiting time before resuming operation after External
Baseblock and Auto Restart after Fault (Pr.08.15).
When using a PG card with PG (encoder), speed search will begin at the actual PG (encoder)
feedback speed.
08.08 Current Limit for Speed Search
Settings 30 to 200%
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 150
Following a momentary power loss, the AC motor drive will start its speed search operation
only if the output current is greater than the value set by Pr.08.08. When the output current is
less than the value of Pr.08.08, the AC motor drive output frequency is at “speed
synchronization point”. The drive will start to accelerate or decelerate back to the operating
frequency at which it was running prior to the power loss.
Maximum Allowable
Maximum
Power Loss Time
Power
Input
Allowable Power
08.05
08.05
Speed
Synchronization
Detection
Speed Search
08.04=1
08.04=2
Baseblock Time
Baseblock Time
Output
Frequency
08.06
08.06
Output
Voltage
08.09 Skip Frequency 1 Upper Limit
08.10 Skip Frequency 1 Lower Limit
08.11 Skip Frequency 2 Upper Limit
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
4-106
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
08.12 Skip Frequency 2 Lower Limit
08.13 Skip Frequency 3 Upper Limit
08.14 Skip Frequency 3 Lower Limit
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Unit: 0.01
Settings
0.00 to 600.0Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
These parameters set the Skip Frequencies. It will cause the AC motor drive never to remain
within these frequency ranges with continuous frequency output.
These six parameters should be set as follows Pr.08.09 ≥ Pr.08.10 ≥ Pr.08.11 ≥ Pr.08.12 ≥
Pr.08.13 ≥ Pr.08.14.
The frequency ranges may be overlapping.
08.09
08.10
08.11
08.12
08.13
08.14
0
setting frequency
08.15 Auto Restart After Fault
Settings 0 to 10
Disable
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
0
Only after an over-current OC or over-voltage OV fault occurs, the AC motor drive can be
reset/restarted automatically up to 10 times.
Setting this parameter to 0 will disable automatic reset/restart operation after any fault has
occurred.
When enabled, the AC motor drive will restart with speed search, which starts at the frequency
before the fault. To set the waiting time before restart after a fault, please set Pr. 08.07 Base
Block Time for Speed Search.
08.16 Auto Reset Time at Restart after Fault
Settings 0.1 to 6000 sec
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 60.0
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
This parameter should be used in conjunction with Pr.08.15.
For example: If Pr.08.15 is set to 10 and Pr.08.16 is set to 600s (10 min), and if there is no
fault for over 600 seconds from the restart for the previous fault, the auto reset times for restart
after fault will be reset to 10.
08.17 Automatic Energy-saving
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Energy-saving operation disabled
Energy-saving operation enabled
Output
Voltage
100%
70%
During auto-energy saving
operation is the output
voltage lowered as much
as possible to keep the load.
The output voltage is maximally
lowered to 70% of the normal
output voltage
Output Frequency
08.18 Automatic Voltage Regulation (AVR)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
3
AVR function enabled
AVR function disabled
AVR function disabled for deceleration
AVR function disabled for stop
The rated voltage of the motor is usually 230V/200VAC 50Hz/60Hz and the input voltage of
the AC motor drive may vary between 180V to 264 VAC 50Hz/60Hz. Therefore, when the AC
motor drive is used without AVR function, the output voltage will be the same as the input
voltage. When the motor runs at voltages exceeding the rated voltage with 12% - 20%, its
lifetime will be shorter and it can be damaged due to higher temperature, failing insulation and
unstable torque output.
4-108
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
AVR function automatically regulates the AC motor drive output voltage to the Maximum
Output Voltage (Pr.01.02). For instance, if Pr.01.02 is set at 200 VAC and the input voltage is
at 200V to 264VAC, then the Maximum Output Voltage will automatically be reduced to a
maximum of 200VAC.
When the motor ramps to stop, the deceleration time is longer. When setting this parameter to
2 with auto acceleration/deceleration, the deceleration will be quicker.
Software Brake Level
Unit: 0.1
08.19
(the Action Level of the Brake resistor)
Settings
115/230V series: 370.0 to 430.0V
460V series: 740.0 to 860.0V
Factory Setting: 380.0
Factory Setting: 760.0
This parameter sets the DC-bus voltage at which the brake chopper is activated.
This parameter will be invalid for Frame A models (VFD002E11A/21A/23A,
VFD004E11A/21A/23A/43A, VFD007E21A/23A/43A and VFD022E23A/43A) without brake
chopper for which BUE brake unit must be used.
ꢀCompensation Coefficient for Motor Instability
Settings 0.0~5.0
08.20
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
The drift current will occur in a specific zone of the motor and it will make motor instable. By
using this parameter, it will improve this situation greatly.
The drift current zone of the high-power motors is usually in the low frequency area.
It is recommended to set to more than 2.0.
OOB Sampling Time
Settings 0.1 to 120.0 sec
08.22 Number of OOB Sampling Times
Settings 0.00 to 32
08.23 OOB Average Sampling Angle
Settings Read-only
08.21
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 1.0
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 20
Factory Setting: #.#
The OOB (Out Of Balance Detection) function can be used with PLC for washing machine.
When multi-function input terminal is enabled (MI=26), it will get Δθ value from the settings of
Pr.08.21 and Pr.08.22. PLC or the host controller will decide the motor speed by this t Δθ
value (Pr.08.23). When Δθ value is large, it means unbalanced load. At this moment, it needs
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
to lower the freqeuency command by PLC or the host controller. On the other hand, it can be
high-speed operation.
DEB Function
08.24
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Disable
Enable
DEB Return Time
Settings 0~250 sec
08.25
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 0
The DEB (Deceleration Energy Backup) function is the AC motor drive decelerates to stop
after momentary power loss. When the momentary power loss occurs, this function can be
used for the motor to decelerate to 0 speed with deceleration stop method. When the power is
on again, motor will run again after DEB return time. (for high-speed axis application)
Status 1: Insufficient power supply due to momentary power-loss/unstable power (due to low
voltage)/sudden heavy-load
DC BUS voltage
it doesn't need
multi-function terminals
The level for DEB return time
(Lv=+30V+58V)
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30)
Lv level
Soft start relay at
power side
DEB function is activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for
momentary power loss
07-14
DEB return time
NOTE
When Pr.07-14 is set to 0, the AC motor drive will be stopped and won't re-start
at the power-on again.
Status 2: unexpected power off, such as momentary power loss
4-110
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
DC BUS voltage
The level for DEB return time
(Lv=+30V+58V)
The level for soft start relay to be ON
(Lv+30)
Lv level
Soft start relay at
power side
DEB function is activated
Output frequency
Pr.07-13 Decel. time selection for
momentary power loss
07-14
DEB return time
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 9: Communication Parameters
There is a built-in RS-485 serial interface, marked RJ-45 near to the control terminals. The pins are
defined below:
RS-485 (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Serial interface
8
1
1: Reserved 2: EV
4: SG- 5: SG+
7: Reserved 8: Reserved
3: GND
6: Reserved
The pins definition for VFD*E*C models, please refer to chapter E.1.2.
Each VFD-E AC motor drive has a pre-assigned communication address specified by Pr.09.00. The
RS485 master then controls each AC motor drive according to its communication address.
09.00 ꢀCommunication Address
Settings
1 to 254
Factory Setting: 1
If the AC motor drive is controlled by RS-485 serial communication, the communication
address for this drive must be set via this parameter. And the communication address for each
AC motor drive must be different and unique.
09.01 ꢀTransmission Speed
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0
1
2
3
Baud rate 4800 bps (bits / second)
Baud rate 9600 bps
Baud rate 19200 bps
Baud rate 38400 bps
This parameter is used to set the transmission speed between the RS485 master (PLC, PC,
etc.) and AC motor drive.
09.02 ꢀTransmission Fault Treatment
Factory Setting: 3
Settings
0
1
2
3
Warn and keep operating
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and COAST to stop
No warning and keep operating
This parameter is set to how to react if transmission errors occur.
See list of error messages below (see section 3.6.)
4-112
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
ꢀTime-out Detection
Settings 0.0 to 120.0 sec
0.0 Disable
09.03
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
If Pr.09.03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09.02=0~2, and there is no communication on the bus during
the Time Out detection period (set by Pr.09.03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
09.04 ꢀCommunication Protocol
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1. Control by PC or PLC
A VFD-E can be set up to communicate in Modbus networks using one of the following
modes: ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) or RTU (Remote
Terminal Unit). Users can select the desired mode along with the serial port
communication protocol in Pr.09.04.
Code Description:
The CPU will be about 1 second delay when using communication reset. Therefore, there
is at least 1 second delay time in master station.
ASCII mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two ASCII characters. For example, a 1-byte data:
64 Hex, shown as ‘64’ in ASCII, consists of ‘6’ (36Hex) and ‘4’ (34Hex).
Character
‘0’
‘1’
‘2’
‘3’
‘4’
‘5’
‘6’
‘7’
ASCII code
30H
31H
32H
33H
34H
35H
36H
37H
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Character
ASCII code
‘8’
38H
‘9’
39H
‘A’
41H
‘B’
42H
‘C’
43H
‘D’
44H
‘E’
45H
‘F’
46H
RTU mode:
Each 8-bit data is the combination of two 4-bit hexadecimal characters. For example, 64
Hex.
2. Data Format
10-bit character frame (For ASCII):
( 7.N.2)
Start
bit
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
5
0
1
2
3
4
6
6
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.E.1)
Start
bit
Even
parity
Stop
bit
0
3
4
5
1
2
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.O.1)
Start
bit
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 7.N.1)
Start
bit
Stop
bit
5
0
0
1
1
2
3
4
6
6
7-bit character
9-bit character frame
( 7.E.2)
Start
bit
Even
parity
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
3
4
5
2
7-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 7.O.2)
Start
bit
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
Stop
bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7-bit character
11-bit character frame
4-114
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
11-bit character frame (For RTU):
( 8.N.2 )
Start
bit
Stop Stop
7
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
bit
bit
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.E.1 )
Even
parity
Start
bit
Stop
bit
5
2
3
4
7
7
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.O.1 )
Odd
parity
Start
bit
Stop
bit
5
2
3
4
8-bit character
11-bit character frame
( 8.N.1 )
Start
bit
Stop
bit
0
0
0
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8-bit character
10-bit character frame
( 8.E.2 )
Stop
bit
Even Stop
parity
bit
Start
bit
2
3
4
5
8-bit character
12-bit character frame
( 8.O.2 )
Start
bit
Stop
bit
Odd
parity
Stop
bit
5
2
3
4
8-bit character
12-bit character frame
3. Communication Protocol
3.1 Communication Data Frame:
ASCII mode:
STX
Start character ‘:’ (3AH)
Communication address:
Address Hi
Address Lo
Function Hi
Function Lo
8-bit address consists of 2 ASCII codes
Command code:
8-bit command consists of 2 ASCII codes
DATA (n-1)
to
Contents of data:
Nx8-bit data consist of 2n ASCII codes
n<=20, maximum of 40 ASCII codes
DATA 0
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
LRC CHK Hi
LRC CHK Lo
END Hi
LRC check sum:
8-bit check sum consists of 2 ASCII codes
End characters:
END1= CR (0DH), END0= LF(0AH)
END Lo
RTU mode:
START
Address
Function
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
Communication address: 8-bit address
Command code: 8-bit command
DATA (n-1)
to
Contents of data:
n×8-bit data, n<=40 (20 x 16-bit data)
DATA 0
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
END
CRC check sum:
16-bit check sum consists of 2 8-bit characters
A silent interval of more than 10 ms
3.2 Address (Communication Address)
Valid communication addresses are in the range of 0 to 254. A communication address equal
to 0, means broadcast to all AC drives (AMD). In this case, the AMD will not reply any
message to the master device.
00H: broadcast to all AC drives
01H: AC drive of address 01
0FH: AC drive of address 15
10H: AC drive of address 16
:
FEH: AC drive of address 254
For example, communication to AMD with address 16 decimal (10H):
ASCII mode: Address=’1’,’0’ => ‘1’=31H, ‘0’=30H
RTU mode: Address=10H
3.3 Function (Function code) and DATA (data characters)
The format of data characters depends on the function code.
03H: read data from register
06H: write single register
08H: loop detection
4-116
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
10H: write multiple registers
The available function codes and examples for VFD-E are described as follows:
(1) 03H: multi read, read data from registers.
Example: reading continuous 2 data from register address 2102H, AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command message:
STX
Response message:
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘2’
‘1’
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘D’
‘7’
CR
LF
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘0’
‘4’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
Address
Function
Address
Function
Number of data
(Count by byte)
Starting data
address
Content of starting
address
2102H
Number of data
(count by word)
Content of address
2103H
LRC Check
END
LRC Check
END
RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
Response message:
Address
01H
03H
21H
02H
01H
03H
Function
Function
Number of data
(count by byte)
Starting data
address
04H
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Number of data
(count by word)
00H
02H
6FH
F7H
17H
70H
00H
00H
FEH
5CH
Content of address
2102H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
Content of address
2103H
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
(2) 06H: single write, write single data to register.
Example: writing data 6000(1770H) to register 0100H. AMD address is 01H.
ASCII mode:
Command message:
Response message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘6’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘1’
CR
LF
Address
Address
Function
Function
Data address
Data address
Data content
Data content
LRC Check
END
LRC Check
END
RTU mode:
Command message:
Address
Response message:
Address
01H
01H
4-118
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Function
08H
00H
00H
17H
70H
EEH
1FH
Function
08H
00H
00H
17H
70H
EEH
1FH
Data address
Data address
Data content
Data content
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
(3) 08H: loop detection
This command is used to detect if the communication between master device (PC or PLC)
and AC motor drive is normal. The AC motor drive will send the received message to the
master device.
ASCII mode:
Command message:
Response message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘8’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘0’
CR
LF
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘8’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
‘7’
‘7’
‘0’
‘7’
‘0’
CR
LF
Address
Address
Function
Function
Data address
Data address
Data content
Data content
LRC Check
END
LRC Check
END
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
RTU mode:
Command message:
Response message:
Address
Address
Function
01H
08H
00H
00H
17H
70H
EEH
1FH
01H
08H
00H
00H
17H
70H
EEH
1FH
Function
Data address
Data content
Data address
Data content
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
(4) 10H: write multiple registers (write multiple data to registers)
Example: Set the multi-step speed,
Pr.05.00=50.00 (1388H), Pr.05.01=40.00 (0FA0H). AC drive address is 01H.
ASCII Mode:
Command message:
Response message:
STX
‘:’
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘E’
‘8’
CR
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
‘0’
‘1’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘5’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘2’
‘0’
‘4’
‘1’
Address 1
Address 0
Function 1
Function 0
Starting data
address
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by byte)
LRC Check
END
‘3’
LF
The first data
content
‘8’
‘8’
‘0’
The second data
content
‘F’
‘A’
‘0’
‘9’
LRC Check
END
‘A’
CR
LF
4-120
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
RTU mode:
Command message:
Response message:
Address
Function
Starting data
address
Number of data
(count by word)
Number of data
(count by byte)
The first data
content
The second data
content
CRC Check Low
CRC Check High
01H
Address
Function
Starting data address
01H
10H
05H
00H
00H’
02H
04
10H
05H
00H
00H
02H
41H
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC Check Low
13H
88H
0FH
A0H
4DH
D9H
CRC Check High
04H
3.4 Check sum
ASCII mode:
LRC (Longitudinal Redundancy Check) is calculated by summing up, module 256, the values
of the bytes from ADR1 to last data character then calculating the hexadecimal
representation of the 2’s-complement negation of the sum.
For example, reading 1 word from address 0401H of the AC drive with address 01H.
STX
‘:’
Address 1
Address 0
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘3’
‘0’
‘4’
‘0’
‘1’
‘0’
‘0’
‘0’
‘1’
Function 1
Function 0
Starting data address
Number of data
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
LRC Check 1
LRC Check 0
‘F’
‘6’
END 1
END 0
CR
LF
01H+03H+04H+01H+00H+01H=0AH, the 2’s-complement negation of 0AH is F6H.
RTU mode:
Address
Function
01H
03H
21H
02H
00H
02H
6FH
F7H
Starting data address
Number of data
(count by word)
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
CRC (Cyclical Redundancy Check) is calculated by the following steps:
Step 1: Load a 16-bit register (called CRC register) with FFFFH.
Step 2: Exclusive OR the first 8-bit byte of the command message with the low order byte of
the 16-bit CRC register, putting the result in the CRC register.
Step 3: Examine the LSB of CRC register.
Step 4: If the LSB of CRC register is 0, shift the CRC register one bit to the right with MSB
zero filling, then repeat step 3. If the LSB of CRC register is 1, shift the CRC register one bit
to the right with MSB zero filling, Exclusive OR the CRC register with the polynomial value
A001H, then repeat step 3.
Step 5: Repeat step 3 and 4 until eight shifts have been performed. When this is done, a
complete 8-bit byte will have been processed.
Step 6: Repeat step 2 to 5 for the next 8-bit byte of the command message. Continue doing
this until all bytes have been processed. The final contents of the CRC register are the CRC
value. When transmitting the CRC value in the message, the upper and lower bytes of the
CRC value must be swapped, i.e. the lower order byte will be transmitted first.
The following is an example of CRC generation using C language. The function takes two
arguments:
Unsigned char* data Å a pointer to the message buffer
Unsigned char length Å the quantity of bytes in the message buffer
The function returns the CRC value as a type of unsigned integer.
4-122
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Unsigned int crc_chk(unsigned char* data, unsigned char length){
int j;
unsigned int reg_crc=0xFFFF;
while(length--){
reg_crc ^= *data++;
for(j=0;j<8;j++){
if(reg_crc & 0x01){ /* LSB(b0)=1 */
reg_crc=(reg_crc>>1) ^ 0xA001;
}else{
reg_crc=reg_crc >>1;
}
}
}
return reg_crc;
}
3.5 Address list
The contents of available addresses are shown as below:
Content
Address
GGnnH
Function
GG means parameter group, nn means parameter number,
for example, the address of Pr 04.01 is 0401H. Refer to
chapter 5 for the function of each parameter. When reading
parameter by command code 03H, only one parameter can
be read at one time.
AC drive
Parameters
00B: No function
Command
Write only
01B: Stop
Bit 0-1
10B: Run
11B: Jog + Run
Bit 2-3
Bit 4-5
Reserved
00B: No function
01B: FWD
2000H
10B: REV
11B: Change direction
00B: Comm. forced 1st accel/decel
01B: Comm. forced 2nd accel/decel
Bit 6-7
Bit 8-15
Reserved
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Content
Address
Function
2001H Frequency command
Bit 0
Bit 1
1: EF (external fault) on
1: Reset
2002H
2100H
Bit 2-15
Error code:
Reserved
Status
monitor
0: No error occurred
Read only
1: Over-current (oc)
2: Over-voltage (ov)
3: IGBT Overheat (oH1)
4: Power Board Overheat (oH2)
5: Overload (oL)
6: Overload1 (oL1)
7: Overload2 (oL2)
8: External fault (EF)
9: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during accel (ocA)
10: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel (ocd)
Current exceeds 2 times rated current during decel (ocd)
11: Current exceeds 2 times rated current during steady state
operation (ocn)
12: Ground Fault (GFF)
13: Low voltage (Lv)
14: PHL (Phase-Loss)
2100H 15: Base Block
16: Auto accel/decel failure (cFA)
17: Software protection enabled (codE)
18: Power Board CPU WRITE failure (CF1.0)
19: Power Board CPU READ failure (CF2.0)
20: CC, OC Hardware protection failure (HPF1)
21: OV Hardware protection failure (HPF2)
22: GFF Hardware protection failure (HPF3)
23: OC Hardware protection failure (HPF4)
4-124
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Content
Address
Function
24: U-phase error (cF3.0)
25: V-phase error (cF3.1)
26: W-phase error (cF3.2)
27: DCBUS error (cF3.3)
2100H 28: IGBT Overheat (cF3.4)
29: Power Board Overheat (cF3.5)
30: Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF1.1)
31: Control Board CPU WRITE failure (cF2.1)
32: ACI signal error (AErr)
33: Reserved
34: Motor PTC overheat protection (PtC1)
Status of AC drive
2101H
00B: RUN LED is off, STOP LED is on (The AC
motor Drive stops)
01B: RUN LED blinks, STOP LED is on (When
AC motor drive decelerates to stop)
Bit 0-1
10B: RUN LED is on, STOP LED blinks (When
AC motor drive is standby)
11B: RUN LED is on, STOP LED is off (When AC
motor drive runs)
Bit 2
1: JOG command
Bit 3-4
00B: FWD LED is on, REV LED is off (When AC
motor drive runs forward)
01B: FWD LED is on, REV LED blinks (When AC
motor drive runs from reverse to forward)
10B: FWD LED blinks, REV LED is on (When AC
motor drive runs from forward to reverse)
11B: FWD LED is off, REV LED is on (When AC
motor drive runs reverse)
Bit 5-7
Bit 8
Reserved
1: Master frequency Controlled by communication
interface
Bit 9
1: Master frequency controlled by analog signal
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Content
Address
Function
1: Operation command controlled by
communication interface
Bit 10
Bit 11-15 Reserved
2102H Frequency command (F)
2103H Output frequency (H)
2104H Output current (AXXX.X)
2105H Reserved
2106H Reserved
2107H Reserved
2108H DC-BUS Voltage (UXXX.X)
2109H Output voltage (EXXX.X)
210AH
Display temperature of IGBT (°C)
2116H User defined (Low word)
2117H User defined (High word)
Note: 2116H is number display of Pr.00.04. High byte of 2117H is number of decimal places
of 2116H. Low byte of 2117H is ASCII code of alphabet display of Pr.00.04.
3.6 Exception response:
The AC motor drive is expected to return a normal response after receiving command
messages from the master device. The following depicts the conditions when no normal
response is replied to the master device.
The AC motor drive does not receive the messages due to a communication error; thus, the
AC motor drive has no response. The master device will eventually process a timeout
condition.
The AC motor drive receives the messages without a communication error, but cannot handle
them. An exception response will be returned to the master device and an error message
“CExx” will be displayed on the keypad of AC motor drive. The xx of “CExx” is a decimal code
equal to the exception code that is described below.
In the exception response, the most significant bit of the original command code is set to 1,
and an exception code which explains the condition that caused the exception is returned.
Example of an exception response of command code 06H and exception code 02H:
ASCII mode:
RTU mode:
4-126
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
STX
‘:’
‘0’
‘1’
‘8’
‘6’
‘0’
‘2’
‘7’
‘7’
CR
LF
Address
01H
86H
02H
C3H
A1H
Function
Address Low
Address High
Exception code
CRC CHK Low
CRC CHK High
Function Low
Function High
Exception code
LRC CHK Low
LRC CHK High
END 1
END 0
The explanation of exception codes:
Exception
code
Explanation
Illegal function code:
01
02
The function code received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
Illegal data address:
The data address received in the command message is not
available for the AC motor drive.
Illegal data value:
03
04
The data value received in the command message is not available
for the AC drive.
Slave device failure:
The AC motor drive is unable to perform the requested action.
Communication time-out:
If Pr.09.03 is not equal to 0.0, Pr.09.02=0~2, and there is no
communication on the bus during the Time Out detection period (set
by Pr.09.03), “cE10” will be shown on the keypad.
10
3.7 Communication program of PC:
The following is a simple example of how to write a communication program for Modbus
ASCII mode on a PC in C language.
#include<stdio.h>
#include<dos.h>
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
#include<conio.h>
#include<process.h>
#define PORT 0x03F8 /* the address of COM1 */
/* the address offset value relative to COM1 */
#define THR 0x0000
#define RDR 0x0000
#define BRDL 0x0000
#define IER 0x0001
#define BRDH 0x0001
#define LCR 0x0003
#define MCR 0x0004
#define LSR 0x0005
#define MSR 0x0006
unsigned char rdat[60];
/* read 2 data from address 2102H of AC drive with address 1 */
unsigned char tdat[60]={':','0','1','0','3','2','1','0',’2', '0','0','0','2','D','7','\r','\n'};
void main(){
int i;
outportb(PORT+MCR,0x08);
outportb(PORT+IER,0x01);
/* interrupt enable */
/* interrupt as data in */
outportb(PORT+LCR,(inportb(PORT+LCR) | 0x80));
/* the BRDL/BRDH can be access as LCR.b7==1 */
outportb(PORT+BRDL,12);
outportb(PORT+BRDH,0x00);
outportb(PORT+LCR,0x06);
/* set baudrate=9600, 12=115200/9600*/
/* set protocol, <7,N,2>=06H, <7,E,1>=1AH,
<7,O,1>=0AH, <8,N,2>=07H, <8,E,1>=1BH, <8,O,1>=0BH */
for(i=0;i<=16;i++){
while(!(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x20)); /* wait until THR empty */
outportb(PORT+THR,tdat[i]);
/* send data to THR */
}
i=0;
while(!kbhit()){
if(inportb(PORT+LSR) & 0x01){ /* b0==1, read data ready */
rdat[i++]=inportb(PORT+RDR); /* read data form RDR */
}
}
}
Reserved
09.05
4-128
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
09.06 Reserved
09.07 ꢀResponse Delay Time
Unit: 2ms
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0 ~ 200 (400msec)
This parameter is the response delay time after AC drive receives communication command
as shown in the following. 1 unit = 2 msec.
RS485 BUS
PC or PLC command
Response Message of AC Drive
Handling time Response Delay Time
of AC drive
Max.: 6msec
Pr.09.07
09.08
ꢀTransmission Speed for USB Card
Factory Setting: 2
Settings
0
Baud rate 4800 bps
Baud rate 9600 bps
Baud rate 19200 bps
Baud rate 38400 bps
Baud rate 57600 bps
1
2
3
4
This parameter is used to set the transmission speed for USB card.
09.09 ꢀCommunication Protocol for USB Card
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,N,1>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,E,2>
Modbus RTU mode, protocol <8,O,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,N,1>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,E,2>
Modbus ASCII mode, protocol <7,O,2>
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
09.10 ꢀTransmission Fault Treatment for USB Card
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
3
Warn and keep operating
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and COAST to stop
No warning and keep operating
This parameter is set to how to react when transmission errors occurs.
4-130
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
09.11 ꢀTime-out Detection for USB Card
Settings 0.0 to 120.0 sec
0.0 Disable
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
09.12 COM port for PLC Communication (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
RS485
USB card
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 10: PID Control
10.00
PID Set Point Selection
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
Disable
Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys
AVI 0 ~ +10VDC
ACI 4 ~ 20mA / AVI2 0 ~ +10VDC
PID set point (Pr.10.11)
10.01 Input Terminal for PID Feedback
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
Positive PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC).
1
2
Negative PID feedback from external terminal AVI (0 ~ +10VDC).
Positive PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/ AVI2
(0 ~ +10VDC).
3
Negative PID feedback from external terminal ACI (4 ~ 20mA)/
AVI2 (0 ~ +10VDC).
Note that the measured variable (feedback) controls the output frequency (Hz). Select input
terminal accordingly. Make sure this parameter setting does not conflict with the setting for
Pr.10.00 (Master Frequency).
When Pr.10.00 is set to 2 or 3, the set point (Master Frequency) for PID control is obtained
from the AVI or ACI/AVI2 external terminal (0 to +10V or 4-20mA) or from multi-step speed.
When Pr.10.00 is set to 1, the set point is obtained from the keypad.
Negative feedback means: +target value – feedback
Positive feedback means: -target value + feedback.
10.02 ꢀProportional Gain (P)
Settings 0.0 to 10.0
Unit: 0. 1
Factory Setting: 1.0
This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain (P). If the other two gains (I
and D) are set to zero, proportional control is the only one effective. With 10% deviation (error)
and P=1, the output will be P x10% x Master Frequency.
4-132
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
10.03 ꢀIntegral Time ( I )
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 1.00
Settings
0.00 to 100.0 sec
0.00 Disable
This parameter specifies integral control (continual sum of the deviation) and associated gain
(I). When the integral gain is set to 1 and the deviation is fixed, the output is equal to the input
(deviation) once the integral time setting is attained.
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
10.04 ꢀDerivative Control (D)
Settings 0.00 to 1.00 sec
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
This parameter specifies derivative control (rate of change of the input) and associated gain
(D). With this parameter set to 1, the PID output is equal to differential time x (present
deviation − previous deviation). It increases the response speed but it may cause over-
compensation.
NOTE
The parameter can be set during operation for easy tuning.
10.05
Upper Bound for Integral Control
Unit: 1
0 to 100 %
Settings
Factory Setting: 100
This parameter defines an upper bound or limit for the integral gain (I) and therefore limits the
Master Frequency.
The formula is: Integral upper bound = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) x (Pr.10.05).
This parameter can limit the Maximum Output Frequency.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
10.06
Unit: 0.1
Primary Delay Filter Time
Settings 0.0 to 2.5 sec
Factory Setting: 0.0
To avoid amplification of measurement noise in the controller output, a derivative digital filter is
inserted. This filter helps to dampen oscillations.
The complete PID diagram is in the following:
+
+
Integral
gain
limit
Output
Freq.
Limit
Digital
filter
+
+
Freq.
Command
P
I
Setpoint
10.02
10.03
10.06
-
10.05
10.07
D
10.04
Input Freq.
Gain
PID
feedback
10.01
10.10
10.07
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
PID Output Frequency Limit
Settings 0 to 110 %
This parameter defines the percentage of output frequency limit during the PID control. The
formula is Output Frequency Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (Pr.01.00) X Pr.10.07 %.
This parameter will limit the Maximum Output Frequency. An overall limit for the output
frequency can be set in Pr.01.07.
PID Feedback Signal Detection Time
Settings 0.0 to d 3600 sec
10.08
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 60.0
This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a
warning (see Pr.10.09) is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback
signal time.
If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal.
10.09 Treatment of the Erroneous Feedback Signals (for PID feedback error)
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
Warning and RAMP to stop
Warning and COAST to stop
Warning and keep operating
4-134
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
This function is only for ACI signal.
AC motor drive action when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback) are abnormal
according to Pr.10.16.
Gain Over the PID Detection Value
10.10
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 1.0
0.0 to 10.0
Settings
This function is only for ACI signal.
This is the gain adjustment over the feedback detection value. Refer to PID control block
diagram in Pr.10.06 for detail.
10.11 ꢀSource of PID Set point
Settings 0.00 to 600.0Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 0.00
This parameter is used in conjunction with Pr.10.00 set 4 to input a set point in Hz.
10.12 PID Offset Level
Unit: 0.1
Settings
10.13 Detection Time of PID Offset
Settings 0.1 to 300.0 sec
1.0 to 50.0%
Factory Setting: 10.0
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 5.0
This parameter is used to set detection of the offset between set point and feedback.
When the offset is higher than the setting of Pr.10.12 for a time exceeding the setting of
Pr.10.13, the AC motor drive will output a signal when Pr.03.00 ~ Pr.03.01 is set to 16.
10.14 Sleep/Wake Up Detection Time
Settings 0.0 to 6550 sec
10.15 Sleep Frequency
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
Unit: 0.01
Settings
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
Unit: 0.01
10.16 Wakeup Frequency
Settings
0.00 to 600.0 Hz
Factory Setting: 0.00
When the actual output frequency
Pr.10.15 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.10.14,
≤
the AC motor drive will be in sleep mode.
When the actual frequency command > Pr.10.16 and the time exceeds the setting of Pr.10.14,
the AC motor drive will restart.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
When the AC motor drive is in sleep mode, frequency command is still calculated by PID.
When frequency reaches wake up frequency, AC motor drive will accelerate from Pr.01.05
minimum frequency following the V/f curve.
The wake up frequency must be higher than sleep frequency.
Frequency
frequency calculated by PID
10.16
The limit of
decel. time
output
frequency
10.15
01.05
The limit of
accel. time
Time
10.14
lower bound
of frequency
Fmin
Fsleep
lower bound
of frequency
Fmin<Fsleep<
Fcmd=0
Fout = 0
When output frequency
sleep frequency and time > detection time, it will go in sleep mode.
≤
When min. output frequency ≦ PID frequency ≦ lower bound of frequency and sleep function
is enabled (output frequency sleep frequency and time > detection time), frequency will be 0
≤
(in sleep mode). If sleep function is disabled, frequency command = lower bound frequency.
When PID frequency < min. output frequency and sleep function is enabled (output frequency
sleep frequency and time > detection time), output frequency =0 (in sleep mode).
≤
If output frequency
sleep frequency but time < detection time, frequency command = lower
≤
frequency. If sleep function is disabled, output frequency =0.
4-136
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Minimum PID Output Frequency Selection
10.17
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
By PID control
By Minimum output frequency (Pr.01.05)
This is the source selection of minimum output frequency when control is by PID.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 11: Multi-function Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card
Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 11
parameters. See Appendix B for details.
11.00
11.01
11.02
11.03
11.04
11.05
Multi-function Output Terminal MO2/RA2
Multi-function Output Terminal MO3/RA3
Multi-function Output Terminal MO4/RA4
Multi-function Output Terminal MO5/RA5
Multi-function Output Terminal MO6/RA6
Multi-function Output Terminal MO7/RA7
Settings
0 to 21
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
Function
No Function
Description
0
1
AC Drive Operational
Active when the drive is ready or RUN command is “ON”.
Master Frequency
Attained
Active when the AC motor drive reaches the output
frequency setting.
2
3
4
Active when Command Frequency is lower than the
Minimum Output Frequency.
Zero Speed
Active as long as over-torque is detected. (Refer to Pr.06.03
~ Pr.06.05)
Over-Torque Detection
Active when the output of the AC motor drive is shut off
during baseblock. Base block can be forced by Multi-
function input (setting 09).
Baseblock (B.B.)
Indication
5
6
7
Low-Voltage Indication
Active when low voltage (Lv) is detected.
Operation Mode
Indication
Active when operation command is controlled by external
terminal.
Active when a fault occurs (oc, ov, oH, oL, oL1, EF, cF3,
HPF, ocA, ocd, ocn, GFF).
8
Fault Indication
4-138
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Function
Description
Desired Frequency
Attained
9
Active when the desired frequency (Pr.03.02) is attained.
Active when the counter reaches Terminal Count Value.
Active when the counter reaches Preliminary Count Value.
Terminal Count Value
Attained
10
11
Preliminary Count Value
Attained
Over Voltage Stall
supervision
12
13
Active when the Over Voltage Stall function operating
Active when the Over Current Stall function operating
Over Current Stall
supervision
When heatsink overheats, it will signal to prevent OH turn
off the drive. When it is higher than 85oC (185oF), it will be
ON.
Heat Sink Overheat
Warning
14
15
16
17
18
Over Voltage supervision Active when the DC-BUS voltage exceeds level
PID supervision
Active when the PID function is operating
Active when the direction command is FWD
Active when the direction command is REV
Forward command
Reverse command
Zero Speed Output
Signal
Active unless there is an output frequency present at
terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
19
20
21
Communication Warning
(FbE,Cexx, AoL2, AUE,
SAvE)
Active when there is a Communication Warning
Brake Control (Desired
Frequency Attained)
Active when output frequency ≥Pr.03.14. Deactivated when
output frequency ≤Pr.03.15 after STOP command.
11.06
11.07
11.08
11.09
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI7)
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI8)
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI9)
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI10)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
11.10
11.11
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI11)
Multi-function Input Terminal (MI12)
Settings 0 to 23
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
Function
Description
Any unused terminals should be programmed to 0 to insure they
have no effect on operation.
0
No Function
Multi-Step Speed
Command 1
1
2
These four inputs select the multi-speed defined by Pr.05.00 to
Pr.05.14 as shown in the diagram at the end of the table in
Pr.04.08.
Multi-Step Speed
Command 2
NOTE: Pr.05.00 to Pr.05.14 can also be used to control output
speed by programming the AC motor drive’s internal PLC
function. There are 17 step speed frequencies (including
Master Frequency and Jog Frequency) to select for
application.
Multi-Step Speed
Command 3
3
4
Multi-Step Speed
Command 4
The External Reset has the same function as the Reset key on
the Digital keypad. After faults such as O.H., O.C. and O.V. are
cleared this input can be used to reset the drive.
5
6
7
External Reset
When the command is active, acceleration and deceleration is
stopped and the AC motor drive maintains a constant speed.
Accel/Decel Inhibit
Accel/Decel Time
Selection
Used to select the one of 2 Accel/Decel Times (Pr.01.09 to
Pr.01.12). See explanation at the end of this table.
Command
Parameter value 08 programs one of the Multi-function Input
Terminals MI7 ∼ MI12 (Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11) for Jog control.
Jog Operation
Control
8
NOTE: Programming for Jog operation by 08 can only be
done while the motor is stopped. (Refer to parameter
Pr.01.13~Pr.01.15)
4-140
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Function
Description
Parameter value 09 programs a Multi-function Input Terminals for
external Base Block control.
External Base
Block
NOTE: When a Base-Block signal is received, the AC motor
drive will block all output and the motor will free run. When
9
(Refer to Pr.08.06) base block control is deactivated, the AC drive will start its
speed search function and synchronize with the motor
speed, and then accelerate to Master Frequency.
Increase/decrease the Master Frequency each time an input is
received or continuously when the input stays active. When both
inputs are active at the same time, the Master Frequency
increase/decrease is halted. Please refer to Pr.02.07, 02.08. This
function is also called “motor potentiometer”.
UP: Increase
10
11
Master Frequency
DOWN: Decrease
Master Frequency
Parameter value 12 programs one of the Multi-function Input
Terminals MI7 ∼ MI12 (Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11) to increment the AC
drive’s internal counter. When an input is received, the counter is
incremented by 1.
12
Counter Trigger
When active, the counter is reset and inhibited. To enable
counting the input should be OFF. Refer to Pr.03.05 and 03.06.
13
14
15
Counter Reset
External Fault
Parameter value 14 programs one of the Multi-function Input
Terminals MI7 ∼ MI12 (Pr.11.06~Pr.11.11) to be External Fault
(E.F.) inputs.
PID function
disabled
When an input ON with this setting is ON, the PID function will be
disabled.
AC motor drive will stop output and the motor free run if one of
16
17
Output Shutoff Stop these settings is enabled. If the status of terminal is changed, AC
motor drive will restart from 0Hz.
Parameter lock
enable
When this setting is enabled, all parameters will be locked and
write parameters is disabled.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Function
Description
Operation
ON: Operation command via Ext. Terminals
OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting
Command
18
Selection (Pr.02.01
setting/external
terminals)
Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 18 is set. See the
explanation below this table.
Operation
ON: Operation command via Digital Keypad
OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting
Command
19
20
Selection (Pr 02.01
setting/Digital
Keypad)
Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 19 is set. See the
explanation below this table.
Operation
ON: Operation command via Communication
OFF: Operation command via Pr.02.01 setting
Command
Selection (Pr 02.01
setting/
Pr.02.01 is disabled if this parameter value 20 is set. See the
explanation below this table.
Communication)
This function has top priority to set the direction for running (If
“Pr.02.04=0”)
21
22
Forward/Reverse
Used to select the first/second frequency command source. Refer
to Pr.02.00 and 02.09.
Source of second
frequency
ON: 2nd Frequency command source
OFF: 1st Frequency command source
command enabled
ON: Run PLC Program
OFF: Stop PLC Program
When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is
enabled, it will display PLC1 in the PLC page and execute PLC
program. When this function is disabled, it will display PLC0 in the
PLC page and stop executing PLC program. The motor will be
stopped by Pr.02.02.
Run/Stop PLC
Program
23
When operation command source is external terminal, the keypad
cannot be used to change PLC status. And this function will be
invalid when AC Motor drive is in PLC2 status.
4-142
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Settings
Function
Description
When AC motor drive is in STOP mode and this function is
enabled, it will display PLC2 in the PLC page and you can
download/execute/monitor PLC. When this function is disabled, it
will display PLC0 in the PLC page and stop executing PLC
program. The motor will be stopped by Pr.02.02.
Download/Execute/
Monitor PLC
24
Program (PLC2)
When operation command source is external terminal, the keypad
cannot be used to change PLC status. And this function will be
invalid when the AC Motor drive is in PLC1 status.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 12: Analog Input/Output Parameters for Extension Card
Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12
parameters. See Appendix B for details.
AI1 Function Selection
12.00
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
5
Disabled
Source of the 1st frequency
Source of the 2nd frequency
PID Set Point (PID enable)
Positive PID feedback
Negative PID feedback
AI1 Analog Signal Mode
12.01
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0
1
ACI2 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA)
AVI3 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V)
Besides parameters settings, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch.
AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2
ACI2 ACI3 ACO1 ACO2
12.02 Min. AVI3 Input Voltage
Settings 0.0 to 10.0V
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
12.03 Min. AVI3 Scale Percentage
Settings 0.0 to 100.0%
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
12.04 Max. AVI3 Input Voltage
Settings 0.0 to 10.0V
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10.0
4-144
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
12.05 Max. AVI3 Scale Percentage
Settings 0.0 to 100.0%
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 100.0
12.06 Min. ACI2 Input Current
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.0 to 20.0mA
Factory Setting: 4.0
12.07 Min. ACI2 Scale Percentage
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 0.0
12.08 Max. ACI2 Input Current
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.0 to 20.0mA
Factory Setting: 20.0
12.09 Max. ACI2 Scale Percentage
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 100.0
AI2 Function Selection
12.10
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
3
4
5
Disabled
Source of the 1st frequency
Source of the 2nd frequency
PID Set Point (PID enable)
Positive PID feedback
Negative PID feedback
AI2 Analog Signal Mode
12.11
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0
1
ACI3 analog current (0.0 ~ 20.0mA)
AVI4 analog voltage (0.0 ~ 10.0V)
Besides parameters settings, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2
ACI2 ACI3 ACO1 ACO2
12.12 Min. AVI4 Input Voltage
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.0 to 10.0V
Factory Setting: 0.0
12.13 Min. AVI4 Scale Percentage
Settings 0.0 to 100.0%
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 0.0
12.14 Max. AVI4 Input Voltage
Settings 0.0 to 10.0V
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 10.0
12.15 Max. AVI4 Scale Percentage
Settings 0.0 to 100.0%
Unit: 0.1
Factory Setting: 100.0
12.16 Min. ACI3 Input Current
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.0 to 20.0mA
Factory Setting: 4.0
12.17 Min. ACI3 Scale Percentage
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 0.0
12.18 Max. ACI3 Input Current
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.0 to 20.0mA
Factory Setting: 20.0
12.19 Max. ACI3 Scale Percentage
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Setting: 100.0
4-146
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
AO1 Terminal Analog Signal Mode
12.20
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
AVO1
ACO1 (analog current 0.0 to 20.0mA)
ACO1 (analog current 4.0 to 20.0mA)
Besides parameter setting, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch.
AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2
ACI2 ACI3 ACO1 ACO2
AO1 Analog Output Signal
12.21
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Analog Frequency
Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current)
This parameter is used to choose analog frequency (0-+10Vdc) or analog current (4-20mA) to
correspond to the AC motor drive’s output frequency or current.
12.22 AO1 Analog Output Gain
Settings 1 to 200%
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
This parameter is used to set the analog output voltage range.
When Pr.12.21 is set to 0, analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive’s output
frequency. When Pr.12.22 is set to 100, the max. output frequency (Pr.01.00) setting
corresponds to the AFM output (+10VDC or 20mA)
When Pr.12.21 is set to 1, analog output voltage corresponds to the AC motor drive’s output
current. When Pr.12.22 is set to 100, the 2.5 X rated current corresponds to the AFM output
(+10VDC or 20mA)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
NOTE
If the scale of the voltmeter is less than 10V, refer to following formula to set Pr.12.22:
Pr.12.22 = [(full scale voltage)/10]*100%.
Example: When using voltmeter with full scale (5V), Pr.12.22 should be set to 5/10*100%=50%. If
Pr.12.21 is set to 0, the output voltage will correspond to the max. output frequency.
AO2Terminal Analog Signal Mode
12.23
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
AVO2
ACO2 (analog current 0.0 to 20.0mA)
ACO2 (analog current 4.0 to 20.0mA)
Besides parameter setting, the voltage/current mode should be used with the switch.
AVI3 AVI4 AVO1 AVO2
ACI2 ACI3 ACO1 ACO2
AO2 Analog Output Signal
12.24
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
Analog Frequency
Analog Current (0 to 250% rated current)
12.25 AO2 Analog Output Gain
Settings 1 to 200%
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 100
Setting method for the AO2 is the same as the AO1.
4-148
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Group 13: PG function Parameters for Extension Card
Make sure that the extension card is installed on the AC motor drive correctly before using group 12
parameters. See Appendix B for details.
13.00 PG Input
Factory Setting: 0
Settings
0
1
2
3
Disable PG
Single phase
Forward/Counterclockwise rotation
Reverse/Clockwise rotation
The relationship between the motor rotation and PG input is illustrated below:
A phase leads B phase
A phase
FWD
CCW
B phase
13.00=2
B phase leads A phase
A phase
REV
CW
CW
B phase
13.00=3
A phase
B phase
PULSE
GENERATOR
PG
13.01 PG Pulse Range
Unit: 1
Settings
1 to 20000
Factory Setting: 600
A Pulse Generator (PG) is used as a sensor that provides a feedback signal of the motor
speed. This parameter defines the number of pulses for each cycle of the PG control.
13.02 Motor Pole Number (Motor 0)
Settings 2 to 10
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 4
The pole number should be even (can’t be odd).
13.03 ꢀProportional Gain (P)
Unit: 0.01
Settings
0.0 to 10.0
Factory Setting: 1.0
This parameter specifies proportional control and associated gain (P), and is used for speed
control with PG feedback.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
13.04 ꢀIntegral Gain ( I )
Unit: 0.01
Settings
0.00 to 100.00 sec
0.00 Disable
Factory Setting: 1.00
This parameter specifies integral control and associated gain (I), and is used for speed control
with PG feedback.
13.05 ꢀSpeed Control Output Frequency Limit
Settings 0.00 to 100.00Hz
Unit: 0.01
Factory Setting: 10.00
This parameter limits the amount of correction by the PI control on the output frequency when
controlling speed via PG feedback. It can limit the maximum output frequency.
output frequency
Frequency
command
+
Output
Frequency
Limit
+
-
+
Speed
detection
P
13.03
13.05
+
I
13.04
13.06 ꢀSpeed Feedback Display Filter
Settings 0 to 9999 (*2ms)
Unit: 1
Factory Setting: 500
When Pr.0.04 is set to 14, its display will be updated regularly. This update time is set by
Pr.13.06.
13.09 ꢀSpeed Feedback Filter
Unit: 1
Settings
0 to 9999 (*2ms)
Factory Setting: 16
This parameter is the filter time from the speed feedback to the PG card.
13.07 ꢀTime for Feedback Signal Fault
Unit: 0.1
Settings
0.1 to 10.0 sec
0.0 Disabled
Factory Setting: 1.0
This parameter defines the time during which the PID feedback must be abnormal before a
warning (see Pr.13.08) is given. It also can be modified according to the system feedback
signal time.
If this parameter is set to 0.0, the system would not detect any abnormality signal.
4-150
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
13.08 ꢀTreatment of the Feedback Signal Fault
Factory Setting: 1
Settings
0
1
2
Warn and RAMP to stop
Warn and COAST to stop
Warn and keep operating
AC motor drive action when the feedback signals (analog PID feedback or PG (encoder)
feedback) are abnormal.
13.10 Source of the High-speed Counter (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Factory Setting: Read only
Settings
0
1
PG card
PLC
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
4.4 Different Parameters for VFD*E*C Models
Software version for VFD*E*C is V1.00 for power board and V2.00 for control board.
ꢀ: The parameter can be set during operation.
Group 0 User Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
0: Parameter can be read/written
1: All parameters are read only
6: Clear PLC program (NOT for VFD*E*C
models)
00.02
Parameter Reset
0
9: All parameters are reset to factory settings
(50Hz, 230V/400V or 220V/380V depends on
Pr.00.12)
10: All parameters are reset to factory
settings (60Hz, 220V/440V)
0: Display the frequency command value
(Fxxx)
1: Display the actual output frequency (Hxxx)
2: Display the content of user-defined unit
(Uxxx)
Start-up Display
Selection
ꢀ00.03
0
0
3: Multifunction display, see Pr.00.04
4: FWD/REV command
5: PLCx (PLC selections: PLC0/PLC1/PLC2)
(NOT for VFD*E*C models)
Content of Multi-
function Display
0: Display the content of user-defined unit
(Uxxx)
ꢀ00.04
1: Display the counter value (c)
2: Display PLC D1043 value (C) (NOT for
VFD*E*C models)
3: Display DC-BUS voltage (u)
4: Display output voltage (E)
5: Display PID analog feedback signal value
(b) (%)
6: Output power factor angle (n)
7: Display output power (P)
4-152
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
8: Display the estimated value of torque as it
relates to current (t)
9: Display AVI (I) (V)
10: Display ACI / AVI2 (i) (mA/V)
11: Display the temperature of IGBT (h) (°C)
12: Display AVI3/ACI2 level (I.)
13: Display AVI4/ACI3 level (i.)
14: Display PG speed in RPM (G)
15: Display motor number (M)
Group 1 Basic Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
ꢀ01.11
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Accel Time 2
Decel Time 2
0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
0.1 to 600.0 / 0.01 to 600.0 sec
1.0
1.0
ꢀ01.12
Group 2 Operation Method Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-
function Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used
frequency saved.
Source of First
Master Frequency
Command
1: 0 to +10V from AVI
ꢀ02.00
5
5
2: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from
AVI2
3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication
4: Digital keypad potentiometer
5: CANopen communication
ꢀ02.01
Source of First
Operation
Command
0: Digital keypad
1: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET
enabled.
2: External terminals. Keypad STOP/RESET
disabled.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication.
Keypad STOP/RESET enabled.
4: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication.
Keypad STOP/RESET disabled.
5: CANopen communication. Keypad
STOP/RESET disabled.
0: Digital keypad UP/DOWN keys or Multi-
function Inputs UP/DOWN. Last used
frequency saved.
1: 0 to +10V from AVI
Source of Second
Frequency
Command
2: 4 to 20mA from ACI or 0 to +10V from
AVI2
ꢀ02.09
0
3: RS-485 (RJ-45)/USB communication
4: Digital keypad potentiometer
5: CANopen communication
Read Only
Bit0=1: by First Freq Source (Pr.02.00)
Bit1=1: by Second Freq Source (Pr.02.09)
Bit2=1: by Multi-input function
Display the Master
Freq Command
Source
02.16
02.17
##
##
Bit3=1: by PLC Freq command (NOT for
VFD*E*C models)
Read Only
Bit0=1: by Digital Keypad
Display the
Operation
Command Source
Bit1=1: by RS485 communication
Bit2=1: by External Terminal 2/3 wire mode
Bit3=1: by Multi-input function
Bit5=1: by CANopen communication
Group 3 Output Function Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
03.09
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Customer
Reserved
Reserved
03.10
Group 4 Input Function Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
04.05
Multi-function Input 0: No function
Terminal (MI3)
1
1: Multi-Step speed command 1
4-154
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
2: Multi-Step speed command 2
04.06
Multi-function Input 3: Multi-Step speed command 3
2
3
Terminal (MI4)
4: Multi-Step speed command 4
5: External reset
04.07
04.08
Multi-function Input 6: Accel/Decel inhibit
Terminal (MI5)
7: Accel/Decel time selection command
8: Jog Operation
Multi-function Input 9: External base block
23
Terminal (MI6)
10: Up: Increment master frequency
11: Down: Decrement master frequency
12: Counter Trigger Signal
13: Counter reset
14: E.F. External Fault Input
15: PID function disabled
16: Output shutoff stop
17: Parameter lock enable
18: Operation command selection (external
terminals)
19: Operation command selection(keypad)
20: Operation command selection
(communication)
21: FWD/REV command
22: Source of second frequency command
23: Quick Stop (Only for VFD*E*C models)
24: Download/execute/monitor PLC Program
(PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
25: Simple position function
26: OOB (Out of Balance Detection)
27: Motor selection (bit 0)
28: Motor selection (bit 1)
04.24
Reserved
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Reserved
Settings
Customer
04.25
Group 7 Motor Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Torque
Settings
Customer
07.08
Compensation Time 0.01 ~10.00 Sec
Constant
0.30
Group 9 Communication Parameters
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Reserved
Settings
Customer
09.12
CANopen
0: disable
09.13
Communication
Address
1
1: 1 to 127
0: 1M
1: 500K
2: 250K
3: 125K
4: 100K
5: 50K
09.14
09.15
CANbus Baud Rate
0
0.00~2.00
Gain of CANbus
Frequency
1.00
bit 0 : CANopen Guarding Time out
bit 1 : CANopen Heartbeat Time out
bit 2 : CANopen SYNC Time out
bit 3 : CANopen SDO Time out
bit 4 : CANopen SDO buffer overflow
bit 5 : CANbus Off
Read-
only
09.16
CANbus Warning
bit 6 : Error protocol of CANopen
bit 7 : CANopen boot up fault
Group 11 Parameters for Extension Card
4-156
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
Customer
Setting
0: No function
0
0
0
Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI7)
11.06
1: Multi-Step speed command 1
2: Multi-Step speed command 2
3: Multi-Step speed command 3
4: Multi-Step speed command 4
5: External reset
Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI8)
11.07
11.08
11.09
6: Accel/Decel inhibit
Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI9)
7: Accel/Decel time selection command
8: Jog Operation
9: External base block
0
0
Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI10)
10: Up: Increment master frequency
11: Down: Decrement master frequency
12: Counter Trigger Signal
13: Counter reset
Multi-function Input
Terminal (MI11)
11.10
11.11
14: E.F. External Fault Input
15: PID function disabled
Multi-function Input 16: Output shutoff stop
0
Terminal (MI12)
17: Parameter lock enable
18: Operation command selection (external
terminals)
19: Operation command selection (keypad)
20: Operation command selection
(communication)
21: FWD/REV command
22: Source of second frequency command
23: Quick Stop (Only for VFD*E*C models)
24: Download/execute/monitor PLC Program
(PLC2) (NOT for VFD*E*C models)
25: Simple position function
26: OOB (Out of Balance Detection)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
4-157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4 Parameters|
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Settings
27: Motor selection (bit 0)
28: Motor selection (bit 1)
Customer
Group 13: PG function Parameters for Extension Card
Factory
Setting
Parameter
Explanation
Reserved
Settings
Customer
13.10
4-158
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Over Current (OC)
ocd
OC
ocA
Over-current
Over current
Over-current
during acceleration
during deceleration
Yes
Remove short circuit
or ground fault
Check if there is any short circuits and
grounding between the U, V, W and motor
No
No
No
No
Reduce the load or
increase the power
Yes
Check if load is too large
No
of AC motor drive
No
Reduce torque
compensation
No
No
Suitable torque
compensation
Yes
Yes
Reduce torque
compensation
Check if
Check if
No
No
deceleration time
is too short by
load inertia.
acceleration time
is too short by
load inertia.
Yes
Yes
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or error
due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.
Has load changed
suddenly?
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Can acceleration
Can deceleration
time be made longer?
time be made longer?
No
No
Reduce load or increase
the power of AC motor
drive
Increase accel/decel
time
Reduce load or increase
the power of AC motor
drive
Check braking
method. Please
contact DELTA
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.2 Ground Fault
Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please
Is output circuit(cable or
motor) of AC motor drive
grounded?
No
GFF
Ground fault
contact DELTA.
Yes
Remove ground fault
5.3 Over Voltage (OV)
Over voltage
No
Is voltage within
specification
Reduce voltage to
be within spec.
Yes
Yes
Has over-voltage occurred without load
No
Maybe AC motor drive
has malfunction or
misoperation due to
noise. Please contact
DELTA.
When OV occurs, check if the
voltage of DC BUS is greater
than protection value
No
Yes
Yes
Increase
deceleration
time
No Dose OV occur when
sudden acceleration
stops
Yes
No
Yes
Increase
acceleration
time
Yes
Increase setting time
No
Need to consider using
brake unit or
DC brake
No
Reduce moment
of inertia
Reduce moment of load inertia
No
No
Use brake unit or DC brake
Yes
Need to check control method. Please contact DELTA.
5-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.4 Low Voltage (Lv)
Low voltage
Yes
Is input power correct? Or power cut,
including momentary power loss
Restart after reset
No
Check if there is any malfunction
Yes
Change defective component
and check connection
component or disconnection in
power supply circuit
No
Make necessary corrections,
such as change power supply
system for requirement
No
Check if voltage is
within specification
Yes
Check if there is heavy load
with high start current in the
same power system
Using the different power
supply for this drive and
heavy load system
Yes
No
No
Check if Lv occurs when
breaker and magnetic
contactor is ON
Yes
Suitable power
transformer capacity
No
Yes
Check if voltage between +/B1
and - is greater than
200VDC (for 115V/230V models)
400VDC (for 460V models)
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
Yes
Control circuit has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Please
contact DELTA.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.5 Over Heat (OH)
AC motor drive overheats
Heat sink overheats
No
Check if temperature of heat sink
is greater than 90OC
Temperature detection malfunctions.
Please contact DELTA.
Yes
Yes
Is load too large
Reduce load
No
No
If cooling fan functions normally
Yes
Change cooling fan
Remove obstruction
Yes
Check if cooling fan is jammed
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or
misoperation due to noise. Please contact
DELTA.
No
Check if surrounding temperature
is within specification
Yes
Adjust surrounding temperature
to specification
5.6 Overload
OL
OL1/ OL2
No
Check for correct settings at
Pr. 06-06 and 06-07
Modify setting
Yes
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction
or misoperation due to noise.
No
Is load too large
Yes
Reduce load or increase the power of AC motor drive
5-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.7 Keypad Display is Abnormal
Abnormal display or no display
Yes
Cycle power to AC motor drive
Fix connector and eliminate noise
No
No
Check if all connectors are connect
correctly and no noise is present
Display normal?
Yes
Yes
AC motor drive works normally
AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
5.8 Phase Loss (PHL)
Phase loss
No
Check wiring at R, S and T terminals
Yes
Correct wiring
No
Tighten all screws
Check if the screws of terminals are tightened
Yes
Yes
Please check the wiring
and power system for
abnormal power
Check if the input voltage of R, S, T is unbalanced
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.9 Motor cannot Run
Check
KPE-LE02 for
normal display
Check if non-fuse
breaker and magnetic
contactor are ON
No
No
Set them to ON
Motor cannot run
Yes
Yes
Yes
Reset after clearing
fault and then RUN
Check if any faults
occur, such as
Lv, PHL or
Check if there is any
fault code displayed
No
Check if input
voltage is normal
disconnection
No
Yes
It can run when
no faults occur
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Input "RUN"
command
by keypad
No
Yes
Press RUN key to
check if it can run
Press UP key to
set frequency
Check if the wiring
Yes
No
No
Check if input FWD
or REV command
of terminal FWD
Yes
Press UP to
check if motor
Change switch or relay
and between
REV-DCM is correct
No
Yes
can run
No
No
No
Set frequency or not
Yes
Correct connection
Modify frequency
setting
No
if upper bound freq.
and setting freq. is
lower than the min.
output freq.
Check if the parameter
setting and wiring of
analog signal and
multi-step speed
are correct
Change defective
potentiometer and
relay
Yes
No
Motor has malfunction
Check if there is any
output voltage from
terminals U, V and W
No
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction.
Please contact DELTA.
No
If load is too large
Yes
Yes
Yes
Check if motor
connection
is correct
Connect correctly
Check if the setting
of torque
Yes
compensation
is correct
Motor is locked due to large load, please reduce load.
For example, if there is a brake, check if it is released.
No
Increase the setting of
torque compensation
5-6
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.10 Motor Speed cannot be Changed
For VFD*E*C models, no PLC function is supported. Please follow the dashed line to skip the PLC
parts.
Motor can run but
cannot change speed
Check if the setting of the
max. frequency is too low
Yes
Modify the setting
Yes
No
If the execution
time is too long
Check to see if frequency is
out of range (upper/lower)
boundaries
Yes
Modify the setting
Yes
Yes
No
No
Press UP/DOWN key
to see if speed has
any change
If finished with
executing PLC
program
Yes
Yes
No
If the PLC program
is executed
Yes
No
If there is any change
of the signal that sets
frequency (0-10V and
4-20mA)
Yes
Check if the PLC
program is correct
No
No
Check if the wiring between
MI1~MI6 to DCM is correct
No
Check if the wiring of
external terminal is correct
No
Yes
Correct
wiring
Yes
Check if frequency for
each step is different
Change defective
potentiometer
No
Yes
Change frequencysetting
No
Check if accel./decel.
time is set correctly
Yes
Please set suitable
accel./decel. time by
load inertia
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.11 Motor Stalls during Acceleration
Yes
Check if acceleration
time is too short
Motor stalls during
acceleration
Increase setting time
Yes
No
Check if the inertia
of the motor and load
is too high
Yes
Use special motor?
No
No
Thicken or shorten the
wiring between the
motor or AC motor drive
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive
Check for low voltage
at input
Yes
No
Reduce load or
increase the capacity
of AC motor drive
Yes
Check if the load torque
is too high
No
Maybe AC motor drive has
malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact
DELTA
Check if the torque
compensation is suitable
Yes
No
Increase torque compensation
5.12 The Motor does not Run as Expected
Check Pr. 01-01 thru Pr. 01-06
Motor does not run
as expected
No
Adjust Pr.01-01 to Pr.01-06
and lower torque compensation
and torque compensation
settings
Yes
Yes
Please use specific motor
Run in low speed continuously
No
Yes
Reduce load or increase the
capacity of AC motor drive
Is load too large
No
Yes
Check if output voltage of U, V, W
is balanced
Motor has malfunction
No
Maybe AC motor drive has malfunction or misoperation
due to noise. Please contact DELTA.
5-8
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
5.13 Electromagnetic/Induction Noise
Many sources of noise surround AC motor drives and penetrate it by radiation or conduction. It may
cause malfunctioning of the control circuits and even damage the AC motor drive. Of course, there
are solutions to increase the noise tolerance of an AC motor drive. But this has its limits. Therefore,
solving it from the outside as follows will be the best.
1.
2.
Add surge suppressor on the relays and contacts to suppress switching surges.
Shorten the wiring length of the control circuit or serial communication and keep them
separated from the power circuit wiring.
3.
4.
Comply with the wiring regulations by using shielded wires and isolation amplifiers for
long length.
The grounding terminal should comply with the local regulations and be grounded
independently, i.e. not to have common ground with electric welding machines and other
power equipment.
5.
Connect a noise filter at the mains input terminal of the AC motor drive to filter noise from
the power circuit.
In short, solutions for electromagnetic noise exist of “no product”(disconnect disturbing equipment),
“no spread”(limit emission for disturbing equipment) and “no receive”(enhance immunity).
5.14 Environmental Condition
Since the AC motor drive is an electronic device, you should comply with the environmental
conditions. Here are some remedial measures if necessary.
1.
To prevent vibration, the use of anti-vibration dampers is the last choice. Vibrations must
be within the specification. Vibration causes mechanical stress and it should not occur
frequently, continuously or repeatedly to prevent damage to the AC motor drive.
Store the AC motor drive in a clean and dry location, free from corrosive fumes/dust to
prevent corrosion and poor contacts. Poor insulation in a humid location can cause short-
circuits. If necessary, install the AC motor drive in a dust-proof and painted enclosure and
in particular situations, use a completely sealed enclosure.
2.
3.
The ambient temperature should be within the specification. Too high or too low
temperature will affect the lifetime and reliability. For semiconductor components, damage
will occur once any specification is out of range. Therefore, it is necessary to periodically
check air quality and the cooling fan and provide extra cooling of necessary. In addition,
the microcomputer may not work in extremely low temperatures, making cabinet heating
necessary.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting|
4.
Store within a relative humidity range of 0% to 90% and non-condensing environment.
Use an air conditioner and/or exsiccator.
5.15 Affecting Other Machines
An AC motor drive may affect the operation of other machines due to many reasons. Some solutions
are:
„
High Harmonics at Power Side
High harmonics at power side during running can be improved by:
Separate the power system: use a transformer for AC motor drive.
1.
2.
3.
Use a reactor at the power input terminal of the AC motor drive.
If phase lead capacitors are used (never on the AC motor drive output!!), use serial
reactors to prevent damage to the capacitors damage from high harmonics.
serial reactor
phase lead capacitor
„
Motor Temperature Rises
When the motor is a standard induction motor with fan, the cooling will be bad at low speeds,
causing the motor to overheat. Besides, high harmonics at the output increases copper and
core losses. The following measures should be used depending on load and operation
range.
1.
Use a motor with independent ventilation (forced external cooling) or increase the motor
rated power.
2.
3.
Use a special inverter duty motor.
Do NOT run at low speeds for long time.
5-10
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance
6.1 Fault Code Information
The AC motor drive has a comprehensive fault diagnostic system that includes several different
alarms and fault messages. Once a fault is detected, the corresponding protective functions will be
activated. The following faults are displayed as shown on the AC motor drive digital keypad display.
The five most recent faults can be read from the digital keypad or communication.
NOTE
Wait 5 seconds after a fault has been cleared before performing reset via keypad of input terminal.
6.1.1 Common Problems and Solutions
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
1.
2.
3.
Check if motor power corresponds with the
AC motor drive output power.
Check the wiring connections to U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3 for possible short circuits.
Check the wiring connections between the AC
motor drive and motor for possible short
circuits, also to ground.
4.
Check for loose contacts between AC motor
drive and motor.
Increase the Acceleration Time.
Check for possible excessive loading
conditions at the motor.
Over current
Abnormal increase in current.
5.
6.
7.
If there are still any abnormal conditions when
operating the AC motor drive after a short-
circuit is removed and the other points above
are checked, it should be sent back to
manufacturer.
1.
Check if the input voltage falls within the
rated AC motor drive input voltage range.
Check for possible voltage transients.
DC-bus over-voltage may also be caused by
motor regeneration. Either increase the
Decel. Time or add an optional brake resistor
(and brake unit).
2.
3.
Over voltage
The DC bus voltage has
exceeded its maximum
allowable value.
4.
Check whether the required brake power is
within the specified limits.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
6-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Fault
Fault Descriptions
Name
Corrective Actions
1.
2.
Ensure that the ambient temperature falls
within the specified temperature range.
Make sure that the ventilation holes are not
obstructed.
Overheating
Heat sink temperature too high
3.
Remove any foreign objects from the
heatsinks and check for possible dirty heat
sink fins.
4.
5.
Check the fan and clean it.
Provide enough spacing for adequate
ventilation. (See chapter 1)
Low voltage
1. Check whether the input voltage falls within
the AC motor drive rated input voltage range.
2. Check for abnormal load in motor.
3. Check for correct wiring of input power to R-S-
T (for 3-phase models) without phase loss.
The AC motor drive detects
that the DC bus voltage has
fallen below its minimum
value.
Overload
The AC motor drive detects
excessive drive output current.
NOTE: The AC motor drive
can withstand up to 150% of
the rated current for a
maximum of 60 seconds.
1. Check whether the motor is overloaded.
2. Reduce torque compensation setting in
Pr.07.02.
3. Use the next higher power AC motor drive
model.
1. Check for possible motor overload.
2. Check electronic thermal overload setting.
3. Use a higher power motor.
Overload 1
Internal electronic overload trip
4. Reduce the current level so that the drive
output current does not exceed the value set
by the Motor Rated Current Pr.07.00.
1. Reduce the motor load.
2. Adjust the over-torque detection setting to an
appropriate setting (Pr.06.03 to Pr.06.05).
Overload 2
Motor overload.
CC (current clamp)
OV hardware error
Return to the factory.
GFF hardware error
OC hardware error
1.
When the external input terminal (B.B) is
active, the AC motor drive output will be turned
off.
External Base Block.
(Refer to Pr. 08.07)
2.
Deactivate the external input terminal (B.B) to
operate the AC motor drive again.
6-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions
Corrective Actions
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output lines.
2. Torque boost too high: Decrease the torque
compensation setting in Pr.07.02.
3. Acceleration Time too short: Increase the
Acceleration Time.
Over-current during
acceleration
4. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output line.
2. Deceleration Time too short: Increase the
Deceleration Time.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
Over-current during
deceleration
1. Short-circuit at motor output: Check for
possible poor insulation at the output line.
2. Sudden increase in motor loading: Check for
possible motor stall.
3. AC motor drive output power is too small:
Replace the AC motor drive with the next
higher power model.
Over-current during
constant speed operation
1. When multi-function input terminals (MI3-MI9)
are set to external fault, the AC motor drive
stops output U, V and W.
External Fault
2. Give RESET command after fault has been
cleared.
Internal EEPROM can not be
programmed.
Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM can not be
programmed.
Return to the factory.
1. Press RESET key to set all parameters to
factory setting.
2. Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM can not be
read.
1. Press RESET key to set all parameters to
factory setting.
2. Return to the factory.
Internal EEPROM can not be
read.
U-phase error
V-phase error
W-phase error
OV or LV
Return to the factory.
Temperature sensor error
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Fault
Fault Descriptions
Name
Corrective Actions
When (one of) the output terminal(s) is grounded,
short circuit current is more than 50% of AC motor
drive rated current, the AC motor drive power
module may be damaged.
NOTE: The short circuit protection is provided
for AC motor drive protection, not for
protection of the user.
Ground fault
1. Check whether the IGBT power module is
damaged.
2. Check for possible poor insulation at the
output line.
1. Check if the motor is suitable for operation by
AC motor drive.
Auto accel/decel failure
Communication Error
2. Check if the regenerative energy is too large.
3. Load may have changed suddenly.
1. Check the RS485 connection between the AC
motor drive and RS485 master for loose wires
and wiring to correct pins.
2. Check if the communication protocol, address,
transmission speed, etc. are properly set.
3. Use the correct checksum calculation.
4. Please refer to group 9 in the chapter 5 for
detail information.
Software protection failure
Analog signal error
Return to the factory.
Check the wiring of ACI
1. Check parameter settings (Pr.10.01) and
AVI/ACI wiring.
PID feedback signal error
2. Check for possible fault between system
response time and the PID feedback signal
detection time (Pr.10.08)
Phase Loss
Check input phase wiring for loose contacts.
1.
2.
Check cabling between drive and motor
Retry again
Auto Tuning Error
Communication time-out
error on the control board
or power board
1. Press RESET key to set all parameters to
factory setting.
2. Return to the factory.
1. Check if the motor is overheat
2. Check Pr.07.12 to Pr.07.17 settings
Motor overheat protection
1. Check the wiring of PG card
2. Try another PG card
PG signal error
Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus
CANopen Guarding Time out
（
）
Only for VFDxxxExxC
6-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Corrective Actions
Fault
Name
Fault Descriptions
Connect to CAN bus again and reset CAN bus
CANopen Heartbeat Time out
（
）
Only for VFDxxxExxC
Check if CANopen synchronous message is
abnormal
CANopen SYNC Time out
（
）
Only for VFDxxxExxC
Check if command channels are full
CANopen SDO Time out
（
）
Only for VFDxxxExxC
1.
2.
Too short time between commands, please
check SDO message sent from the master
Reset CAN bus
CANopen SDO buffer
（
overflow Only for
）
VFDxxxExxC
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
Check if it connects to terminal resistor
Check if the signal is abnormal
Check if the master is connected
Check if the master is connected
Reset CAN bus
（
CAN bus off Only for
）
VFDxxxExxC
（
CAN Boot up fault Only for
）
VFDxxxExxC
Check if the communication protocol is correct
Error communication protocol
（
of CANopen Only for
）
VFDxxxExxC
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
6.1.2 Reset
There are three methods to reset the AC motor drive after solving the fault:
1.
2.
Press
key on keypad.
Set external terminal to “RESET” (set one of Pr.04.05~Pr.04.08 to 05) and then set to be
ON.
3.
Send “RESET” command by communication.
NOTE
Make sure that RUN command or signal is OFF before executing RESET to prevent damage or
personal injury due to immediate operation.
6.2 Maintenance and Inspections
Modern AC motor drives are based on solid-state electronics technology. Preventive maintenance is
required to keep the AC motor drive in its optimal condition, and to ensure a long life. It is
recommended to have a qualified technician perform a check-up of the AC motor drive regularly.
Daily Inspection:
Basic check-up items to detect if there were any abnormalities during operation are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Whether the motors are operating as expected.
Whether the installation environment is abnormal.
Whether the cooling system is operating as expected.
Whether any irregular vibration or sound occurred during operation.
Whether the motors are overheating during operation.
Always check the input voltage of the AC drive with a Voltmeter.
Periodic Inspection:
Before the check-up, always turn off the AC input power and remove the cover. Wait at least 10
minutes after all display lamps have gone out, and then confirm that the capacitors have fully
discharged by measuring the voltage between
~
. It should be less than 25VDC.
6-6
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
DANGER!
1.
2.
Disconnect AC power before processing!
Only qualified personnel can install, wire and maintain AC motor drives. Please take off any
metal objects, such as watches and rings, before operation. And only insulated tools are
allowed.
3.
4.
Never reassemble internal components or wiring.
Prevent static electricity.
Periodical Maintenance
Ambient environment
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
Check the ambient temperature,
humidity, vibration and see if
there are any dust, gas, oil or
water drops
Visual inspection and measurement
with equipment with standard
specification
{
{
Check if there are any
dangerous objects in the
environment
Visual inspection
Voltage
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
Check if the voltage of main
circuit and control circuit is
correct
Measure with multimeter with standard
specification
{
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Keypad
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
Is the display clear for reading?
Any missing characters?
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
{
{
Mechanical parts
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there is any abnormal sound
or vibration
Visual and aural inspection
Tighten the screws
{
If there are any loose screws
{
{
If any part is deformed or
damaged
Visual inspection
If there is any color change by
overheating
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
{
{
If there is any dust or dirt
Main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there are any loose or missing
screws
Tighten or replace the screw
Visual inspection
{
If machine or insulator is
deformed, cracked, damaged or
with changed color change due
to overheating or ageing
{
{
NOTE: Please ignore the color
change of copper plate
If there is any dust or dirt
Visual inspection
6-8
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Terminals and wiring of main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If the wiring shows change of
color change or deformation due Visual inspection
to overheat
{
If the insulation of wiring is
damaged or the color has
changed
Visual inspection
Visual inspection
{
{
If there is any damage
DC capacity of main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any leakage of liquid,
change of color, cracks or
deformation
Visual inspection
{
Measure static capacity when
required
Static capacity
initial value X 0.85
{
≥
Resistor of main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any peculiar smell or
insulator cracks due to
overheating
Visual inspection, smell
{
Visual inspection or measure with
multimeter after removing wiring
between +/B1 ~ -
If there is any disconnection
{
±
Resistor value should be within 10%
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Transformer and reactor of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there is any abnormal vibration
or peculiar smell
Visual, aural inspection and smell
{
Magnetic contactor and relay of main circuit
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
Visual and aural inspection. Tighten
screw if necessary.
If there are any loose screws
If the contact works correctly
{
{
Visual inspection
Printed circuit board and connector of main circuit
Maintenance
Period
Check Items
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
If there are any loose screws and
connectors
Tighten the screws and press the
connectors firmly in place.
{
If there is any peculiar smell and
color change
Visual inspection and smell
Visual inspection
{
{
{
If there is any crack, damage,
deformation or corrosion
If there is any leaked liquid or
deformation in capacitors
Visual inspection
6-10
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6 Fault Code Information and Maintenance|
Cooling fan of cooling system
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Year Year
Daily
Visual, aural inspection and turn the
fan with hand (turn off the power
before operation) to see if it rotates
smoothly
If there is any abnormal sound or
vibration
{
If there is any loose screw
Tighten the screw
Change fan
{
{
If there is any change of color due
to overheating
Ventilation channel of cooling system
Check Items
Maintenance
Period
Methods and Criterion
Half One
Daily
Year Year
If there is any obstruction in the
heat sink, air intake or air outlet
Visual inspection
{
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Specifications
There are 115V, 230V and 460V models in the VFD-E series. For 115V models, it is 1-phase
models. For 0.25 to 3HP of the 230V models, there are 1-phase/3-phase models. Refer to following
specifications for details.
Voltage Class
115V Class
Model Number VFD-XXXE
Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW)
Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp)
002
0.2
004
0.4
0.5
007
0.75
1.0
0.25
Rated Output Capacity (kVA)
Rated Output Current (A)
0.6
1.6
1.0
1.6
4.2
2.5
Maximum Output Voltage (V)
3-Phase Proportional to Twice the Input Voltage
Output Frequency (Hz)
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
0.1~600 Hz
1-15
Single-phase
9
Rated Input Current (A)
6
18
Rated Voltage/Frequency
Voltage Tolerance
Single phase, 100-120V, 50/60Hz
10%(90~132 V)
±
5%(47~63 Hz)
Frequency Tolerance
±
Cooling Method
Weight (kg)
Natural Cooling
Fan Cooling
1.2
1.2
1.2
Voltage Class
230V Class
Model Number VFD-XXXE
002
0.2
004
007
015
022
2.2
037
3.7
055
5.5
075
7.5
Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW)
0.4
0.75
1.5
Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp)
Rated Output Capacity (kVA)
Rated Output Current (A)
0.25
0.6
0.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.6
4.2
2.0
2.9
7.5
3.0
4.2
5.0
6.5
17
7.5
9.5
25
10
12.5
33
1.6
11.0
Maximum Output Voltage (V)
3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage
0.1~600 Hz
Output Frequency (Hz)
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
1-15
Single/3-phase
3-phase
26
Rated Input Current (A)
4.9/1.9 6.5/2.7 9.5/5.1 15.7/9
24/15
20.6
34
Single/3-phase
200-240 V, 50/60Hz
3-phase
200-240V, 50/60Hz
Rated Voltage/Frequency
Voltage Tolerance
10%(180~264 V)
5%(47~63 Hz)
±
±
Frequency Tolerance
Cooling Method
Weight (kg)
Natural Cooling
1.1
Fan Cooling
1.9
1.1
1.1
*1.2/1.9
1.9
3.5
3.5
*NOTE: the weight for VFD015E23P is 1.2kg.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Specifications|
Voltage Class
460V Class
Model Number VFD-XXXE
004
0.4
0.5
1.2
1.5
007
0.75
1.0
015
1.5
2.0
3.3
4.2
022
2.2
3.0
4.4
5.5
037
3.7
5.0
6.8
8.2
055
5.5
7.5
9.9
13
075
7.5
10
110
11
Max. Applicable Motor Output (kW)
Max. Applicable Motor Output (hp)
Rated Output Capacity (kVA)
15
2.0
13.7
18
18.3
24
Rated Output Current (A)
2.5
Maximum Output Voltage (V)
3-Phase Proportional to Input Voltage
Output Frequency (Hz)
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
0.1~600 Hz
1-15
3-phase
Rated Input Current (A)
1.9
3.2
4.3
7.1
11.2
14
19
26
Rated Voltage/Frequency
Voltage Tolerance
3-phase, 380-480V, 50/60Hz
10%(342~528V)
±
5%(47~63Hz)
Frequency Tolerance
Cooling Method
Weight (kg)
±
Natural Cooling
1.2 1.2
Fan Cooling
1.2
1.9
1.9
4.2
4.2
4.2
General Specifications
SPWM(Sinusoidal Pulse Width Modulation) control (V/f or sensorless vector
control)
Control System
Frequency Setting Resolution
Output Frequency Resolution
0.01Hz
0.01Hz
Including the auto-torque/auto-slip compensation; starting torque can be
150% at 3.0Hz
Torque Characteristics
Overload Endurance
Skip Frequency
150% of rated current for 1 minute
Three zones, setting range 0.1-600Hz
Accel/Decel Time
Stall Prevention Level
0.1 to 600 seconds (2 Independent settings for Accel/Decel time)
Setting 20 to 250% of rated current
Operation frequency 0.1-600.0Hz, output 0-100% rated current
Start time 0-60 seconds, stop time 0-60 seconds
DC Brake
Approx. 20% (up to 125% possible with optional brake resistor or externally
mounted brake unit, 1-15hp (0.75-11kW) models have brake chopper built-in)
Regenerated Brake Torque
V/f Pattern
4-point adjustable V/f pattern
Setting by
Keypad
Frequency
Potentiometer-5kΩ/0.5W, 0 to +10VDC, 4 to 20mA, RS-485 interface; Multi-
function Inputs 3 to 9 (15 steps, Jog, up/down)
Setting
External Signal
Keypad
Set by RUN and STOP
Operation
Setting
Signal
2 wires/3 wires (MI1, MI2, MI3), JOG operation, RS-485 serial interface
(MODBUS), programmable logic controller
External Signal
Multi-step selection 0 to 15, Jog, accel/decel inhibit, 2 accel/decel switches,
counter, external Base Block, ACI/AVI selections, driver reset, UP/DOWN
key settings, NPN/PNP input selection
Multi-function Input Signal
A-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Specifications|
General Specifications
AC drive operating, frequency attained, zero speed, Base Block, fault
Multi-function Output Indication indication, overheat alarm, emergency stop and status selections of input
terminals
Analog Output Signal
Alarm Output Contact
Output frequency/current
Contact will be On when drive malfunctions (1 Form C/change-over contact
and 1 open collector output) for standard type)
Built-in PLC(NOT for CANopen models), AVR, accel/decel S-Curve, over-
voltage/over-current stall prevention, 5 fault records, reverse inhibition,
momentary power loss restart, DC brake, auto torque/slip compensation,
auto tuning, adjustable carrier frequency, output frequency limits, parameter
lock/reset, vector control, PID control, external counter, MODBUS
Operation Functions
communication, abnormal reset, abnormal re-start, power-saving, fan control,
sleep/wake frequency, 1st/2nd frequency source selections, 1st/2nd
frequency source combination, NPN/PNP selection, parameters for motor 0
to motor 3, DEB and OOB (Out Of Balance Detection)(for washing machine)
Over voltage, over current, under voltage, external fault, overload, ground
fault, overheating, electronic thermal, IGBT short circuit, PTC
Protection Functions
6-key, 7-segment LED with 4-digit, 5 status LEDs, master frequency, output
frequency, output current, custom units, parameter values for setup and lock,
faults, RUN, STOP, RESET, FWD/REV, PLC
Display Keypad (optional)
VFD002E11T/21T/23T, VFD004E11T/21T/23T/43T,
VFD007E21T/23T/43T, VFD015E23T/43T, VFD007E11A, VFD015E21A,
VFD022E21A/23A/43A, VFD037E23A/43A VFD007E11C, VFD015E21C,
VFD022E21C/23C/43C, VFD037E23C/43C, VFD055E23A/43A,
VFD075E23A/43A, VFD110E43A, VFD055E23C/43C, VFD075E23C/43C,
VFD110E43C
Built-in Brake Chopper
Built-in EMI Filter
For 230V 1-phase and 460V 3-phase models.
Enclosure Rating
Pollution Degree
IP20
2
Installation Location
Ambient Temperature
Altitude 1,000 m or lower, keep from corrosive gasses, liquid and dust
-10oC to 50oC (40oC for side-by-side mounting) Non-Condensing and not
frozen
Storage/ Transportation
Temperature
-20 oC to 60 oC
Ambient Humidity
Vibration
Below 90% RH (non-condensing)
9.80665m/s2 (1G) less than 20Hz, 5.88m/s2 (0.6G) at 20 to 50Hz
Approvals
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A Specifications|
This page intentionally left blank
A-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories
B.1 All Brake Resistors & Brake Units Used in AC Motor Drives
Note: Please only use DELTA resistors and recommended values. Other resistors and values will
void Delta’s warranty. Please contact your nearest Delta representative for use of special resistors.
The brake unit should be at least 10 cm away from AC motor drive to avoid possible interference.
Refer to the “Brake unit Module User Manual” for further details.
Applicable
Motor
Full
Load
Torque
KG-M
Min. Equivalent
Resistor Value
for each AC
Equivalent
Resistor Value
(recommended)
Brake Unit Part Brake Resistors
Brake
Torque
10%ED
AC Drive Part No.
No. and
Quantity
Part No. and
Quantity
hp kW
Motor Drive
200W 250Ω
200W 250Ω
200W 250Ω
200W 250Ω
200W 150Ω
200W 250Ω
200Ω
200Ω
100Ω
100Ω
80Ω
VFD002E11A/11C/11P
VFD002E11T
BUE-20015
BUE-20015
1
1
BR200W250
BR200W250
BR200W250
BR200W250
BR200W150
1
1
1
1
1
343
343
170
170
143
0.25 0.2
0.110
VFD004E11A/11C/11P
VFD004E11T
0.5
1
0.4
0.216
0.427
0.75 VFD007E11A/11C/11P
VFD002E21A/21C/21P/23A
200Ω
200Ω
100Ω
100Ω
80Ω
BUE-20015
BUE-20015
BUE-20015
1
1
1
BR200W250
1
1
1
1
1
343
343
170
170
143
0.25 0.2
0.110
0.216
0.427
23C/23P
VFD002E21T/23T
VFD004E21A/21C/21P/23A
/23C/23P
VFD004E21T/23T
200W 250Ω
200W 250Ω
BR200W250
BR200W250
0.5
1
0.4
200W 250Ω
200W 150Ω
BR200W250
BR200W150
VFD007E21A/21C/21P/23A
/23C/23P
0.75
VFD007E21T/23T
200W 150Ω
300W 85Ω
300W 85Ω
300W 85Ω
600W 50Ω
600W 50Ω
80Ω
40Ω
80Ω
80Ω
40Ω
40Ω
BR200W150
BR300W100
BR300W100
BR300W100
BR300W100
BR300W100
1
1
1
1
2
2
143
107
107
107
143
85
VFD015E21A/21C
VFD015E23T
2
1.5
0.849
VFD015E23A/23C/23P
VFD022E21A/21C/23A/23C
VFD037E23A/23C
VFD055E23A/23C
BUE-20015
1
3
5
2.2
3.7
1.262
2.080
800W 37.5
Ω
34Ω
24Ω
7.5
10
5.5
7.5
3.111
4.148
BR200W150
4
4
76
85
VFD075E23A/23C
1200W 25Ω
BR300W100
BR300W400
BR300W400
BR300W400
BR300W400
BR200W150
BR200W150
BR300W400
BR300W400
BR300W400
300W 400Ω
300W 400Ω
300W 400Ω
300W 400Ω
400W 300Ω
400W 300Ω
600W 200Ω
900W 133Ω
BUE-40015
BUE-40015
BUE-40015
1
1
1
400Ω
400Ω
200Ω
200Ω
160Ω
160Ω
140Ω
96Ω
VFD004E43A/43C/43P
VFD004E43T
VFD007E43A/43C/43P
VFD007E43T
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
4
428
428
214
214
143
143
143
129
115
0.5
1
0.4
0.75
1.5
0.216
0.427
0.849
VFD015E43A/43C
VFD015E43T
2
VFD022E43A/43C
VFD037E43A/43C
VFD055E43A/43C
3
5
2.2
3.7
1.262
2.080
1200W 100
Ω
96Ω
7.5
5.5
3.111
VFD075E43A/43C
VFD110E43A/43C
1500W 80Ω
2100W 57Ω
BR300W400
BR300W400
5
7
107
100
69Ω
53Ω
10
15
7.5
11
4.148
6.186
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
NOTE
1.
2.
Please select the brake unit and/or brake resistor according to the table. “-“ means no
Delta product. Please use the brake unit according to the Equivalent Resistor Value.
If damage to the drive or other equipment is due to the fact that the brake resistors and
the brake modules in use are not provided by Delta, the warranty will be void.
Take into consideration the safety of the environment when installing the brake resistors.
If the minimum resistance value is to be utilized, consult local dealers for the calculation of
the power in Watt.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Please select thermal relay trip contact to prevent resistor over load. Use the contact to
switch power off to the AC motor drive!
When using more than 2 brake units, equivalent resistor value of parallel brake unit can’t
be less than the value in the column “Minimum Equivalent Resistor Value for Each AC
Drive” (the right-most column in the table).
7.
8.
Please read the wiring information in the user manual of the brake unit thoroughly prior to
installation and operation.
Definition for Brake Usage ED%
Explanation: The definition of the barking usage ED(%) is for assurance of enough time
for the brake unit and brake resistor to dissipate away heat generated by braking. When
the brake resistor heats up, the resistance would increase with temperature, and brake
torque would decrease accordingly. Suggest cycle time is one minute
100%
T1
ED% = T1/T0x100(%)
Brake Time
T0
Cycle Time
9.
For safety reasons, install a thermal overload relay between brake unit and brake resistor.
Together with the magnetic contactor (MC) in the mains supply circuit to the drive it offers
protection in case of any malfunctioning. The purpose of installing the thermal overload
relay is to protect the brake resistor against damage due to frequent brake or in case the
brake unit is continuously on due to unusual high input voltage. Under these
circumstances the thermal overload relay switches off the power to the drive. Never let
the thermal overload relay switch off only the brake resistor as this will cause serious
damage to the AC Motor Drive.
B-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
NFB
MC
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
IM
MOTOR
Thermal Overload
Relay
VFD Series
O.L.
Thermal
Overload
Relay or
temperature
switch
+(P)
B1
+(P)
-(N)
MC
SA
Surge
Absorber
O.L.
-(N)
Brake
Resistor
BR
Brake
Unit
B2
Temperature
Switch
Note1: When using the AC drive with DC reactor, please refer to wiring diagram in the AC drive
user manual for the wiring of terminal +(P) of Brake unit.
Note2: Do NOT wire terminal -(N) to the neutral point of power system.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.1.1 Dimensions and Weights for Brake Resistors
(Dimensions are in millimeter)
Order P/N: BR080W200, BR080W750, BR300W100, BR300W250, BR300W400, BR400W150,
BR400W040
Model no.
L1
L2
H
D
W
Max. Weight (g)
160
BR080W200
BR080W750
140
125
20
5.3
60
BR300W100
BR300W250
BR300W400
BR400W150
BR400W040
215
265
200
250
30
30
5.3
5.3
60
60
750
930
B-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: BR500W030, BR500W100, BR1KW020, BR1KW075
Model no.
BR500W030
BR500W100
L1
L2
H
D
W
Max. Weight (g)
1100
335
320
30
5.3
60
BR1KW020
BR1KW075
400
385
50
5.3
100
2800
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: BR1K0W050
Order P/N: BR1K0W050, BR1K2W008, BR1K2W6P8, BR1K5W005, BR1K5W040
B-6
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Order P/N: BR200W150, BR200W250
Model no.
BR200W150
BR200W250
L1±2
L2±2
L3±2
W±1
H±1
165
150
110
30
60
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.2 No-fuse Circuit Breaker Chart
For 1-phase/3-phase drives, the current rating of the breaker shall be greater than 2 X (rated input
current).
1-phase
3-phase
Recommended
no-fuse
Recommended
no-fuse
Model
Model
breaker (A)
breaker (A)
VFD002E11A/11T/11C/
11P
15
10
20
15
30
20
VFD002E23A/23C/23T/
23P
5
5
VFD002E21A/21T/21C/
21P
VFD004E23A/23C/23T/
23P
VFD004E11A/11C/11T/
11P
VFD004E43A/43C/43T/
43P
5
VFD004E21A/21C/21T/
21P
VFD007E23A/23C/23T/
23P
10
5
VFD007E11A/11C
VFD007E43A/43C/43T/
43P
VFD007E21A/21C/21T/
21P
VFD015E23A/23C/23T/
23P
20
VFD015E21A/21C
VFD022E21A/21C
30
50
VFD015E43A/43C/43T
VFD022E23A/23C
VFD022E43A/43C
VFD037E23A/23C
VFD037E43A/43C
VFD055E23A/23C
VFD055E43A/43C
VFD075E23A/23C
VFD075E43A/43C
VFD110E43A/43C
10
30
15
40
20
50
30
60
40
50
B-8
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.3 Fuse Specification Chart
Smaller fuses than those shown in the table are permitted.
Line Fuse
Bussmann P/N
JJN-15
I (A)
I (A)
Model
Input
Output
I (A)
15
VFD002E11A/11T/11C/
11P
6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
1.5
VFD002E21A/21T/21C
/21P
4.9
1.9
9
10
5
JJN-10
JJN-6
VFD002E23A/23C/23T
/23P
VFD004E11A/11C/11T/
11P
20
15
5
JJN-20
JJN-15
JJN-6
VFD004E21A/21C/21T
/21P
6.5
2.7
1.9
VFD004E23A/23C/23T
/23P
VFD004E43A/43C/43T
/43P
5
JJS-6
VFD007E11A/11C
18
4.2
4.2
30
20
JJN-30
JJN-20
VFD007E21A/21C/21T
/21P
9.7
VFD007E23A/23C/23T
/23P
5.1
3.2
4.2
2.5
10
5
JJN-10
JJS-6
VFD007E43A/43C/43T
/43P
VFD015E21A/21C
15.7
9
7.5
7.5
30
20
JJN-30
JJN-20
VFD015E23A/23C/23T
/23P
VFD015E43A/43C/43T
VFD022E21A/21C
VFD022E23A/23C
VFD022E43A/43C
VFD037E23A/23C
VFD037E43A/43C
VFD055E23A/23C
4.3
24
4.2
11
10
50
30
15
40
20
50
JJS-10
JJN-50
JJN-30
JJS-15
JJN-40
JJS-20
JJN-50
15
11
7.1
20.6
11.2
26
5.5
17
8.2
25
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Line Fuse
Bussmann P/N
I (A)
I (A)
Model
Input
Output
I (A)
30
VFD055E43A/43C
VFD075E23A/23C
VFD075E43A/43C
VFD110E43A/43C
14
34
19
26
13
33
18
24
JJS-30
JJN-60
JJS-40
JJS-50
60
40
50
B.4 AC Reactor
B.4.1 AC Input Reactor Recommended Value
230V, 50/60Hz, 1-Phase
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
Amps
Max. continuous
Amps
kW
HP
3~5% impedance
0.2
0.4
1/4
1/2
1
4
5
6
6.5
3
7.5
12
18
27
0.75
1.5
8
1.5
1.25
0.8
2
12
18
2.2
3
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Max.
continuous
Amps
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
Amps
kW
HP
3% impedance
5% impedance
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
1/2
1
2
4
3
6
20
9
32
12
9
2
4
6
6.5
5
3
8
12
12
18
27
37.5
52.5
7.5
5
5
8
3
7.5
10
15
20
12
18
25
35
2.5
1.5
1.2
0.8
4.2
2.5
2
15
1.2
B-10
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.4.2 AC Output Reactor Recommended Value
115V/230V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Max.
continuous
Amps
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
kW
HP
Amps
3% impedance
5% impedance
0.2
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
1/4
1/2
1
4
6
4
6
9
6.5
3
12
9
8
12
5
2
8
12
1.5
1.25
0.8
0.5
0.4
3
3
12
18
25
35
18
2.5
1.5
1.2
0.8
5
27
7.5
10
37.5
52.5
460V, 50/60Hz, 3-Phase
Max.
continuous
Amps
Inductance (mH)
Fundamental
Amps
kW
HP
3% impedance
5% impedance
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
1/2
1
2
4
3
6
20
9
32
12
2
4
6
6.5
5
9
3
8
12
18
27
27
37.5
7.5
4.2
2.5
2.5
2
5
12
18
18
25
2.5
1.5
1.5
1.2
7.5
10
15
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.4.3 Applications
Connected in input circuit
Application 1
Question
When more than one AC motor drive is
When applying power to one of the AC motor
connected to the same mains power, and one drive, the charge current of the capacitors
of them is ON during operation.
may cause voltage dip. The AC motor drive
may be damaged when over current occurs
during operation.
Correct wiring
reactor
M1
motor
motor
AC motor drive
AC motor drive
M2
Mn
motor
AC motor drive
Application 2
Question
Silicon rectifier and AC motor drive are
connected to the same power.
Switching spikes will be generated when the
silicon rectifier switches on/off. These spikes
may damage the mains circuit.
Correct wiring
power
Silicon Controlled Rectifier
DC
reactor
AC motor drive
reactor
motor
B-12
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Application 3
Question
Used to improve the input power factor, to
When the mains power capacity is too large,
reduce harmonics and provide protection from line impedance will be small and the charge
AC line disturbances. (surges, switching current will be too high. This may damage AC
spikes, short interruptions, etc.). The AC line motor drive due to higher rectifier
reactor should be installed when the power
supply capacity is 500kVA or more and
exceeds 6 times the inverter capacity, or the
temperature.
mains wiring distance 10m.
≤
Correct wiring
small-capacity
AC motor drive
large-capacity
power
reactor
motor
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.5 Zero Phase Reactor (RF220X00A)
Dimensions are in millimeter and (inch)
Recommended Wire
Diagram B
Please put all wires through 4 cores in
series without winding.
Cable
type
(Note)
Size
Wiring
Method
Qty.
Nominal
(mm2)
AWG mm2
Diagram
A
≦10 ≦5.3 ≦5.5
≦2 ≦33.6 ≦38
≦12 ≦3.3 ≦3.5
≦1 ≦42.4 ≦50
1
4
1
4
Zero Phase Reactor
Single-
core
R/L1 U/T1
S/L2 V/T2
Power
Supply
Diagram
B
MOTOR
T/L3
W/T3
Diagram
A
Three-
core
Note 1: The table above gives
Diagram
B
approximate wire size for the zero phase
reactors but the selection is ultimately
governed by the type and diameter of
cable fitted i.e. the cable must fit through
the center hole of zero phase reactors.
Note: 600V Insulated unshielded Cable.
Diagram A
Note 2: Only the phase conductors should
pass through, not the earth core or screen.
Please wind each wire 4 times around the
core. The reactor must be put at inverter
output as close as possible.
Note 3: When long motor output cables
are used an output zero phase reactor
may be required to reduce radiated
emissions from the cable.
Zero Phase Reactor
R/L1 U/T1
Power
S/L2 V/T2
MOTOR
Supply
T/L3
W/T3
B-14
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.6 Remote Controller RC-01
Dimensions are in millimeter
RC-01Terminal block
(Wiring connections)
VFD-E I/O block
5
8
6
4
16 15 14 13 11
AFMACM AVI +10V DCM MI5 MI1 MI2 MI6
VFD-E Programming:
Pr.02.00 set to 2
Pr.02.01 set to 1 (external controls)
Pr.04.04 set to 1 (setting Run/Stop and Fwd/Rev controls)
Pr.04.07 (MI5) set to 5 (External reset)
Pr.04.08 (MI6) set to 8 (JOG operation)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.7 PU06
B.7.1 Description of the Digital Keypad VFD-PU06
LED Display
Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user
defined units, read, and save, etc.
Frequency Command
Status indicator
F
H
U
Output Frequency
Status indicator
Model Number
VFD-PU06
User Defined Units
Status indicator
Status Display
Display the driver's current status.
EXT PU
JOG
By pressing JOG key,
Jog frequency operation.
MODE
Change between different display mode.
UP and DOWN Key
JOG
PU
Set the parameter number
and changes the numerical
data, such as Master Frequency.
Left Key
Move cursor to the left.
Right key
Move the cursor to the right
FWD/REV Key
Select FWD/REV operation.
STOP/RESET
Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive
after fault occurred.
STOP
RESET
RUN
RUN Key
Start AC drive operation.
B.7.2 Explanation of Display Message
Display Message
Descriptions
The AC motor drive Master Frequency Command.
The Actual Operation Frequency present at terminals U, V, and W.
The custom unit (u)
The output current present at terminals U, V, and W.
Press
to change the mode to READ. Press PROG/DATA for
about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, read the parameters of AC drive to the
digital keypad PU06. It can read 4 groups of parameters to PU06. (read
0 – read 3)
Press
to change the mode to SAVE. Press PROG/DATA for
about 2 sec or until it’s flashing, then write the parameters from the
digital keypad PU06 to AC drive. If it has saved, it will show the type of
AC motor drive.
B-16
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Descriptions
Display Message
The specified parameter setting.
The actual value stored in the specified parameter.
External Fault
“End” displays for approximately 1 second if the entered input data have
been accepted. After a parameter value has been set, the new value is
automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the
or
keys.
“Err” displays if the input is invalid.
Communication Error. Please check the AC motor drive user manual
(Chapter 5, Group 9 Communication Parameter) for more details.
B.7.3 Operation Flow Chart
VFD-PU06 Operation Flow Chart
Or
Press UP key to select
SAVE or READ.
XX
Press PROG/DATA for
about 2 seconds or until
it is flashing, then save
parameters from PU06 to
AC drive or read parameters
from AC drive to PU06.
XX-XX
XXXXX
-ERR-
Cannot
write in
-END-
Succeed to
Write in
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.8 KPE-LE02
B.8.1 Description of the Digital Keypad KPE-LE02
3
1
2
4
7
6
5
8
Status Display
1
2
5
UP and DOWN Key
Display the driver's current status.
Set the parameter number and changes the
numerical data, such as Master Frequency.
LED Display
Indicates frequency, voltage, current, user
defined units and etc.
6
MODE
Change between different display mode.
Potentiometer
For master Frequency setting.
3
4
7
STOP/RESET
Stops AC drive operation and reset the drive
after fault occurred.
8
RUN Key
Start AC drive operation.
ENTER
Used to enter/modify programming
parameters
Display Message
Descriptions
Displays the AC drive Master Frequency.
Displays the actual output frequency at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
User defined unit (where U = F x Pr.00.05)
Displays the output current at terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
Displays the AC motor drive forward run status.
Displays the AC motor drive reverse run status.
The counter value (C).
Displays the selected parameter.
B-18
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Display Message
Descriptions
Displays the actual stored value of the selected parameter.
External Fault.
Display “End” for approximately 1 second if input has been accepted by
pressing
key. After a parameter value has been set, the new value
is automatically stored in memory. To modify an entry, use the
keys.
and
Display “Err”, if the input is invalid.
NOTE
When the setting exceeds 99.99 for those numbers with 2 decimals (i.e. unit is 0.01), it will only
display 1 decimal due to 4-digital display.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.8.2 How to Operate the Digital Keypad
Setting Mode
START
GO START
In the selection mode, press
NOTE:
to set the parameters.
Setting parameters
or
Success to
set parameter.
Input data error
NOTE
：
In the parameter setting mode, you can press
to return the selecting mode.
To shift data
(When operation source is digital keypad)
Setting direction
Setting PLC Mode
enter PLC2 mode
enter PLC1 mode
B-20
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.8.3 Reference Table for the 7-segment LED Display of the Digital
Keypad
Digit
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ii
9
LED
Display
English
alphabet
A
b
Cc
d
E
F
G
Hh
Jj
LED
Display
English
alphabet
K
v
L
n
Z
Oo
P
q
r
S
Tt
U
LED
Display
English
alphabet
Y
LED
Display
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.9 Extension Card
For details, please refer to the separate instruction shipped with these optional cards or download
from our website http://www.delta.com.tw/industrialautomation/.
Installation method
B.9.1 Relay Card
EME-R2CA
Relay Output
EME-R3AA
Relay Output
B-22
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
connect to extension card
connect to PC
B.9.5 Speed Feedback Card
EME-PG01
B.10 Fieldbus Modules
B.10.1 DeviceNet Communication Module (CME-DN01)
B.10.1.1 Panel Appearance and Dimensions
1. For RS-485 connection to VFD-E 2. Communication port for connecting DeviceNet
network 3. Address selector 4. Baud rate selector 5. Three LED status indicators for monitor.
(Refer to the figure below)
B-24
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
3
4
5
125K
250K
500K
NETMOD SP
CME-DN01
ADD1 ADD2 BAUD
2
1
72.2 [2.84]
35.8 [1.41]
3.5 [0.14]
UNIT: mm(inch)
B.10.1.2 Wiring and Settings
Refer to following diagram for details.
MAC address Date Rate
Setting baud rate
Setting MAC addresses:
use decimal system.
125K
250K
500K
0
NETMOD SP
ADD1 ADD2 BAUD
CME-DN01
BAUD
ADD1
ADD2
Switch
Value
Baud
Rate
1: Reserved
2: EV
3: GND
4: SG-
5: SG+
0
1
125K
250K
500K
AUTO
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
2
Empty
Pin
V+
V-
CAN-H
CAN-L
Other
B.10.1.3 Mounting Method
Step1 and step2 show how to mount this communication module onto VFD-E. The dimension
on the left hand side is for your reference.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Dimensions
STEP 1
STEP 2
UNIT: mm(inch)
B.10.1.4 Power Supply
No external power is needed. Power is supplied via RS-485 port that is connected to VFD-E.
An 8 pins RJ-45 cable, which is packed together with this communication module, is used to
connect the RS-485 port between VFD-E and this communication module for power. This
communication module will perform the function once it is connected. Refer to the following
paragraph for LED indications.
B.10.1.5 LEDs Display
1.
2.
SP: Green LED means in normal condition, Red LED means abnormal condition.
Module: Green blinking LED means no I/O data transmission, Green steady LED means
I/O data transmission OK.
Red LED blinking or steady LED means module communication is abnormal.
Network: Green LED means DeviceNet communication is normal, Red LED means
abnormal
3.
NOTE
Refer to user manual for detail information-- Chapter 5 Troubleshooting.
B.10.2 LonWorks Communication Module (CME-LW01)
B-26
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.10.2.1 Introduction
Device CME-LW01 is used for communication interface between Modbus and LonTalk. CME-
LW01 needs be configured via LonWorks network tool first, so that it can perform the function
on LonWorks network. No need to set CME-LW01 address.
This manual provides instructions for the installation and setup for CME-LW01 that is used to
communicate with Delta VFD-E (firmware version of VFD-E should conform with CME-LW01
according to the table below) via LonWorks Network.
B.10.2.2 Dimensions
72.2 [2.84]
SP
CME-LW01
34.8 [1.37]
3.5 [0.14]
B.10.2.3 Specifications
Power supply: 16-30VDC, 750mW
Communication:
LonTalk:
Modbus in ASCII format, protocol: 9600, 7, N, 2
free topology with FTT-10A 78 Kbps.
LonTalk terminal:
4-pin terminals, wire gauge: 28-12 AWG, wire strip length: 7-8mm
RS-485 port: 8 pins with RJ-45
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.10.2.4 Wiring
Service LED
SP LED
Power LED
Service Pin
SP
CME-LW01
1: Reserved 5: SG+
2: EV
3: GND
4: SG-
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
2
3 4
1
LonTalk LonTalk
„
Terminal definition for LonTalk system
Terminal
Symbol
Function
1
2
3
4
These are twisted pair cables to connect
to LonTalk system. Terminals 1 and 2
should be used as one group, and the
same for terminals 3 and 4.
B.10.2.5 LED Indications
There are three LEDs in front panel of CME-LW01. If the communication is normal, power
LED, SP LED should be green (red LED means abnormal communication) and service LED
should be OFF. If LEDs display do not match, refer to user manual for details.
B.10.3 Profibus Communication Module (CME-PD01)
B-28
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.10.3.1 Panel Appearance
Address Switches NET LED
SP LED
NET SP
ADDL
ADDH
CME-PB01
RS-485 (RJ45)
1: Reserved
2: EV
3: GND
4: SG-
5: SG+
6: Reserved
7: Reserved
8: Reserved
Profibus-DP
Interface (DB9)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
SP LED: Indicating the connection status between VFD-E and CME-PD01.
NET LED: Indicating the connection status between CME-PD01 and PROFIBUS-DP.
Address Switches: Setting the address of CME-PD01 on PROFIBUS- DP network.
RS-485 Interface (RJ45): Connecting to VFD-E, and supply power to CME-PD01.
PROFIBUS-DP Interface (DB9): 9-PIN connector that connects to PROFIBUS-DP
network.
6.
Extended Socket: 4-PIN socket that connects to PROFIBUS-DP network.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
B.10.3.2 Dimensions
72.2 [2.84]
NET SP
CME-PB01
ADDH ADDL
34.8 [1.37]
UNIT: mm(inch)
B.10.3.3 Parameters Settings in VFD-E
VFD-E
Baud Rate 9600
RTU 8, N, 2
Pr.09.01=1
Pr.09.04=3
Pr.02.00=4
Pr.02.01=3
Freq. Source
Command Source
B.10.3.4 Power Supply
The power of CME-PD01 is supplied from VFD-E. Please connect VFD-E to CME-PD01 by
using 8 pins RJ-45 cable, which is packed together with CME-PD01. After connection is
completed, CME-PD01 is powered whenever power is applied to VFD-E.
B.10.3.5 PROFIBUS Address
CME-PD01 has two rotary switches for the user to select the PROFIBUS address. The set
value via 2 address switches, ADDH and ADDL, is in HEX format. ADDH sets the upper 4 bits,
and ADDL sets the lower 4 bits of the PROFIBUS address.
B-30
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Address
1..0x7D
Meaning
Valid PROFIBUS address
Invalid PROFIBUS address
0 or 0x7E..0xFE
B.10.4 CME-COP01 (CANopen)
CME-COP01 CANopen communication module is specifically for connecting to CANopen
communication module of Delta VFD-E AC motor drive.
B.10.4.1 Product Profile
COM port
7
6
3
4
5
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
CANopen connection port
RUN indicator
ERROR indicator
SP (Scan Port) indicator
Baud rate switch
2
1
Unit: mm
Address switch
B.10.4.2 Specifications
CANopen Connection
Interface
Pluggable connector (5.08mm)
CAN
Transmission method
Transmission cable
Electrical isolation
2-wire twisted shielded cable
500V DC
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Communication
Process Data Objects
(PDO)
Service Data Object
(SDO)
Synchronization
(SYNC)
Emergency (EMCY)
Network Management
(NMT)
10 Kbps
20 Kbps
50 Kbps
125 Kbps
250 Kbps
500 Kbps
800 Kbps
1 Mbps
Baud
rate
Message type
Product code
Device type
Vendor ID
Delta VFD-E AC motor drive 22
402
477
Environmental Specifications
ESD(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-2): 8KV Air Discharge
EFT(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-4): Power Line: 2KV, Digital I/O: 1KV,
Noise Immunity Analog & Communication I/O: 1KV
Damped-Oscillatory Wave: Power Line: 1KV, Digital I/O: 1KV
RS(IEC 61131-2, IEC 61000-4-3): 26MHz ~ 1GHz, 10V/m
Operation: 0°C ~ 55°C (Temperature), 50 ~ 95% (Humidity), Pollution
degree 2;
Environment
Storage: -40°C ~ 70°C (Temperature), 5 ~ 95% (Humidity)
Vibration /
Shock
Resistance
Standard: IEC1131-2, IEC 68-2-6（TEST Fc/IEC1131-2 & IEC 68-2-27
(TEST Ea)
Certifications
Standard: IEC 61131-2,UL508
B.10.4.3 Components
Pin Definition on CANopen Connection Port
To connect with CANopen, use the connector enclosed with CME-COP01 or any connectors
you can buy in the store for wiring.
Pin
1
Signal
CAN_GND
CAN_L
SHIELD
CAN_H
-
Content
Ground / 0 V / V-
Signal-
2
3
Shield
1 2 3 4 5
4
Signal+
5
Reserved
Baud Rate Setting
8
6
B
5
Rotary switch (BR) sets up the communication speed on
CANopen network in hex. Setup range: 0 ~ 7 (8 ~F are
forbidden)
D
E
F
1
0
BR
B-32
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Example: If you need to set up the communication speed of CME-COP01 as 500K, simply
switch BR to “5”.
BR Value
Baud rate
10K
BR Value
Baud rate
250K
500K
800K
1M
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
20K
50K
125K
MAC ID Setting
8
8
Rotary switches (ID_L and ID_H) set up the
Node-ID on CANopen network in hex. Setup
range: 00 ~ 7F (80 ~FF are forbidden)
E
E
ID_H
ID_L
Example: If you need to set up the communication address of CME-COP01 as 26(1AH),
simply switch ID_H to “1” and ID_L to “A”.
Switch Setting
0 … 7F
Content
Valid CANopen MAC ID setting
Invalid CANopen MAC ID setting
Other
B.10.4.4 LED Indicator Explanation & Troubleshooting
There are 3 LED indicators, RUN, ERROR and SP, on CME-COP01 to indicate the
communication status of CME-COP01.
RUN LED
LED Status
OFF
State
Indication
No power
No power on CME-COP01 card
Single Flash
(Green)
STOPPED
CME-COP01 is in STOPPED state
Blinking
(Green)
CME-COP01 is in the PRE-
OPERATIONAL state
PRE-OPERATIONAL
CME-COP01 is in the
OPERATIONAL state
Green ON
Red ON
OPERATIONAL
Configuration error
Node-ID or Baud rate setting error
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
ERROR LED
LED Status
State
Indication
OFF
No error
CME-COP01 is working condition
At least one of error counter of the
CANopen controller has reached or
exceeded the warning level (too many
error frames)
Single Flash
(Red)
Warning limit reached
Double Flash
(Red)
A guard event or heartbeat event has
occurred
Error control event
Bus-off
Red ON
The CANopen controller is bus-off
SP LED
LED Status
OFF
State
Indication
No Power
No power on CME-COP01 card
LED Blinking
(Red)
Check your communication setting in
VFD-E drives (19200,<8,N,2>,RTU)
CRC check error
1. Check the connection between
VFD-E drive and CME-COP01
card is correct
Connection failure/No
connection
Red ON
2. Re-wire the VFD-E connection and
ensure that the wire specification is
correct
LED Blinking
(Green)
CME-COP01 returns error
code
Check the PLC program, ensure the
index and sub-index is correct
Green ON
LED Descriptions
State
Normal
Communication is normal
Description
LED ON
Constantly on
Constantly off
LED OFF
LED blinking
Flash, on for 0.2s and off for 0.2s
On for 0.2s and off for 1s
LED single
flash
LED double
flash
On for 0.2s off for 0.2s, on for 0.2s and off for 1s
B-34
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
B-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Accessories|
This page intentionally left blank
B-38
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive
The choice of the right AC motor drive for the application is very important and has great influence
on its lifetime. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too large, it cannot offer complete protection to the
motor and motor maybe damaged. If the capacity of AC motor drive is too small, it cannot offer the
required performance and the AC motor drive maybe damaged due to overloading.
But by simply selecting the AC motor drive of the same capacity as the motor, user application
requirements cannot be met completely. Therefore, a designer should consider all the conditions,
including load type, load speed, load characteristic, operation method, rated output, rated speed,
power and the change of load capacity. The following table lists the factors you need to consider,
depending on your requirements.
Related Specification
Speed and
torque
characteristics
Item
Time
ratings
Overload
capacity
Starting
torque
Friction load and weight
load
Liquid (viscous) load
Inertia load
●
●
Load type
Load with power
transmission
Constant torque
Constant output
Decreasing torque
Decreasing output
Constant load
Load speed and
torque
characteristics
●
●
●
Shock load
Load
characteristics
●
●
●
●
Repetitive load
High starting torque
Low starting torque
Continuous operation, Short-time operation
Long-time operation at medium/low speeds
●
●
Maximum output current (instantaneous)
Constant output current (continuous)
●
●
Maximum frequency, Base frequency
Power supply transformer capacity or
percentage impedance
●
●
●
●
Voltage fluctuations and unbalance
Number of phases, single phase protection
Frequency
Mechanical friction, losses in wiring
Duty cycle modification
●
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
C.1 Capacity Formulas
1. When one AC motor drive operates one motor
The starting capacity should be less than 1.5x rated capacity of AC motor drive
The starting capacity=
⎛
⎞
k × N
973×η × cosϕ
GD2
N
⎜
⎜
⎟
⎟
TL +
×
≤1.5×the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
375 tA
⎝
⎠
2. When one AC motor drive operates more than one motor
2.1 The starting capacity should be less than the rated capacity of AC motor drive
≦
Acceleration time 60 seconds
„
„
The starting capacity=
⎡
k × N
η × cosϕ
n
s
⎢
[n
T
+ ns(ks
− 1)] = PC1 1+
(
k
s
− 1)⎤⎥⎥ ≤1.5×the _ capacity _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
⎢
⎢
⎣
⎥
⎦
nT
≧
Acceleration time 60 seconds
The starting capacity=
⎡
[
n
T
+ ns(ks
− 1)]
= PC1⎢⎢1+
(
k
s
− 1)⎤⎥⎥ ≤ the_capacity _of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
k × N
η ×cosϕ
n
s
⎢
⎣
⎥
⎦
nT
2.2 The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
≦
Acceleration time 60 seconds
„
„
⎡
⎤
n
S
nT
+ IM 1+ ⎛⎜ kS −1⎟⎞⎥ ≤1.5×the_ rated _current _of _ AC _ motor _ drive(A)
⎢
⎝
⎠
⎦
n
T
⎣
≧
Acceleration time 60 seconds
⎡
⎤
n
S
n
T
+ IM 1+ ⎛⎜ kS −1⎟⎞⎥ ≤ the _ rated _current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(A)
⎢
⎝
⎠
⎦
n
T
⎣
C-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
2.3 When it is running continuously
„
The requirement of load capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive(kVA)
The requirement of load capacity=
k × PM
η ×cosϕ
≤ the_capacity_of _ AC _ motor _ drive(kVA)
„
„
The motor capacity should be less than the capacity of AC motor drive
k × 3 ×VM × IM ×10−3 ≤ the_capacity_of _ AC _motor_drive(kVA)
The current should be less than the rated current of AC motor drive(A)
k × IM ≤ the _ rated _ current _ of _ AC _ motor _ drive(A)
Symbol explanation
: Motor shaft output for load (kW)
PM
η
: Motor efficiency (normally, approx. 0.85)
: Motor power factor (normally, approx. 0.75)
: Motor rated voltage(V)
cosϕ
V
M
: Motor rated current(A), for commercial power
IM
: Correction factor calculated from current distortion factor (1.05-1.1, depending on
PWM method)
k
: Continuous motor capacity (kVA)
: Starting current/rated current of motor
: Number of motors in parallel
: Number of simultaneously started motors
: Total inertia (GD2) calculated back to motor shaft (kg m2)
: Load torque
PC1
kS
n
n
T
S
GD2
TL
: Motor acceleration time
t
A
N
: Motor speed
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
C.2 General Precaution
Selection Note
1.
When the AC Motor Drive is connected directly to a large-capacity power transformer
(600kVA or above) or when a phase lead capacitor is switched, excess peak currents
may occur in the power input circuit and the converter section may be damaged. To avoid
this, use an AC input reactor (optional) before AC Motor Drive mains input to reduce the
current and improve the input power efficiency.
2.
3.
When a special motor is used or more than one motor is driven in parallel with a single
AC Motor Drive, select the AC Motor Drive current ≥1.25x(Sum of the motor rated
currents).
The starting and accel./decel. characteristics of a motor are limited by the rated current
and the overload protection of the AC Motor Drive. Compared to running the motor D.O.L.
(Direct On-Line), a lower starting torque output with AC Motor Drive can be expected. If
higher starting torque is required (such as for elevators, mixers, tooling machines, etc.)
use an AC Motor Drive of higher capacity or increase the capacities for both the motor
and the AC Motor Drive.
4.
When an error occurs on the drive, a protective circuit will be activated and the AC Motor
Drive output is turned off. Then the motor will coast to stop. For an emergency stop, an
external mechanical brake is needed to quickly stop the motor.
Parameter Settings Note
1.
The AC Motor Drive can be driven at an output frequency up to 400Hz (less for some
models) with the digital keypad. Setting errors may create a dangerous situation. For
safety, the use of the upper limit frequency function is strongly recommended.
High DC brake operating voltages and long operation time (at low frequencies) may
cause overheating of the motor. In that case, forced external motor cooling is
recommended.
2.
3.
4.
Motor accel./decel. time is determined by motor rated torque, load torque, and load inertia.
If the stall prevention function is activated, the accel./decel. time is automatically extended
to a length that the AC Motor Drive can handle. If the motor needs to decelerate within a
certain time with high load inertia that can’t be handled by the AC Motor Drive in the
C-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
required time, either use an external brake resistor and/or brake unit, depending on the
model, (to shorten deceleration time only) or increase the capacity for both the motor and
the AC Motor Drive.
C.3 How to Choose a Suitable Motor
Standard motor
When using the AC Motor Drive to operate a standard 3-phase induction motor, take the
following precautions:
1.
2.
The energy loss is greater than for an inverter duty motor.
Avoid running motor at low speed for a long time. Under this condition, the motor
temperature may rise above the motor rating due to limited airflow produced by the
motor’s fan. Consider external forced motor cooling.
3.
4.
When the standard motor operates at low speed for long time, the output load must be
decreased.
The load tolerance of a standard motor is as follows:
Load duty-cycle
25%
40%
60%
100
82
70
60
continuous
50
0
3 6 20
Frequency (Hz)
60
5.
6.
If 100% continuous torque is required at low speed, it may be necessary to use a special
inverter duty motor.
Motor dynamic balance and rotor endurance should be considered once the operating
speed exceeds the rated speed (60Hz) of a standard motor.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
7.
Motor torque characteristics vary when an AC Motor Drive instead of commercial power
supply drives the motor. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be
connected.
8.
Because of the high carrier frequency PWM control of the VFD series, pay attention to the
following motor vibration problems:
„
„
„
Resonant mechanical vibration: anti-vibration (damping) rubbers should be used to mount
equipment that runs at varying speed.
Motor imbalance: special care is required for operation at 50 or 60 Hz and higher
frequency.
To avoid resonances, use the Skip frequencies.
9.
The motor fan will be very noisy when the motor speed exceeds 50 or 60Hz.
Special motors:
1.
Pole-changing (Dahlander) motor:
The rated current is differs from that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and select the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When changing the pole number
the motor needs to be stopped first. If over current occurs during operation or
regenerative voltage is too high, please let the motor free run to stop (coast).
Submersible motor:
2.
3.
4.
5.
The rated current is higher than that of a standard motor. Please check before operation
and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. With long motor cable between
AC motor drive and motor, available motor torque is reduced.
Explosion-proof (Ex) motor:
Needs to be installed in a safe place and the wiring should comply with the (Ex)
requirements. Delta AC Motor Drives are not suitable for (Ex) areas with special
precautions.
Gear reduction motor:
The lubricating method of reduction gearbox and speed range for continuous operation
will be different and depending on brand. The lubricating function for operating long time
at low speed and for high-speed operation needs to be considered carefully.
Synchronous motor:
The rated current and starting current are higher than for standard motors. Please check
before operation and choose the capacity of the AC motor drive carefully. When the AC
C-6
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
motor drive operates more than one motor, please pay attention to starting and changing
the motor.
Power Transmission Mechanism
Pay attention to reduced lubrication when operating gear reduction motors, gearboxes, belts
and chains, etc. over longer periods at low speeds. At high speeds of 50/60Hz and above,
lifetime reducing noises and vibrations may occur.
Motor torque
The torque characteristics of a motor operated by an AC motor drive and commercial mains
power are different.
Below you’ll find the torque-speed characteristics of a standard motor (4-pole, 15kW):
AC motor drive
60 seconds
Motor
180
180
155
60 seconds
155
140
100
80
100
55
38
55
38
0
0
320 60
320 60
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 60Hz
V/F for 220V/60Hz
120
V/F for 220V/60Hz
180
150
60 seconds
60 seconds
140
130
100
85
68
100
80
45
35
45
35
0
0
320
20
50
50
120
3
120
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz
Frequency (Hz)
Base freq.: 50Hz
V/F for 220V/50Hz
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
C-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C How to Select the Right AC Motor Drive|
This page intentionally left blank.
C-8
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function
※ This function is NOT for VFD*E*C models.
D.1 PLC Overview
D.1.1 Introduction
The PLC function built in the VFD-E provides following commands: WPLSoft, basic
commands and application commands. The operation methods are the same as Delta DVP-
PLC series.
D.1.2 Ladder Diagram Editor – WPLSoft
WPLSoft is a program editor of Delta DVP-PLC series and VFD-E series for WINDOWS.
Besides general PLC program planning and general WINDOWS editing functions, such as
cut, paste, copy, multi-windows, WPLSoft also provides various Chinese/English comment
editing and other special functions (e.g. register editing, settings, the data readout, the file
saving, and contacts monitor and set, etc.).
Following is the system requirement for WPLSoft:
Item
System Requirement
Windows 95/98/2000/NT/ME/XP
Operation
System
CPU
Pentium 90 and above
Memory
16MB and above (32MB and above is recommended)
Capacity: 50MB and above
CD-ROM (for installing WPLSoft)
Hard Disk
Monitor
Resolution: 640×480, 16 colors and above,
It is recommended to set display setting of Windows to 800×600.
Mouse
Printer
General mouse or the device compatible with Windows
Printer with Windows driver
RS-232 port
At least one of COM1 to COM8 can be connected to PLC
All Delta DVP-PLC series and VFD-E series
Applicable
Models
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
D.2 Start-up
D.2.1 The Steps for PLC Execution
Please operate PLC function by the following five steps.
1.
Switch the mode to PLC2 for program download/upload:
A. Go to “PLC0” page by pressing the MODE key
B. Change to “PLC2” by pressing the “UP” key and then press the “ENTER” key after
confirmation
C. If succeeded, “END” is displayed and back to “PLC2” after one or two seconds.
Disable
Run PLC Read/write PLC program
into AC drives
NOTE
You don’t need to care about the PLC warning, such as PLod, PLSv and PldA, before downloading a
program to VFD-E.
2.
Connection: Please connect RJ-45 of AC motor drive to computer via RS485-to-RS232
converter.
RS485
3.
Run the program. The PLC status will always be PLC2, even if the AC motor drive is
switched off.
There are three ways to operate PLC:
A. In “PLC1” page: execute PLC program.
B. In “PLC2” page: execute/stop PLC program by using WPL software.
C. After setting multi-function input terminals (MI3 to MI9) to 23 (RUN/STOP PLC), it will
display “PLC1” for executing PLC when the terminal is ON. It will display “PLC0” to stop
PLC program when terminals are OFF.
NOTE
When external terminals are set to 23 and the terminal is ON, it cannot use keypad to change PLC
mode. Moreover, when it is PLC2, you cannot execute PLC program by external terminals.
D-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
NOTE
When power on after power off, the PLC status will be in “PLC1”.
4.
When you are in “PLC2”, please remember to change to “PLC1” when finished to prevent
anyone modifying PLC program.
NOTE
When output/input terminals (MI1~MI9, Relay1~Relay 4, MO1~MO4) are used in PLC program, they
cannot be used in other places. For example, When Y0 in PLC program is activated, the
corresponding output terminals Relay (RA/RB/RC) will be used. At this moment, parameter 03.00
setting will be invalid. Because the terminal has been used by PLC.
NOTE
The PLC corresponding input points for MI1 to MI6 are X0 to X5. When extension card are added, the
extension input points will be numbered from X06 and output points will start from Y2 as shown in
chapter D.2.2.
D.2.2 Device Reference Table
Device
ID
X
4
0
1
2
3
5
6
7
10
--
Terminals of AC
Drives
MI1
MI2
MI3
MI4
MI5
--
MI6
--
--
3IN/3OUT Card
(EME-D33A)
--
--
--
--
--
MI7
MI8
MI9
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Device
ID
Y
2
0
1
3
4
Terminals of AC
Drives
RY
MO1
--
--
--
Relay Card-2C
(EME-DR2CA)
Relay Card-3A
(EME-R3AA)
3IN/3OUT Card
(EME-D33A)
RY2
RY2
RY3
RY3
MO3
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
RY4
MO4
MO2
D.2.3 WPLSoft Installation
Download PLC program to AC drive: Refer to D.3 to D.7 for writing program and download
the editor (WPLSoft V2.09) at DELTA website
http://www.delta.com.tw/product/em/plc/plc_software.asp.
D-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
D.2.4 Program Input
D.2.5 Program Download
Please do following sfor program download.
Step 1. Press button
for compiler after inputting program in WPLSoft.
Step 2. After finishing compiler, choose the item “Write to PLC” in the communication items.
After finishing Step 2, the program will be downloaded from WPLSoft to the AC motor drive
by the communication format.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
D.2.6 Program Monitor
If you execute “start monitor” in the communication item during executing PLC, the ladder
diagram will be shown as follows.
D.2.7 The Limit of PLC
1.
2.
3.
4.
The protocol of PLC is 7,E,1
Make sure that the AC drive is stop and stop PLC before program upload/download.
The priority of commands WPR and FREQ is FREQ > WPR.
When setting P 00.04 to 2, the display will be the value in PLC register D1043.
A.
0 ~ 999 display:
B.
1000 ~ 9999 display: It will only display the first 3 digits. The LED at the
bottom-right corner will light to indicate 10 times of the display value. For
example, the actual value for the following figure is 100X10=1000.
C.
10000~65535 display: It will only display the first 3 digits. The LED at the
bottom-right corner and the single decimal point between the middle and the
right-most numbers will light to indicate 100 times of the display value. For
example, the actual value for the following figure is 100X100=10000.
D-6
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
5.
6.
When it is changed to “PLC2”, RS-485 will be used by PLC.
When it is in PLC1 and PLC2 mode, the function to reset all parameters to factory setting
is disabled (i.e. Pr.00.02 can’t be set to 9 or 10).
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
D.3 Ladder Diagram
D.3.1 Program Scan Chart of the PLC Ladder Diagram
Read input state from outside
X0
X1
Start
Y0
Y1
Y0
Calculate the result by ladder
diagram algorithm (it doesn’t
sent to the outer output point
but the inner equipment will
output immediately.)
X10
X3
M100
Execute in cycles
:
:
X100 M505
Y126
End
Send the result to the output point
D.3.2 Introduction
Ladder diagram is a diagram language that applied on the automatic control and it is also a
diagram that made up of the symbols of electric control circuit. PLC procedures are finished
after ladder diagram editor edits the ladder diagram. It is easy to understand the control flow
that indicated with diagram and also accept by technical staff of electric control circuit. Many
basic symbols and motions of ladder diagram are the same as mechanical and electrical
equipments of traditional automatic power panel, such as button, switch, relay, timer,
counter and etc.
The kinds and amounts of PLC internal equipment will be different with brands. Although
internal equipment has the name of traditional electric control circuit, such as relay, coil and
contact. It doesn’t have the real components in it. In PLC, it just has a basic unit of internal
memory. If this bit is 1, it means the coil is ON and if this bit is 0, it means the coil is OFF.
You should read the corresponding value of that bit when using contact (Normally Open, NO
or contact a). Otherwise, you should read the opposite sate of corresponding value of that
bit when using contact (Normally Closed, NC or contact b). Many relays will need many bits,
such as 8-bits makes up a byte. 2 bytes can make up a word. 2 words makes up double
word. When using many relays to do calculation, such as add/subtraction or shift, you could
D-8
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
use byte, word or double word. Furthermore, the two equipments, timer and counter, in PLC
not only have coil but also value of counting time and times.
In conclusion, each internal storage unit occupies fixed storage unit. When using these
equipments, the corresponding content will be read by bit, byte or word.
Basic introduction of the inner equipment of PLC:
Input relay Input relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to
external input point (it is the terminal that used to connect to external input switch
and receive external input signal). Input signal from external will decide it to
display 0 or 1. You couldn’t change the state of input relay by program design or
forced ON/OFF via WPLSoft. The contacts (contact a, b) can be used unlimitedly.
If there is no input signal, the corresponding input relay could be empty and can’t
be used with other functions.
ꢀ
Equipment indication method: X0, X1,…X7, X10, X11,…. The symbol of
equipment is X and the number uses octal.
Output relay Output relay is the basic storage unit of internal memory that corresponds to
external output point (it is used to connect to external load). It can be driven by
input relay contact, the contact of other internal equipment and itself contact. It
uses a normally open contact to connect to external load and other contacts can
be used unlimitedly as input contacts. It doesn’t have the corresponding output
relay, if need, it can be used as internal relay.
ꢀ
Equipment indication: Y0, Y1,…Y7, Y10, Y11,…. . The symbol of
equipment is Y and the number uses octal.
Internal relay The internal relay doesn’t connect directly to outside. It is an auxiliary relay in
PLC. Its function is the same as the auxiliary relay in electric control circuit. Each
auxiliary relay has the corresponding basic unit. It can be driven by the contact of
input relay, output relay or other internal equipment. Its contacts can be used
unlimitedly. Internal auxiliary relay can’t output directly, it should output with
output point.
ꢀ
Equipment indication: M0, M1,…, M4, M159. The symbol of equipment
is M and the number uses decimal number system.
Timer
Timer is used to control time. There are coil, contact and timer storage. When coil
is ON, its contact will act (contact a is close, contact b is open) when attaining
desired time. The time value of timer is set by settings and each timer has its
regular period. User sets the timer value and each timer has its timing period.
Once the coil is OFF, the contact won’t act (contact a is open and contact b is
close) and the timer will be set to zero.
ꢀ
Equipment indication: T0, T1,…,T15. The symbol of equipment is T and
the number uses decimal system. The different number range
corresponds with the different timing period.
Counter
Counter is used to count. It needs to set counter before using counter (i.e. the
pulse of counter). There are coil, contacts and storage unit of counter in counter.
When coil is from OFF to ON, that means input a pulse in counter and the counter
should add 1. There are 16-bit, 32-bit and high-speed counter for user to use.
ꢀ
Equipment indication: C0, C1,…,C7. The symbol of equipment is C and
the number uses decimal.
Data register PLC needs to handle data and operation when controlling each order, timer value
and counter value. The data register is used to store data or parameters. It stores
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
16-bit binary number, i.e. a word, in each register. It uses two continuous number
of data register to store double words.
ꢀ
Equipment indication: D0, D1,…,D29. The symbol of equipment is D and
the number uses decimal.
The structure and explanation of ladder diagram:
Ladder Diagram Structure Explanation
Command
LD
Equipment
Normally open, contact a
Normally closed, contact b
Serial normally open
X, Y, M, T, C
LDI
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
AND
Parallel normally open
OR
X, Y, M, T, C
Parallel normally closed
Rising-edge trigger switch
ORI
LDP
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
Falling-edge trigger switch
Rising-edge trigger in serial
Falling-edge trigger in serial
LDF
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
ANDP
ANDF
Rising-edge trigger in parallel
Falling-edge trigger in parallel
Block in serial
ORP
ORF
ANB
ORB
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
none
Block in parallel
none
D-10
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Ladder Diagram Structure
Explanation
Command
Equipment
MPS
MRD
MPP
Multiple output
none
Output command of coil drive
OUT
Y, M, S
Please refer to
Basic command, Application
command
Application basic command
command and application
command
Inverse logic
INV
none
D.3.3 The Edition of PLC Ladder Diagram
The program edited method is from left power line to right power line. (the right power line
will be omitted during the edited of WPLSoft.) After editing a row, go to editing the next row.
The maximum contacts in a row are 11 contacts. If you need more than 11 contacts, you
could have the new row and start with continuous line to continue more input devices. The
continuous number will be produced automatically and the same input point can be used
repeatedly. The drawing is shown as follows.
X0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X10 C0 C1
00000
X11 X12 X13
Y0
00000
Row Number
The operation of ladder diagram is to scan from left upper corner to right lower corner. The
output handling, including the operation frame of coil and application command, at the most
right side in ladder diagram.
Take the following diagram for example; we analyze the process step by step. The number
at the right corner is the explanation order.
X0
X1
Y1
T0
X4
Y1
M0
X3
M3
TMR
T0
K10
M1
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
The explanation of command order:
1
2
3
4
LD
X0
M0
X1
X3
M1
OR
AND
LD
AND
ORB
LD
5
6
Y1
X4
T0
M3
AND
LD
AND
ORB
ANB
OUT
TMR
7
8
Y1
T0 K10
The detail explanation of basic structure of ladder diagram
1.
LD (LDI) command: give the command LD or LDI in the start of a block.
LD command
LD command
AND Block
OR Block
The structures of command LDP and LDF are similar to the command LD. The difference is
that command LDP and LDF will act in the rising-edge or falling-edge when contact is ON as
shown in the following.
Rising-edge
Falling-edge
X0
X0
Time
Time
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
2.
AND (ANI) command: single device connects to a device or a block in series.
AND command AND command
D-12
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
The structures of ANDP and ANDF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-
edge.
3.
OR (ORI) command: single device connects to a device or a block.
OR command OR command
OR command
The structures of ORP and ORF are the same but the action is in rising-edge or falling-edge.
4.
ANB command: a block connects to a device or a block in series.
ANB command
5.
ORB command: a block connects to a device or a block in parallel.
ORB command
If there are several blocks when operate ANB or ORB, they should be combined to blocks or
network from up to down or from left to right.
6.
7.
MPS, MRD, MPP commands: Divergent memory of multi-output. It can produce many
various outputs.
The command MPS is the start of divergent point. The divergent point means the
connection place between horizontal line and vertical line. We should determine to have
contact memory command or not according to the contacts status in the same vertical line.
Basically, each contact could have memory command but in some places of ladder
diagram conversion will be omitted due to the PLC operation convenience and capacity
limit. MPS command can be used for 8 continuous times and you can recognize this
command by the symbol “┬”.
8.
MRD command is used to read memory of divergent point. Because the logical status is
the same in the same horizontal line, it needs to read the status of original contact to keep
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
on analyzing other ladder diagram. You can recognize the command MRD by the symbol
“├”.
9.
MPP command is used to read the start status of the top level and pop it out from stack.
Because it is the last item of the horizontal line, it means the status of this horizontal line
is ending.
MPS
You can recognize this command by the symbol
MPS
“└”. Basically, that is all right to use the above
MRD
method to analyze but sometimes compiler will
MPP
MPP
omit the same outputs as shown at the right.
D.3.4 The Example for Designing Basic Program
„
Start, Stop and Latching
In the same occasions, it needs transient close button and transient open button to be start
and stop switch. Therefore, if you want to keep the action, you should design latching circuit.
There are several latching circuits in the following:
Example 1: the latching circuit for priority of stop
X2
Y1
X1
When start normally open contact X1=On, stop
normally contact X2＝Off, and Y1=On are set at
the same time, if X2=On, the coil Y1 will stop
acting. Therefore, it calls priority of stop.
Y1
Example 2: the latching circuit for priority of start
X1
X2
When start normally open contact X1=On, stop
normally contact X2＝Off and Y1=On (coil Y1 will
be active and latching) are valid at the same time, if
X2=On, coil Y1 will be active due to latched
contact. Therefore, it calls priority of start.
Y1
Y1
D-14
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Example 3: the latching circuit of SET and RST commands
Top priority of stop
X1
The figure at the right side is latching circuit that made
up of RST and SET command.
Y1
Y1
SET
RST
X2
It is top priority of stop when RST command is set
behind SET command. When executing PLC from up
to down, The coil Y1 is ON and coil Y1 will be OFF
when X1 and X2 act at the same time, therefore it calls
priority of stop.
Top priority of start
X2
Y1
Y1
RST
SET
It is top priority of start when SET command is set after
RST command. When X1 and X2 act at the same
time, Y1 is ON so it calls top priority of start.
X1
„
The common control circuit
Example 4: condition control
X1
X3
X1
X3
X2
Y1
Y2
Y1
X2
Y1
X4
X4
Y1
Y2
Y2
X1 and X3 can start/stop Y1 separately, X2 and X4 can start/stop Y2 separately and they are all
self latched circuit. Y1 is an element for Y2 to do AND function due to the normally open contact
connects to Y2 in series. Therefore, Y1 is the input of Y2 and Y2 is also the input of Y1.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Example 5: Interlock control
X1
X3
Y2
X1
X3
X2
Y1
Y2
Y1
X4
Y1
Y2
X2
Y2
Y1
X4
The figure above is the circuit of interlock control. Y1 and Y2 will act according to the start
contact X1 and X2. Y1 and Y2 will act not at the same time, once one of them acts and the
other won’t act. (This is called interlock.) Even if X1 and X2 are valid at the same time, Y1 and
Y2 won’t act at the same time due to up-to-down scan of ladder diagram. For this ladder
diagram, Y1 has higher priority than Y2.
Example 6: Sequential Control
Y2
X1
X3
X4
If add normally close contact Y2 into Y1
circuit to be an input for Y1 to do AND
function. (as shown in the left side) Y1 is an
input of Y2 and Y2 can stop Y1 after acting.
In this way, Y1 and Y2 can execute in
sequential.
Y1
Y2
Y1
X2
Y1
Y2
Example 7: Oscillating Circuit
The period of oscillating circuit is ΔT+ΔT
Y1
Y1
Y1
T
T
The figure above is a very simple ladder step diagram. When starting to scan Y1 normally
close contact, Y1 normally close contact is close due to the coil Y1 is OFF. Then it will scan
Y1 and the coil Y1 will be ON and output 1. In the next scan period to scan normally close
contact Y1, Y1 normally close contact will be open due to Y1 is ON. Finally, coil Y1 will be
OFF. The result of repeated scan, coil Y will output the vibrating pulse with cycle timeΔ
T(On)+ΔT(Off).
D-16
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
The vibrating circuitry of cycle time ΔT(On)+ΔT(Off):
X0
Y1
TMR
Y1
T0
Kn
X0
Y1
T0
nT
T
The figure above uses timer T0 to control coil Y1 to be ON. After Y1 is ON, timer T0 will be
closed at the next scan period and output Y1. The oscillating circuit will be shown as above. (n
is the setting of timer and it is decimal number. T is the base of timer. (clock period))
Example 8: Blinking Circuit
X0
T1
X0
T2
TMR
TMR
Y1
T1
T2
Kn1
Kn2
X0
Y1
n2
T
*
T1
T
n1
*
The figure above is common used oscillating circuit for indication light blinks or buzzer alarms. It
uses two timers to control On/OFF time of Y1 coil. If figure, n1 and n2 are timer setting of T1
and T2. T is the base of timer (clock period)
Example 9: Triggered Circuit
X0
M0
X0
M0
M0
Y1
Y1
T
Y1
M0
Y1
In figure above, the rising-edge differential command of X0 will make coil M0 to have a single
pulse of ΔT (a scan time). Y1 will be ON during this scan time. In the next scan time, coil M0
will be OFF, normally close M0 and normally close Y1 are all closed. However, coil Y1 will keep
on being ON and it will make coil Y1 to be OFF once a rising-edge comes after input X0 and coil
M0 is ON for a scan time. The timing chart is as shown above. This circuit usually executes
alternate two actions with an input. From above timing: when input X0 is a square wave of a
period T, output coil Y1 is square wave of a period 2T.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Example 10: Delay Circuit
X0
TMR T10 K1000
X0
Y1
T10
Y1
TB = 0.1 sec
100 seconds
When input X0 is ON, output coil Y1 will be ON at the same time due to the corresponding
normally close contact OFF makes timer T10 to be OFF. Output coil Y1 will be OFF after
delaying 100 seconds (K1000*0.1 seconds =100 seconds) once input X0 is OFF and T10 is
ON. Please refer to timing chart above.
Example 11: Output delay circuit, in the following example, the circuit is made up of two timers. No
matter input X0 is ON or OFF, output Y4 will be delay.
X0
TMR
Y4
T5
T6
K50
K30
X0
T5
5 seconds
T5
Y4
Y4
T6
X0
Y0
T6
TMR
3 seconds
Example12: Extend Timer Circuit
X0
In this circuit, the total delay time from input
X0 is close and output Y1 is ON= (n1+n2)* T.
where T is clock period.
TMR T11
TMR T12
Y1
Kn1
Kn2
T11
T12
X0
n1*
T
T11
n2*
T
T12
Y1
(n1+n2)*
T
D-18
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
D.4 PLC Devices
D.4.1 Summary of DVP-PLC Device Number
Items
Specifications
Remarks
Stored program, cyclic scan
system
Control Method
Batch processing (when END I/O refresh instruction is
I/O Processing Method
Execution Speed
instruction is executed)
available
Basic commands (minimum
0.24 us)
Application commands
(10 ~ hundreds us)
Including the Step
commands
Program Language
Program Capacity
Instruction, Ladder Logic, SFC
500 STEPS
SRAM + Battery
28 basic commands
Commands
45 commands
17 application
commands
Input/Output Contact
Input (X): 6, output (Y): 2
X0~X17, 16 points,
Correspond to external
input point
X
Y
External Input Relay
Total is
octal number system
32
Y0~Y17, 16 points,
points
Correspond to external
output point
External Output Relay
octal number system
M0~M159, 160
For general
Total is
points
Contacts can switch to
On/Off in program
M Auxiliary
192
M1000~M1031, 32
points
For special
points
When the timer
indicated by TMR
command attains the
setting, the T contact
with the same number
will be On.
Total is
T
Timer 100ms timer
T0~T15, 16 points
C0~C7, 8 points
16
points
Total is
8 points
16-bit count up for
general
When the counter
indicated by CNT
command attains the
setting, the C contact
with the same number
will be On.
1-phase input
32-bit
Counter
count
C
1-phase 2
inputs
Total is
1 point
up/down
high-
C235, 1 point (need
to use with PG card)
speed
counter
2-phase 2
inputs
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Items
Specifications
Remarks
When timer attains, the
contact of timer will be
On.
T
Present value of timer
T0~T15, 16 points
When timer attains, the
C
Present value of counter
For latched
C0~C7, 8-bit counter, 8 points contact of timer will be
On.
D0~D9, 10 points
Total is
Data
It can be memory area
for storing data.
For general
For special
D10~D29, 20 points
D
75
register
points
D1000~D1044, 45
points
K
H
Decimal
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
Hexadecimal
Communication port (for read/write
program)
RS485 (slave)
Analog input/output
Built-in 2 analog inputs and 1 analog output
Digital input/output card (A/D, D/A card)
Function extension module (optional)
D.4.2 Devices Functions
„
The Function of Input/output Contacts
The function of input contact X: input contact X reads input signal and enter PLC by
connecting with input equipment. It is unlimited usage times for A contact or B contact of
each input contact X in program. The On/Off of input contact X can be changed with the
On/Off of input equipment but can’t be changed by using peripheral equipment (WPLSoft).
„
The Function of Output Contact Y
The mission of output contact Y is to drive the load that connects to output contact Y by
sending On/Off signal. There are two kinds of output contact: one is relay and the other is
transistor. It is unlimited usage times for A or B contact of each output contact Y in program.
But there is number for output coil Y and it is recommended to use one time in program.
Otherwise, the output result will be decided by the circuit of last output Y with PLC program
scan method.
D-20
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
X0
The output of Y0 will be decided by circuit
1
Y0
Y0
2
○, i.e. decided by On/Off of X10.
Y0 is repeated
2
X10
D.4.3 Value, Constant [K] / [H]
K
H
Decimal
K-32,768 ~ K32,767 (16-bit operation)
Constant
Hexadecimal H0000 ~ HFFFF (16-bit operation)
There are five value types for DVP-PLC to use by the different control destination. The
following is the explanation of value types.
1.
Binary Number (BIN)
It uses binary system for the PLC internal operation or storage. The relative information of
binary system is in the following.
Bit
:
:
Bit is the basic unit of binary system, the status are 1 or 0.
Nibble
It is made up of continuous 4 bits, such as b3~b0. It can be used to represent
number 0~9 of decimal or 0~F of hexadecimal.
Byte
:
:
:
It is made up of continuous 2 nibbles, i.e. 8 bits, b7~b0. It can used to represent
00~FF of hexadecimal system.
Word
It is made up of continuous 2 bytes, i.e. 16 bits, b15~b0. It can used to represent
0000~FFFF of hexadecimal system.
Double
Word
It is made up of continuous 2 words, i.e. 32 bits, b31~b0. It can used to
represent 00000000~FFFFFFFF of hexadecimal system.
The relations among bit, nibble, byte, word, and double word of binary number are shown as
follows.
DW
Double Word
W1
W0
Word
Byte
BY3
BY2
BY1
BY0
NB7
NB6
NB5
NB4
NB3
NB2
NB1
NB0
Nibble
Bit
2.
Octal Number (OCT)
The numbers of external input and output terminal of DVP-PLC use octal number.
Example:
External input: X0~X7, X10~X17…(device number)
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
External output: Y0~Y7, Y10~Y17…(device number)
3.
Decimal Number (DEC)
The suitable time for decimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.
To be the setting value of timer T or counter C, such as TMR C0 K50. (K constant)
To be the device number of M, T, C and D. For example: M10, T30. (device number)
To be operand in application command, such as MOV K123 D0. (K constant)
„
„
„
4.
5.
BCD (Binary Code Decimal, BCD)
It shows a decimal number by a unit number or four bits so continuous 16 bits can use to
represent the four numbers of decimal number. BCD code is usually used to read the input
value of DIP switch or output value to 7-segment display to be display.
Hexadecimal Number (HEX)
The suitable time for hexadecimal number to use in DVP-PLC system.
To be operand in application command. For example: MOV H1A2B D0. (constant H)
„
Constant K:
In PLC, it is usually have K before constant to mean decimal number. For example, K100
means 100 in decimal number.
Exception:
The value that is made up of K and bit equipment X, Y, M, S will be bit, byte, word or
double word. For example, K2Y10, K4M100. K1 means a 4-bit data and K2~K4 can
be 8, 12 and 16-bit data separately.
Constant H:
In PLC, it is usually have H before constant to mean hexadecimal number. For example,
H100 means 100 in hexadecimal number.
D.4.4 The Function of Auxiliary Relay
There are output coil and A, B contacts in auxiliary relay M and output relay Y. It is unlimited
usage times in program. User can control loop by using auxiliary relay, but can’t drive
external load directly. There are two types divided by its characteristics.
1. Auxiliary relay for general : It will reset to Off when power loss during running. Its state will
be Off when power on after power loss.
2. Auxiliary relay for special : Each special auxiliary relay has its special function. Please
don’t use undefined auxiliary relay.
D.4.5 The Function of Timer
The unit of timer is 1ms, 10ms and 100ms. The count method is count up. The output coil
will be On when the present value of timer equals to the settings. The setting is K in decimal
number. Data register D can be also used as settings.
The real setting time of timer = unit of timer * settings
D-22
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
D.4.6 The Features and Functions of Counter
Features:
Item
16 bits counters
General
32 bits counters
High speed
Type
General
Count direction
Settings
Count up
0~32,767
Count up/down
-2,147,483,648~+2,147,483,647
Designate for
constant
Constant K or data register D Constant K or data register D (2 for designated)
Present value
change
Counter will stop when
attaining settings
Counter will keep on counting when attaining
settings
When count up attains settings, contact will be On
and latched.
When count attains settings,
contact will be On and
latched.
Output contact
When count down attains settings, contact will
reset to Off.
The present value will reset to 0 when RST command is executed and contact
will reset to Off.
Reset action
Present register
16 bits
32 bits
Act immediately when count
attains. It has no relation with
scan period.
After scanning,
act together.
Contact action
After scanning, act together.
Functions:
When pulse input signal of counter is from Off to On, the present value of counter equals to settings
and output coil is On. Settings are decimal system and data register D can also be used as settings.
16-bit counters C0~C7:
1.
Setting range of 16-bit counter is K0~K32,767. (K0 is the same as K1. output contact will
be On immediately at the first count.
2.
General counter will be clear when PLC is power loss. If counter is latched, it will
remember the value before power loss and keep on counting when power on after power
loss.
3.
If using MOV command, WPLSoft to send a value, which is large than setting to C0,
register, at the next time that X1 is from Off to On, C0 counter contact will be On and
present value will be set to the same as settings.
4.
5.
The setting of counter can use constant K or register D (not includes special data register
D1000~D1044) to be indirect setting.
If using constant K to be setting, it can only be positive number but if setting is data
register D, it can be positive/negative number. The next number that counter counts up
from 32,767 is -32,768.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Example:
LD
RST C0
LD X1
X0
X0
X1
C0
RST
CNT
Y0
C0
C0
K5
CNT C0 K5
LD C0
OUT Y0
1. When X0=On, RST command is
executed, C0 reset to 0 and
output contact reset to Off.
X0
X1
2. When X1 is from Off to On,
counter will count up (add 1).
5
4
settings
3. When counter C0 attains settings
K5, C0 contact is On and C0 =
setting =K5. C0 won’t accept X1
trigger signal and C0 remains
K5.
C0
present
value
3
2
1
0
0
Contacts Y0, C0
32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter C235:
1.
2.
Setting range of 32-bit high-speed addition/subtraction counter is :
K-2,147,483,648~K2,147,483,647.
The settings can be positive / negative numbers by using constant K or data register D
(special data register D1000~D1044 is not included). If using data register D, the setting
will occupy two continuous data register.
The total band width of high-speed counter that VFD-E supports is up to 30kHz and 500kHz for pulse
input.
D.4.7 Register Types
There are two types of register which sorts by characters in the following:
1.
2.
General
register
:
:
The data in register will be cleared to 0 when PLC switches from RUN
to STOP or power is off.
Special
register
Each special register has the special definition and purpose. It is used
to save system status, error messages, monitor state.
D-24
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
D.4.8 Special Auxiliary Relays
Special
M
Read(R)/
Write(W)
Function
Normally open contact (a contact). This contact is On when running and it is
On when the status is set to RUN.
M1000
M1001
M1002
M1003
R
Normally closed contact (b contact). This contact is Off in running and it is Off
when the status is set to RUN.
R
R
R
On only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get positive
pulse in the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.
Off only for 1 scan after RUN. Initial pulse is contact a. It will get negative
pulse in the RUN moment. Pulse width=scan period.
M1004 Reserved
--
R
R
R
--
M1005 Fault indication of the AC motor drives
M1006 Output frequency is 0
M1007 The operation direction of AC motor drives (FWD: 0, REV: 1)
M1008 Reserved
M1009 Reserved
--
M1010 Reserved
--
M1011 10ms clock pulse, 5ms On/5ms Off
M1012 100ms clock pulse, 50ms On / 50ms Off
M1013 1s clock pulse, 0.5s On / 0.5s Off
M1014 1min clock pulse, 30s On / 30s Off
M1015 Frequency attained
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
--
M1016 Parameter read/write error
M1017 Succeed to write parameter
M1018 Enable high-speed counter function (When M1028=On)
M1019 Reserved
M1020 Zero flag
M1021 Borrow flag
M1022 Carry flag
M1023 Divisor is 0
M1024 Reserved
M1025 RUN(ON) / STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive
R/W
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Special
M
Read(R)/
Write(W)
Function
M1026 The operation direction of the AC motor drive (FWD: OFF, REV: ON)
M1027 Reserved
R/W
--
M1028 Enable(ON)/disable(OFF) high-speed counter function
M1029 Clear the value of high-speed counter
M1030 Decide to count up(OFF)/count down(ON)
M1031 Reserved
R/W
R/W
R/W
--
D.4.9 Special Registers
Special D
Function
Read(R)/ Write(W)
D1000 Reserved
--
R
R
R
D1001 PLC firmware version
D1002 Program capacity
D1003 Checksum
D1004-
Reserved
D1009
--
D1010 Present scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
D1011 Minimum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
D1012 Maximum scan time (Unit: 0.1ms)
R
R
R
D1013-
Reserved
D1019
--
D1020 Output frequency
D1021 Output current
R
R
The ID of the extension card:
02 USB Card
03 12-Bit A/D (2CH) 12-Bit D/A (2CH)
D1022 04 Relay Card-2C
05 Relay Card-3A
R
06 3IN/3OUT Card
07 PG Card
D1023-
Reserved
D1024
--
D-26
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Special D
Function
Read(R)/ Write(W)
D1025 The present value of the high-speed counter C235 (low byte)
D1026 The present value of the high-speed counter C235 (high byte)
R
R
D1027 Frequency command of the PID control
R
R
The value of AVI (analog voltage input) 0-10V corresponds to 0-
D1028
1023
The value of ACI (analog current input) 4-20mA corresponds to 0-
D1029 1023 or the value of AVI2 (analog voltage input) 0-10V
corresponds to 0-1023
R
D1030 The value of V.R digital keypad 0-10V corresponds to 0-1023
R
--
D1031-
Reserved
D1035
D1036 PLC error code
R
D1037-
Reserved
D1039
--
D1040 Analog output value
R/W
--
D1041-
Reserved
D1042
User defined (when Pr.00.04 is set to 2, the register data will be
displayed as C xxx)
D1043
R/W
R/W
D1044 High-speed counter mode
D.4.10 Communication Addresses for Devices (only for PLC2 mode)
Device
Range
00–17 (octal)
00–17 (octal)
00-15
Type
Bit
Address (Hex)
0400-040F
0500-050F
0600-060F
0800-089F
0BE8-0C07
0E00-0E07
1000-101D
13E8-1414
X
Y
T
Bit
Bit/word
Bit
M
M
C
D
D
000-159
1000-1031
0-7
Bit
Bit/word
Word
Word
00-63
1000-1044
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
NOTE: when it is in PLC1 mode, the communication address will correspond to the parameter NOT
the device. For example, address 0400H will correspond to Pr.04.00 NOT X0.
D.4.11 Function Code (only for PLC2 mode)
Function Code
01
Description
Supported Devices
Y, M, T, C
Read coil status
02
03
05
Read input status
Read one data
X, Y, M, T, C
T, C, D
Force changing one coil status
Y, M, T, C
06
0F
Write in one data
T, C, D
Force changing multiple coil status
Y, M, T, C
10
Write in multiple data
T, C, D
D.5 Commands
D.5.1 Basic Commands
Commands
Function
Operands
LD
Load contact A
Load contact B
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
LDI
AND
ANI
Series connection with A contact
Series connection with B contact
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
OR
ORI
Parallel connection with A contact
Parallel connection with B contact
Series connects the circuit block
Parallel connects the circuit block
Save the operation result
ANB
ORB
MPS
MRD
--
--
--
--
--
Read the operation result (the pointer not moving)
MPP
INV
Read the result
Inverter the result
--
D-28
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
D.5.2 Output Commands
Commands
Function
Operands
Y, M
OUT
SET
RST
Drive coil
Action latched (ON)
Y, M
Clear the contacts or the registers
Y, M, T, C, D
D.5.3 Timer and Counters
Commands
Function
Operands
T-K or T-D
TMR
CNT
16-bit timer
16-bit counter
C-K or C-D
D.5.4 Main Control Commands
Commands
MC
Function
Operands
Connect the common series connection
N0~N7
N0~N7
contacts
Disconnect the common series connection
contacts
MCR
D.5.5 Rising-edge/falling-edge Detection Commands of Contact
Commands
LDP
Function
Operands
X, Y, M, T, C
Rising-edge detection operation starts
Falling-edge detection operation starts
Rising-edge detection series connection
Falling-edge detection series connection
Rising-edge detection parallel connection
Falling-edge detection parallel connection
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
X, Y, M, T, C
LDF
ANDP
ANDF
ORP
ORF
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
D.5.6 Rising-edge/falling-edge Output Commands
Commands
PLS
Function
Operands
Y, M
Rising-edge output
Falling-edge output
PLF
Y, M
D.5.7 End Command
Command
END
Function
Operands
none
Program end
D.5.8 Explanation for the Commands
Mnemonic
Function
LD
Load A contact
Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15
X0~X17
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
The LD command is used on the A contact that has its start from the left BUS or the A contact that is
the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present contents, and at the same
time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram
Command code
Operation
LD
X0
Load contact A of X0
X0 X1
Y1
AND
X1
Connect to contact A of X1
in series
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
Function
Load B contact
Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15
LDI
X0~X17
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
D-30
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Explanations:
The LDI command is used on the B contact that has its start from the left BUS or the B contact that is
the start of a contact circuit. Function of the command is to save present contents, and at the same
time, save the acquired contact status into the accumulative register.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
X0
X1
LDI
X0
X1
Y1
Load contact B of X0
Y1
AND
OUT
Connect to contact A of X1 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
Function
Series connection- A contact
AND
X0~X17
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
The AND command is used in the series connection of A contact. The function of the command is to
readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first, and then to perform the “AND”
calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the
accumulative register.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
X1 X0
LDI
X1
X0
Y1
Load contact B of X1
Y1
AND
OUT
Connect to contact A of X0 in series
Drive Y1 coil
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Mnemonic
Function
ANI
Series connection- B contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
The ANI command is used in the series connection of B contact. The function of the command is to
readout the status of present specific series connection contacts first, and then to perform the “AND”
calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the
accumulative register.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code:
Operation:
LD
X1
Load contact A of X1
X1
X0
Y1
ANI
X0
Connect to contact B of
X0 in series
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
Function
OR
Parallel connection- A contact
X0~X17
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
The OR command is used in the parallel connection of A contact. The function of the command is to
readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and then to perform the “OR”
calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the
accumulative register.
D-32
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
X0
X1
LD
X0
Load contact A of X0
Y1
OR
X1
Connect to contact A of
X1 in parallel
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
Function
Parallel connection- B contact
ORI
X0~X17
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
The ORI command is used in the parallel connection of B contact. The function of the command is to
readout the status of present specific series connection contacts, and then to perform the “OR”
calculation with the logic calculation result before the contacts, thereafter, saving the result into the
accumulative register.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
X0
Command code: Operation:
LD
X1
Load contact A of X0
Y1
ORI
X1
Connect to contact B of
X1 in parallel
X1
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
ANB
Function
Series connection (Multiple Circuits)
None
Operand
Explanations:
To perform the “ANB” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the
accumulative register.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
X0
X1
LD
X0
Load contact A of X0
ANB
Y1
ORI X2
Connect to contact B of X2 in
parallel
X2
X3
Block A Block B
LDI
OR
X1
X3
Load contact B of X1
Connect to contact A of X3 in
parallel
ANB
Connect circuit block in series
Drive Y1 coil
OUT Y1
Mnemonic
Function
ORB
Parallel connection (Multiple circuits)
None
Operand
Explanations:
To perform the “OR” calculation between the previous reserved logic results and contents of the
accumulative register.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
Block A
LD
X0
X1
Load contact A of X0
X0
X2
X1
X3
Y1
ANI
Connect to contact B of X1 in
series
ORB
Block B
LDI
X2
X3
Load contact B of X2
AND
Connect to contact A of X3 in
series
ORB
Connect circuit block in parallel
Drive Y1 coil
OUT
Y1
Mnemonic
MPS
Function
Store the current result of the internal PLC operations
None
Operand
D-34
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Explanations:
To save contents of the accumulative register into the operation result. (the result operation pointer
pluses 1)
Mnemonic
MRD
Function
Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations
None
Operand
Explanations:
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the pointer of operation result
doesn’t move)
Mnemonic
MPP
Function
Reads the current result of the internal PLC operations
None
Operand
Explanations:
Reading content of the operation result to the accumulative register. (the stack pointer will decrease
1)
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
LD
X0
Load contact A of X0
Save in stack
MPS
X0
X1
X2
MPS
AND
Y1
M0
X1
Y1
Connect to contact A of X1 in
series
MRD
MPP
OUT
Drive Y1 coil
Y2
MRD
Read from the stack (without
moving pointer)
END
AND
X2
Connect to contact A of X2 in
series
OUT
MPP
OUT
END
M0
Drive M0 coil
Read from the stack
Drive Y2 coil
Y2
End program
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Mnemonic
INV
Function
Inverting Operation
None
Operand
Explanations:
Inverting the operation result and use the new data as an operation result.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
X0
Command code: Operation:
LD
X0
Load A contact of X0
Inverting the operation result
Drive Y1 coil
Y1
INV
OUT Y1
Mnemonic
Function
Output coil
OUT
X0~X17
--
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
--
C0~C7
--
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
Explanations:
Output the logic calculation result before the OUT command to specific device.
Motion of coil contact
OUT command
Operation
Contact
result
Coil
A contact (normally open)
Non-continuity
B contact (normally closed)
Continuity
FALSE
TRUE
OFF
ON
Continuity
Non-continuity
D-36
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
LDI
X0
X1
Load contact B of X0
X0
X1
Y1
AND
Connect to contact A of X1 in
series
OUT
Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
Function
Latch (ON)
SET
X0~X17
--
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
--
C0~C7
--
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
Explanations:
When the SET command is driven, its specific device is set to be “ON,” which will keep “ON” whether
the SET command is still driven. You can use the RST command to set the device to “OFF”.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code:
Operation:
X0
Y0
LD
X0
Y0
Y1
Load contact A of X0
Connect to contact B of Y0 in series
Y1 latch (ON)
SET
Y1
ANI
SET
Mnemonic
Function
Clear the contacts or the registers
RST
X0~X17
--
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Explanations:
When the RST command is driven, motion of its specific device is as follows:
Device
Status
Y, M
Coil and contact will be set to “OFF”.
Present values of the timer or counter
will be set to 0, and the coil and contact
will be set to “OFF.”
T, C
D
The content value will be set to 0.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
X0
Command code: Operation:
RST
Y5
LD
X0
Load contact A of X0
Clear contact Y5
RST Y5
Mnemonic
Function
16-bit timer
TMR
T-K
T-D
T0~T15, K0~K32,767
T0~T15, D0~D29
Operand
Explanations:
When TMR command is executed, the specific coil of timer is ON and timer will start to count. When
the setting value of timer is attained (counting value >= setting value), the contact will be as following:
NO(Normally Open) contact
NC(Normally Closed) contact
Open collector
Close collector
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
X0
LD
X0
Load contact A of X0 T5 timer
TMR
T5
K1000
TMR T5 K1000 Setting is K1000
D-38
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Mnemonic
Function
CNT
16-bit counter
C-K
C-D
C0~C7, K0~K32,767
C0~C7, D0~D29
Operand
Explanations:
1.
When the CNT command is executed from OFFÆON, which means that the counter coil
is driven, and 1 should thus be added to the counter’s value; when the counter achieved
specific set value (value of counter = the setting value), motion of the contact is as follows:
NO(Normally Open) contact
NC(Normally Closed) contact
Continuity
Non-continuity
2.
If there is counting pulse input after counting is attained, the contacts and the counting
values will be unchanged. To re-count or to conduct the CLEAR motion, please use the
RST command.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
LD X0 Load contact A of X0 C2 counter
X0
CNT
C20
K100
CNT C2 K100 Setting is K100
Mnemonic
MC / MCR
Operand
Function
Master control Start/Reset
N0~N7
Explanations:
1.
MC is the main-control start command. When the MC command is executed, the
execution of commands between MC and MCR will not be interrupted. When MC
command is OFF, the motion of the commands that between MC and MCR is described
as follows:
The counting value is set back to zero, the coil and the contact
are both turned OFF
Timer
The coil is OFF, and the timer value and the contact stay at their
present condition
Accumulative timer
The counting value is back to zero. Both coil and contact are
turned OFF.
Subroutine timer
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
The coil is OFF, and the counting value and the contact stay at
their present condition
Counter
Coils driven up by the OUT
command
All turned OFF
Devices driven up by the
SET and RST commands
Stay at present condition
All of them are not acted , but the nest loop FOR-NEXT
command will still be executed for times defined by users even
though the MC-MCR commands is OFF.
Application commands
2.
3.
MCR is the main-control ending command that is placed at the end of the main-control
program and there should not be any contact commands prior to the MCR command.
Commands of the MC-MCR main-control program supports the nest program structure,
with 8 layers as its greatest. Please use the commands in order from N0~ N7, and refer to
the following:
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
X0
X1
X2
X3
LD
X0
N0
Load A contact of X0
MC
Y0
N0
N1
MC
Enable N0 common series
connection contact
LD
X1
Load A contact of X1
Drive Y0 coil
OUT Y0
:
MC
Y1
LD
X2
Load A contact of X2
MC
N1
Enable N1 common series
connection contact
MCR
MCR
MC
N1
N0
N0
LD
X3
Load A contact of X3
Drive Y1 coil
OUT Y1
:
X10
X11
MCR N1
Disable N1 common series
connection contact
Y10
:
MCR
N0
MCR N0
Disable N0 common series
connection contact
:
LD
X10
N0
Load A contact of X10
MC
Enable N0 common series
connection contact
D-40
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
LD
X11
Load A contact of X11
OUT Y10
Drive Y10 coil
:
MCR N0
Disable N0 common series
connection contact
Mnemonic
Function
LDP
Rising-edge detection operation
X0~X17
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
Usage of the LDP command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is used to
reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the acquired contact
rising-edge into the accumulative register.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
LDP X0
AND X1
OUT Y1
Start X0 rising-edge detection
X0
X1
Y1
Series connection A contact of X1
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
Function
Falling-edge detection operation
LDF
X0~X17
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
Usage of the LDF command is the same as the LD command, but the motion is different. It is used to
reserve present contents and at the same time, saving the detection status of the acquired contact
falling-edge into the accumulative register.
Program Example:
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
LDF X0
AND X1
OUT Y1
Start X0 falling-edge detection
X0
X1
Y1
Series connection A contact of X1
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
Function
ANDP
Rising-edge series connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
ANDP command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ rising-edge detection.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
X0 X1
Command code: Operation:
LD X0 Load A contact of X0
Y1
ANDP X1
X1 rising-edge detection in series connection
Drive Y1 coil
OUT Y1
Mnemonic
Function
ANDF
Falling-edge series connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
ANDF command is used in the series connection of the contacts’ falling-edge detection.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
X0 X1
Command code: Operation:
LD X0 Load A contact of X0
Y1
ANDF X1
X1 falling-edge detection in series
connection
OUT Y1
Drive Y1 coil
D-42
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Mnemonic
Function
ORP
Rising-edge parallel connection
Y0~Y17 M0~M159 T0~15
X0~X17
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s rising-edge detection.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
X0
Command code: Operation:
LD
X0
Load A contact of X0
Y1
ORP X1
X1 rising-edge detection in parallel
connection
X1
OUT Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Mnemonic
Function
ORF
Falling-edge parallel connection
X0~X17
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
C0~C7
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
9
9
9
Explanations:
The ORP commands are used in the parallel connection of the contact’s falling-edge detection.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
X0
Command code: Operation:
LD
X0
Load A contact of X0
Y1
ORF X1
X1 falling-edge detection in parallel
connection
X1
OUT Y1
Drive Y1 coil
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Mnemonic
Function
PLS
Rising-edge output
X0~X17
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
--
C0~C7
--
D0~D29
--
Operand
--
9
9
Explanations:
When X0=OFF→ON (rising-edge trigger), PLS command will be executed and M0 will send the
pulse of one time which the length is a scan time.
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
X0
Command code: Operation:
LD
PLS M0
LD M0
X0
Load A contact of X0
M0 rising-edge output
Load the contact A of M0
Y0 latched (ON)
PLS
SET
M0
Y0
M0
SET Y0
Timing Diagram:
X0
a scan time
M0
Y0
Mnemonic
Function
PLF
Falling-edge output
X0~X17
--
Y0~Y17 M0~M159
T0~15
--
C0~C7
--
D0~D29
--
Operand
9
9
Explanations:
When X0= ON→OFF (falling-edge trigger), PLF command will be executed and M0 will send the
pulse of one time which the length is the time for scan one time.
D-44
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Program Example:
Ladder diagram:
Command code: Operation:
X0
LD
PLF M0
LD M0
SET Y0
X0
Load A contact of X0
M0 falling-edge output
Load the contact A of M0
Y0 latched (ON)
M0
Y0
PLF
SET
M0
Timing Diagram:
X0
a scan time
M0
Y0
Mnemonic
END
Function
Program End
None
Operand
Explanations:
It needs to add the END command at the end of ladder diagram program or command program. PLC
will scan from address o to END command, after executing it will return to address 0 to scan again.
D.5.9 Description of the Application Commands
Mnemonic
Codes
Steps
P
API
Function
Command
16 bits 32 bits
16-bit 32-bit
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
10
11
12
15
CMP
ZCP
--
--
--
--
Compare
7
9
5
7
7
--
--
--
--
--
Zone compare
Data Move
Transmission
Comparison
MOV
BMOV
Block move
Four
Perform the addition of
BIN data
ꢁ
ꢁ
20
21
ADD
SUB
--
--
Fundamental
Operations of
Arithmetic
Perform the subtraction
of BIN data
7
--
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Mnemonic
Codes
Steps
P
API
22
Function
Command
16 bits 32 bits
16-bit 32-bit
Perform the
multiplication of BIN
data
7
--
ꢁ
MUL
--
Perform the division of
BIN data
7
3
3
--
--
--
ꢁ
ꢁ
ꢁ
23
24
25
DIV
INC
--
--
--
Perform the addition of
1
Perform the subtraction
of 1
DEC
ꢁ
ꢁ
30
31
ROR
ROL
--
--
Rotate to the right
Rotate to the left
5
5
--
--
Rotation and
Displacement
--
High speed counter
enable
13
53
--
DHSCS
X
ꢁ
ꢁ
Control PID parameters
of inverter
5
5
--
--
139
140
FPID
FREQ
--
--
Special
command for
AC motor
drive
Control frequency of
inverter
ꢁ
ꢁ
141
142
RPR
--
--
Read the parameter
Write the parameter
9
7
--
--
WPR
D.5.10 Explanation for the Application Commands
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
10
CMP
P
S1, S2, D
Compare
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
X
Y
M
K
*
H
*
T
*
C
*
D
*
CMP, CMPP: 7 steps
S1
S2
D
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Operands:
S1: Comparison Value 1 S2: Comparison Value 2 D: Comparison result
D-46
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Explanations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices.
See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
The contents in S1 and S2 are compared and the result will be stored in D.
The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed
binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction, the comparison will regard the value as
negative binary values.
Program Example:
1.
2.
Designate device Y0, and operand D automatically occupies Y0, Y1, and Y2.
When X10 = On, CMP instruction will be executed and one of Y0, Y1, and Y2 will be On.
When X10 = Off, CMP instruction will not be executed and Y0, Y1, and Y2 remain their
status before X10 = Off.
3.
If the user need to obtain a comparison result with ≥ ≤, and ≠, make a series parallel
connection between Y0 ~ Y2.
X10
CMP K10 D10
If K10>D10, Y0 = On
If K10=D10, Y1 = On
Y0
Y0
Y1
Y2
If K10<D10, Y2= On
4.
To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.
X10 X10
RST
RST
RST
ZRST
M0
M0
M2
M1
M2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
11
ZCP
P
S1, S2, S, D
Zone Compare
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Y M
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
ZCP, ZCPP: 9 steps
X
K
*
H
*
T
*
C
*
D
*
S1
S2
S
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
D
*
*
Operands:
S1: Lower bound of zone comparison S2: Upper bound of zone comparison S: Comparison value
D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The content in S1 should be smaller than the content in S2.
Operand D occupies 3 consecutive devices.
See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
S is compared with its S1 S2 and the result is stored in D.
When S1 > S2, the instruction performs comparison by using S1 as the lower/upper
bound.
6.
The two comparison values are compared algebraically and the two values are signed
binary values. When b15 = 1 in 16-bit instruction or b31 = 1 in 32-bit instruction, the
comparison will regard the value as negative binary values.
Program Example:
1.
2.
Designate device M0, and operand D automatically occupies M0, M1 and M2.
When X0 = On, ZCP instruction will be executed and one of M0, M1, and M2 will be On.
When X10 = Off, ZCP instruction will not be executed and M0, M1, and M2 remain their
status before X0 = Off.
D-48
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
X0
ZCP K10 K100 C10
M0
M0
M1
M2
If C10 < K10, M0 = On
If K10 < C10 < K100, M1 = On
=
=
If C10 > K100, M2 = On
3.
To clear the comparison result, use RST or ZRST instruction.
X0
X0
RST
RST
RST
ZRST
M0
M1
M0
M2
M2
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
Move
12
MOV
P
S, D
Type
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
OP
X
Y
M
K
*
H
*
T
*
C
*
D
*
MOV, MOVP: 5 steps
S
D
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Operands:
S: Source of data D: Destination of data
Explanations:
1.
2.
See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
When this instruction is executed, the content of S will be moved directly to D. When this
instruction is not executed, the content of D remains unchanged.
Program Example:
MOV instruction has to be adopted in the moving of 16-bit data.
1.
When X0 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X0 = On, the value K10 will
be moved to D10 data register.
2.
When X1 = Off, the content in D10 will remain unchanged. If X1 = On, the present value
T0 will be moved to D10 data register.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
X0
MOV K10
D0
X1
MOV
T0 D10
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
Block Move
15
BMOV
P
S, D, n
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
BMOV, BMOVP: 7 steps
X
Y
M
K
*
H
*
T
*
C
*
D
*
S
D
n
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Operands:
S: Start of source devices D: Start of destination devices n: Number of data to be moved
Explanations:
1.
2.
3.
Range of n: 1 ~ 512
See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
The contents in n registers starting from the device designated by S will be moved to n
registers starting from the device designated by D. If n exceeds the actual number of
available source devices, only the devices that fall within the valid range will be used.
Program Example 1:
When X10 = On, the contents in registers D0 ~ D3 will be moved to the 4 registers D20 ~ D23.
X10
D0
D1
D20
D21
D20
K4
n=4
D2
D3
D22
D23
Program Example 2:
Assume the bit devices KnX, KnY, KnM and KnS are designated for moving, the number of digits of
S and D has to be the same, i.e. their n has to be the same.
D-50
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
M1000
M0
M1
D0
D20
K4
M2
M3
M4
M5
n=3
M6
M7
M8
M9
Y10
Y11
Y12
Y13
M10
M11
Program Example 3:
To avoid coincidence of the device numbers to be moved designated by the two operands and cause
confusion, please be aware of the arrangement on the designated device numbers.
When S > D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 1→2→3
X10
1
2
3
D20
D21
D22
D19
D20
D21
BMOV
D19
K3
D20
When S < D, the BMOV command is processed in the order as 3→2→1
X11
3
2
D10
D11
D12
D11
D12
D13
BMOV
D10 D11
K3
1
API
20
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
ADD
P
S1, S2, D
Addition
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
Program Steps
ADD, ADDP: 7 steps
X
Y
M
K
H
KnX KnY KnM
T
C
D
S1
S2
D
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Operands:
S1: Summand S2: Addend D: Sum
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Explanations:
1.
2.
3.
See the specifications of each model for their range of use.
This instruction adds S1 and S2 in BIN format and store the result in D.
The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic addition, e.g.
3 + (-9) = -6.
4.
Flag changes in binary addition
16-bit command:
A. If the operation result ＝ 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
B. If the operation result ＜ -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
C. If the operation result ＞ 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
Program Example 1:
16-bit command:
When X0 = On, the content in D0 will plus the content in D10 and the sum will be stored in D20.
X0
ADD
D0
D10
D20
Remarks:
Flags and the positive/negative sign of the values:
Zero flag
Zero flag
32,767
16 bit: Zero flag
-2, -1, 0 -32,768
-1,
0
1
0
1
2
The highest bit
of the data
= 0 (positive)
The highest bit
of the data
= 1 (negative)
Borrow flag
Carry flag
32 bit: Zero flag
Zero flag
Zero flag
2,147,483,647
-2, -1, 0 -2,147,483,648
-1,
0
1
0
1
2
The highest bit
of the data
= 1 (negative)
The highest bit
of the data
= 0 (positive)
Borrow flag
Carry flag
D-52
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
21
SUB
P
S1, S2, D
Subtraction
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
X
Y
M
K
*
H
*
T
*
C
*
D
*
SUB, SUBP: 7 steps
DSUB, DSUBP: 13 steps
S1
S2
D
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Operands:
S1: Minuend S2: Subtrahend D: Remainder
Explanations:
1.
2.
3.
This instruction subtracts S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D.
The highest bit is symbolic bit 0 (+) and 1 (-), which is suitable for algebraic subtraction.
Flag changes in binary subtraction
In 16-bit instruction:
A. If the operation result ＝ 0, zero flag M1020 = On.
B. If the operation result ＜ -32,768, borrow flag M1021 = On.
C. If the operation result ＞ 32,767, carry flag M1022 = On.
Program Example:
In 16-bit BIN subtraction:
When X0 = On, the content in D0 will minus the content in D10 and the remainder will be stored in
D20.
X0
SUB
D0
D10
D20
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
22
MUL
P
S1, S2, D
Multiplication
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
MUL, DMULP: 7 steps
X
Y
M
K
*
H
*
T
*
C
*
D
*
S1
S2
D
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Operands:
S1: Multiplicand S2: Multiplicator D: Product
Explanations:
1.
2.
In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
This instruction multiplies S1 by S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be careful
with the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and 32-bit operations.
16-bit command:
S1
S2
D
+1
D
b15..........b0
b15..........b0
b31..........b16b15..............b0
X
=
b31 is a symbol bit (b15 of D+1)
b15 is a symbol bit
b15 is a symbol bit
Symbol bit = 0 refers to a positive value.
Symbol bit = 1 refers to a negative value.
When D serves as a bit device, it can designate K1 ~ K4 and construct a 16-bit result, occupying
consecutive 2 groups of 16-bit data.
Program Example:
The 16-bit D0 is multiplied by the 16-bit D10 and brings forth a 32-bit product. The higher 16 bits are
stored in D21 and the lower 16-bit are stored in D20. On/Off of the most left bit indicates the
positive/negative status of the result value.
X0
MUL
MUL
D0
D0
D10
D10
D20
K8M0
D-54
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
23
DIV
P
S1, S2, D
Division
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
X
Y
M
K
*
H
*
T
*
C
*
D
*
DIV, DIVP: 7 steps
S1
S2
D
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Operands:
S1: Dividend S2: Divisor D: Quotient and remainder
Explanations:
1.
2.
In 16-bit instruction, D occupies 2 consecutive devices.
This instruction divides S1 and S2 in BIN format and stores the result in D. Be careful with
the positive/negative signs of S1, S2 and D when doing 16-bit and 32-bit operations.
16-bit instruction:
Remainder
Quotient
+1
/
=
Program Example:
When X0 = On, D0 will be divided by D10 and the quotient will be stored in D20 and remainder in
D21. On/Off of the highest bit indicates the positive/negative status of the result value.
X0
DIV
D0
D10
D20
D0
D10
K4Y0
DIV
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
24
INC
P
D
Increment
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
INC, INCP: 3 steps
X
Y
M
K
H
T
*
C
*
D
*
D
*
*
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Operands:
D: Destination device
Explanations:
1.
If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the designated device D will
plus “1” in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed.
This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (INCP).
In 16-bit operation, 32,767 pluses 1 and obtains -32,768. In 32-bit operation,
2,147,483,647 pluses 1 and obtains -2,147,483,648.
2.
3.
Program Example:
When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 pluses 1 automatically.
X0
INCP
D0
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
25
DEC
P
D
Decrement
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
Program Steps
DEC, DECP: 3 steps
X
Y
M
K
H
KnX KnY KnM
T
*
C
*
D
*
D
*
*
Operands:
D: Destination
Explanations:
1.
If the instruction is not a pulse execution one, the content in the designated device D will
minus “1” in every scan period whenever the instruction is executed.
This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (DECP).
2.
3.
In 16-bit operation, -32,768 minuses 1 and obtains 32,767. In 32-bit operation, -
2,147,483,648 minuses 1 and obtains 2,147,483,647.
Program Example:
When X0 goes from Off to On, the content in D0 minuses 1 automatically.
X0
DECP
D0
D-56
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
30
ROR
P
D, n
Rotate to the Right
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
X
Y
M
K
H
T
*
C
*
D
*
ROR, RORP: 5 steps
D
n
*
*
*
*
Operands:
D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
Explanations:
1.
2.
This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the right for n bits.
This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (RORP).
Program Example:
When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to the right, as shown
in the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022.
X0
RORP
Rotate to the right
D10
K4
upper bit
lower bit
Carry
flag
D10
D10
0
1
1
1 1 0 1
1
0
1 0 0
0
1
0
1
16 bits
After one rotation
to the right
upper bit
lower bit
0
0
*
1
0
1 0 1 1
1
1
0 1
1
0
1 0
0
Carry
flag
API
Mnemonic
ROL
Operands
Function
31
P
D, n
Rotate to the Left
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
ROL, ROLP: 5 steps
X
Y
M
K
H
T
*
C
*
D
*
D
n
*
*
*
*
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Operands:
D: Device to be rotated n: Number of bits to be rotated in 1 rotation
Explanations:
1.
2.
This instruction rotates the device content designated by D to the left for n bits.
This instruction adopts pulse execution instructions (ROLP).
Program Example:
When X0 goes from Off to On, the 16 bits (4 bits as a group) in D10 will rotate to the left, as shown in
the figure below. The bit marked with ※ will be sent to carry flag M1022.
X0
D10
K4
Rotate to the left
upper bit
1 1 1 1
lower bit
1
1
1
1
0
0 0 0
0
0
0
0
D10
D10
Carry
flag
16 bits
After one rotation
to the left
upper bit
1 1 1 0 0 0
lower bit
1 1
1
1
0
0
0 0
0
1
1
Carry
flag
D.5.11 Special Application Commands for the AC Motor Drive
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
53
DHSCS
S1, S2, D
Compare (for high-speed counter)
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
DHSCS: 13 steps
X
Y
M
K
H
T
C
D
S1
S2
D
*
*
*
*
*
*
* * *
Operands:
S1: Comparison Value S2: High-speed counter C235 D: Comparison result
Explanations:
1.
2.
It needs optional PG card to receive external input pulse.
To count automatically, please set the target value by using DHSCS command and set
M1028=On. The counter C235 will be ON when the count number = target value. If you
want to clear C235, please set M1029=ON.
D-58
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
3.
4.
Please use rising-edge/falling-edge command, such as LDP/LDF, for the contact
condition. Please notice that error may occur when using contact A/B for the contact
condition.
There are three input modes for high-speed counter in the following can be set by D1044.
A-B phase mode(4 times frequency )(D1044=0): user can input the A and B pulse for
„
counting. Make sure that
,
and GND are grounding.
A B
„
„
Pulse + signal mode(D1044=1): user can count by pulse input or signal. A is for pulse and
B is for signal. Make sure that and GND are grounding.
,
A B
Pulse + flag mode(D1044=2): user can count by M1030. Only A is needed for this mode
and make sure that , and GND are grounding.
A
Program Example:
1.
Assume that when M100=ON, it is set to A-B phase mode. When M101=ON, it is set to
pulse+signal mode. When M102=ON, it is set to pulse+flag mode.
M1030 is used to set to count up (OFF) and count down (ON).
If M0 goes from OFF to ON, DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of high-
speed counter. When C235 goes from H’2 to H’3 or from H’4 to H’3, M3 will be always be
ON.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
If M1 goes from OFF to ON, DHSCS command starts to execute the comparison of high-
speed counter. When C235 goes from H’1004F to H’10050 or from H’10051 to H’10050,
M2 will be always be ON.
M1028: it is used to enable(ON)/disable(OFF) the high-speed counter function. M1029: it
is used to clear the high-speed counter. M1018: it is used to start high-speed counter
function. (when M1028 is ON).
D1025: the low word of high-speed counter C235. D1026: the high word of high-speed
counter C235.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
M100
MOV
MOV
K0
K1
K2
D1044
D1044
D1044
M101
M102
MOV
M102
M1030
M0 M1018
M1 M1018
DHSCS H10050 C235
M2
M3
DHSCS
Y1
C235
H3
M2
M3
M10
M11
M1028
M1029
M1000
D1025
D1026
D0
D1
MOV
MOV
END
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
139
RPR
P
S1, S2
Read the AC motor drive’s parameters
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
X
Y
M
K
H
T
C
D
*
RPR, RPRP: 5 steps
S1
S2
*
*
*
D-60
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Operands:
S1: Data address for reading S2: Register that saves the read data
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
140
WPR
P
S1, S2
Write the AC motor drive’s parameters
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
X
Y
M
K
H
*
T
C
D
*
WPR, WPRP: 5 steps
S1
S2
*
*
*
*
Operands:
S1: Data address for writing S2: Register that saves the written data
Program Example:
1.
Assume that it will write the data in address H2100 of the VFD-E into D0 and H2101 into
D1.
2.
3.
When M0=ON, it will write the data in D10 to the address H2001 of the VFD-E.
When M1=ON, it will write the data in H2 to the address H2000 of the VFD-E, i.e. start the
AC motor drive.
4.
5.
When M2=ON, it will write the data in H1 to the address H2000 of the VFD-E, i.e. stop the
AC motor drive.
When data is written successfully, M1017 will be ON.
M1000
RPR
RPR
H2100
H2101
D10
D0
D1
M0
M1
WPR
WPRP
H2001
H2000
H2000
H2
M2
WPRP
Y0
H1
M1017
END
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
API
Mnemonic
Operands
Function
141
FPID
P
S1, S2, S3, S4
PID control for the AC motor drive
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
X
Y
M
K
*
*
*
*
H
*
*
*
*
T
C
D
*
*
*
*
FPID, FPIDP: 9 steps
S1
S2
S3
S4
Operands:
S1: PID Set Point Selection(0-4), S2: Proportional gain P (0-100), S3: Integral Time I (0-10000), S4:
Derivative control D (0-100)
Explanation:
1.
This command FPID can control the PID parameters of the AC motor drive directly,
including Pr.10.00 PID set point selection, Pr.10.02 Proportional gain (P), Pr.10.03
Integral time (I) and Pr.10.04 Derivative control (D)
Program Example:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Assume that when M0=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=0, S3=1 (unit:
0.01 seconds) and S4=1 (unit: 0.01 seconds).
Assume that when M1=ON, S1 is set to 0 (PID function is disabled), S2=1 (unit: 0.01),
S3=0 and S4=0.
Assume that when M2=ON, S1 is set to 1(frequency is inputted by digital keypad), S2=1
(unit: 0.01), S3=0 and S4=0.
D1027: frequency command controlled by PID.
D-62
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
M0
M1
FPID
FPID
FPID
H0
H0
H0
H1
H1
H0
H0
H1
H0
H0
M2
H1
H1
D1
M1000
D1027
MOV
END
API
Mnemonic
Operands
S1, S2, S3
Function
142
FREQ
P
Operation control of the AC motor drive
Type
OP
Bit Devices
Word devices
KnX KnY KnM
Program Steps
X
Y
M
K
*
*
*
H
*
*
*
T
C
D
*
*
*
FREQ, FREQP: 7 steps
S1
S2
S3
Operands:
S1: frequency command, S2: acceleration time, S3: deceleration time
Explanation:
1.
This command can control frequency command, acceleration time and deceleration time
of the AC motor drive. Please use M1025 to RUN(ON)/STOP(OFF) the AC motor drive
and use M1025 to control the operation direction: FWD(ON)/REV(OFF).
Program Example:
1.
2.
3.
M1025: RUN(ON)/STOP(Off) the AC motor drive. M1026: operation direction of the AC
motor drive – FWD(OFF)/REV(ON). M1015: frequency is reached.
When M10=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K300(3.00Hz) and
acceleration/deceleration time is 0.
When M11=ON, setting frequency command of the AC motor drive to K3000(30.00Hz),
acceleration time is 50 and deceleration time is 60.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
M1000
M1025
M1026
M11
M10
M11
M11
M10
FREQP
K300
K0
K0
K3000
K50
K60
FREQ
END
D-64
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
D.6 Error Code
Code
ID
Description
Corrective Actions
Check if the program is error and
download the program again
PLod
20 Data write error
Power on again and download the
program again
PLSv
PLdA
PLFn
21 Data write error when executing
1.
2.
Please upload again.
Return to the factory if it occurs
continuously
22 Program upload error
Check if the program is error and
download program again
Command error when download
program
23
Power on again and download program
again
Program capacity exceeds
memory capacity
PLor
PLFF
PLSn
30
31 Command error when executing
32 Check sum error
There is no “END” command in
the program
PLEd
PLCr
33
The command MC is continuous
used more than nine times
34
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
D-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
This page intentionally left blank
D-66
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E CANopen Function
The built-in CANopen function is a kind of remote control. Master can control the AC motor drive by
using CANopen protocol. CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol. It provides standardized
communication objects, including real-time data (Process Data Objects, PDO), configuration data
(Service Data Objects, SDO), and special functions (Time Stamp, Sync message, and Emergency
message). And it also has network management data, including Boot-up message, NMT message,
and Error Control message. Refer to CiA website http://www.can-cia.org/ for details.
Delta CANopen supports functions:
„
„
„
„
Support CAN2.0A Protocol;
Support CANopen DS301 V4.02;
Support DSP-402 V2.0.
Delta CANopen supports services:
„
„
PDO (Process Data Objects): PDO1~ PDO2
SDO (Service Data Object):
Initiate SDO Download;
Initiate SDO Upload;
Abort SDO;
SDO message can be used to configure the slave node and access the Object Dictionary
in every node.
„
„
SOP (Special Object Protocol):
Support default COB-ID in Predefined Master/Slave Connection Set in DS301 V4.02;
Support SYNC service;
Support Emergency service.
NMT (Network Management):
Support NMT module control;
Support NMT Error control;
Support Boot-up.
Delta CANopen doesn’t support service:
„
„
Time Stamp service
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
E-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E CANopen Function |
E.1 Overview
E.1.1 CANopen Protocol
CANopen is a CAN-based higher layer protocol, and was designed for motion-oriented
machine control networks, such as handling systems. Version 4 of CANopen (CiA DS301) is
standardized as EN50325-4. The CANopen specifications cover application layer and
communication profile (CiA DS301), as well as a framework for programmable devices (CiA
302), recommendations for cables and connectors (CiA 303-1) and SI units and prefix
representations (CiA 303-2).
Device Profile CiA
DSP-401
Device Profile CiA
DSP-404
Device Profile CiA
DSP-XXX
OSI Layer 7
Application
Communication Profile CiA DS-301
OSI Layer 2
Data Link Layer
CAN Controller
CAN 2.0A
-
+
OSI Layer 1
Physical Layer
-
ISO 11898
+
CAN bus
E-2
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
E.1.2 RJ-45 Pin Definition
8~1
plug
8~1
socket
PIN
1
Signal
CAN_H
CAN_L
CAN_GND
SG+
Description
CAN_H bus line (dominant high)
2
CAN_L bus line (dominant low)
Ground / 0V /V-
3
4
485 communication
485 communication
Ground / 0V /V-
5
SG-
7
CAN_GND
E.1.3 Pre-Defined Connection Set
To reduce configuration effort for simple networks, CANopen define a mandatory default
identifier allocation scheme. The 11-bit identifier structure in predefined connection is set as
follows:
COB Identifier (CAN Identifier)
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Function Code
Node Number
Object
Function Code Node Number
COB-ID
Object Dictionary
Index
Broadcast messages
NMT
0000
0001
-
-
0
-
SYNC
0x80
0x1005, 0x1006,
0x1007
TIME STAMP
Point-to-point messages
Emergency
0010
0001
-
0x100
0x1012, 0x1013
1-127
0x81-0xFF 0x1014, 0x1015
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
E-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E CANopen Function |
Object
Function Code Node Number
COB-ID
Object Dictionary
Index
TPDO1
RPDO1
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1110
1-127
1-127
1-127
1-127
1-127
1-127
1-127
1-127
1-127
1-127
1-127
0x181-0x1FF 0x1800
0x201-0x27F 0x1400
0x281-0x2FF 0x1801
0x301-0x37F 0x1401
0x381-0x3FF 0x1802
0x401-0x47F 0x1402
0x481-0x4FF 0x1803
0x501-0x57F 0x1403
0x581-0x5FF 0x1200
0x601-0x67F 0x1200
0x701-0x77F 0x1016, 0x1017
TPDO2
RPDO2
TPDO3
RPDO3
TPDO4
RPDO4
Default SDO (tx)
Default SDO (rx)
NMT Error
Control
E.1.4 CANopen Communication Protocol
It has services as follows:
„
„
„
„
NMT (Network Management Object)
SDO (Service Data Object)
PDO (Process Data Object)
EMCY (Emergency Object)
E.1.4.1 NMT (Network Management Object)
The Network Management (NMT) follows a Master/Slave structure for executing NMT
service. Only one NMT master is in a network, and other nodes are regarded as slaves. All
CANopen nodes have a present NMT state, and NMT master can control the state of the
slave nodes. The state diagram of a node are shown as follows:
E-4
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
(1)
Initializing
(15)
(9)
Reset Application
(10)
(11)
(16)
Reset Communication
(2)F
(14)
Pre-Operation ABCD
(3)
(4)
(7)
(5)
(13)
Stopped AB
(8)
(6)
(12)
Operation ABCD
(1) After power is applied, it is auto in initialization state
(2) Enter pre-operational state automatically
(3) (6) Start remote node
A: NMT
B: Node Guard
C: SDO
(4) (7) Enter pre-operational state
D: Emergency
E: PDO
(5) (8) Stop remote node
(9) (10) (11) Reset node
F: Boot-up
(12) (13) (14) Reset communication
(15) Enter reset application state automatically
(16) Enter reset communication state automatically
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
E-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E CANopen Function |
Initializing
Pre-Operational
Operational
Stopped
PDO
SDO
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
SYNC
Time Stamp
EMERG
Boot-up
NMT
○
○
○
○
NMT Protocol is shown as follows:
NMT Master
Request
NMT Slave(s)
Indication(s)
Start Remote Node
byte 0 byte 1
CS Node-ID
Indication
Indication
Indication
request
COB-ID=0
Cs
Value
1
Definition
Start
2
Stop
128
129
130
Enter Pre-Operational
Reset Node
Reset Communication
E.1.4.2 SDO (Service Data Object)
SDO is used to access the Object Dictionary in every CANopen node by Client/Server model.
One SDO has two COB-ID (request SDO and response SDO) to upload or download data
between two nodes. No data limit for SDOs to transfer data. But it needs to transfer by
segment when data exceeds 4 bytes with an end signal in the last segment.
The Object Dictionary (OD) is a group of objects in CANopen node. Every node has an OD
in the system, and OD contains all parameters describing the device and its network
behavior. The access path of OD is the index and sub-index, each object has a unique index
in OD, and has sub-index if necessary.
The request and response frame structure of SDO communication is shown as follows:
E-6
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Data 0
Data Data Data Data Data Data Data
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Type
7
6
5
4
3
2 1 0 Index Index Index Data Data Data Data
Sub LL LH HL HH
command
L
H
Initiate Domain Client
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
N
N
E S
Download
Initiate Domain Client
Upload
Abort Domain Client
Server
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Server
E S
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Transfer
Server
N: Bytes not use
E: normal(0)/expedited(1)
S: size indicated
E.1.4.3 PDO (Process Data Object)
PDO communication can be described by the producer/consumer model. Each node of the
network will listen to the messages of the transmission node and distinguish if the message
has to be processed or not after receiving the message. PDO can be transmitted from one
device to one another device or to many other devices.
Every PDO has two PDO services: a TxPDO and a RxPDO. PDOs are transmitted in a non-
confirmed mode.
PDO Transmission type is defined in the PDO communication parameter index (1400h for
the 1st RxPDO or 1800h for the 1st TxPDO), and all transmission types are listed in the
following table:
PDO
Type Number
Cyclic Acyclic Synchronous Asynchronous RTR only
0
1-240
241-251
252
○
○
○
○
Reserved
○
○
○
253
○
○
○
254
255
Type number 1-240 indicates the number of SYNC message between two PDO
transmissions.
Type number 252 indicates the data is updated (but not sent) immediately after receiving
SYNC.
Type number 253 indicates the data is updated immediately after receiving RTR.
Type number 254: Delta CANopen doesn’t support this transmission format.
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
E-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E CANopen Function |
Type number 255 indicates the data is asynchronous transmission.
All PDO transmission data must be mapped to index via Object Dictionary.
Example:
Master transmits PDO data to Slave
PDO1
CAN(H)
CAN(L)
Master
Slave
PDO1 data value
Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,
0x11, 0x22, 0x33, 0x44, 0x55, 0x66, 0x77, 0x88,
Index Sub
Definition
Value
R/W
Size
0x1600
0
1
0. Number
1
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
U8
U32
U32
U32
U32
1. Mapped Object
2. Mapped Object
3. Mapped Object
4. Mapped Object
0x60400010
0x1600
0x1600
0x1600
PDO1 Map
0
0
0
2
3
0x1600
4
U16
(2 Bytes)
0x60400010
0x2211
0
0. Control word
0x6040
R/W
Slave returns message to Master
PDO1
CAN(H)
CAN(L)
Slave
Master
PDO1 data value
Data 0, Data 1, Data 2, Data 3, Data 4, Data 5, Data 6, Data 7,
0xF3, 0x00,
Index Sub
Definition
Value
R/W
Size
0x1A00
0
1
0. Number
1
R/W
U8
U32
U32
U32
U32
1. Mapped Object
2. Mapped Object
3. Mapped Object
4. Mapped Object
0x60410010 R/W
0x1A00
0x1A00
0x1A00
0x1A00
PDO1 Map
0
0
0
R/W
R/W
R/W
2
3
4
0
Status Word
0xF3
U16
R/W
0x6041
E-8
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
E.1.4.4 EMCY (Emergency Object)
Emergency objects are triggered when hardware failure occurs for a warning interrupt. The
data format of a emergency object is a 8 bytes data as shown in the following:
Byte
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Content Emergency Error Error register
Manufacturer specific Error Field
Code
(Object 1001H)
Definition of Emergency Object
CANopen
CANopen
Error
Controller
Error
Code
Display
Description
Error
Register
Code
(bit 0~7)
0001H
0002H
0003H
0005H
0006H
0007H
0008H
7400H
7400H
4310H
2310H
7120H
2310H
9000H
2310H
2310H
2310H
1
2
3
1
1
1
7
1
1
1
Over current
Over voltage
Overheating
Overload
Overload 1
Overload 2
External Fault
0009H Over-current during acceleration
000AH Over-current during deceleration
000BH Over-current during constant speed
operation
000CH Ground fault
2240H
3220h
3130h
9000h
6320h
1
2
7
7
7
000DH Lower than standard voltage
000EH Phase Loss
000FH External Base Block
0011H Software protection failure
0013H Internal EEPROM can not be
programmed
5530h
7
0014H Internal EEPROM can not be read
5530h
5000h
5000h
5000h
5000h
2300h
2300h
2300h
3210h
4310h
7
7
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
3
0015H CC (current clamp)
0016H OV hardware error
0017H GFF hardware error
0018H OC hardware error
0019H U-phase error
001AH V-phase error
001BH W-phase error
001CH OV or LV
001DH Temperature sensor error
001FH Internal EEPROM can not be
programmed
5530h
7
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
E-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E CANopen Function |
CANopen
Error
Register
(bit 0~7)
Controller
Error
Code
CANopen
Error
Code
Display
Description
0020H Internal EEPROM can not be read
0021H Analog signal error
5530h
FF00h
7120h
7300h
7
7
3
7
0023H Motor overheat protection
0024H PG signal error
0029H Communication time-out error on the
control board or power board
7500h
4
Definition of Index
Factory
Setting
Index Sub
Definition
R/W Size Unit
NOTE
0x1000
0
Abort connection
option code
Error register
COB-ID SYNC
message
RO U32
RO U8
RW U32
0x00010192
0
0x1001
0x1005
0
0
0x80
Communication cycle
period
Manufacturer device
name
Manufacturer
hardware version
Manufacturer software
version
500us~15000us
0x1006
0x1008
0x1009
0x100A
0
0
0
0
RW U32 us
RO U32
0
0
0
0
RO U32
RO U32
0x100C
0x100D
0
0
Guarding time
Guarding factor
0 RW U16 ms 0x80 + node 1
0 RW U8
0x0000080
+Node-ID
0x1014
0x1015
0
COB-ID emergency
RO U32
It is set to be
multiple of 10.
0
0
Inhibit time EMCY
Number
RW U16 100us
0
0x1 RO U8
Heartbeat time can
be used when
Guarding time is
invalid.
Heartbeat time can
be used when
Guarding time is
invalid.
0x1016
0x1017
Consumer heartbeat
time
1
0
0x0 RW U32 1ms
Producer heartbeat
time
0x0 RW U16 1ms
0x3 RO U8
0
1
Number
Vender ID
0x000001DD RO U32
0x1018
0x1200
0x00002600
+model
0x00010000 RO U32
2
3
0
Product code
RO U32
Revision
Server SDO
Parameter
COB-ID Client ->
Server
RO U8
2
0x0000600+
RO U32
Node-ID
1
E-10
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Factory
Index Sub
Definition
R/W Size Unit
NOTE
Setting
0x0000580+
Node-ID
2
0x00000200
+Node-ID
COB-ID Client <-
Server
Number
2
0
1
RO U32
RO U8
RW U32
COB-ID used by PDO
00:Acyclic &
Synchronous
01~240:Cyclic &
Synchronous
0x1400
2
Transmission Type
5 RW U8
255: Asynchronous
0
1
Number
2
0x80000300
+Node-ID
RO U8
RW U32
COB-ID used by PDO
00:Acyclic &
Synchronous
01~240:Cyclic &
Synchronous
0x1401
2
Transmission Type
5 RW U8
255: Asynchronous
0
1
Number
2 RW U8
0x60400010 RW U32
0x60420020 RW U32
0 RW U32
1.Mapped Object
2.Mapped Object
3.Mapped Object
4.Mapped Object
Number
1.Mapped Object
2.Mapped Object
3.Mapped Object
4.Mapped Object
Number
0x1600
0x1601
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
0
0 RW U32
0 RW U8
0 RW U32
0 RW U32
0 RW U32
0 RW U32
5
0x00000180
+Node-ID
RO U8
1
2
3
COB-ID used by PDO
Transmission Type
Inhibit time
RW U32
00:Acyclic &
Synchrouous
01~240:Cyclic &
Synchrouous
253: Remote
function
255: Asynchronous
It is set to be
multiple of 10.
Reserved
5 RW U8
0x1800
0x1801
RW U16 100us
0
4
5
0
Reserved
Event timer
Number
3 RW U8
0 RW U16 1ms
5
0x80000280
+Node-ID
RO U8
1
COB-ID used by PDO
RW U32
00:Acyclic &
Synchrouous
01~240:Cyclic &
Synchrouous
253: Remote
function
2
Transmission Type
5 RW U8
255: Asynchronous
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
E-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E CANopen Function |
Factory
Setting
Index Sub
Definition
R/W Size Unit
NOTE
It is set to be
multiple of 10.
3
Inhibit time
RW U16 100us
0
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
4
Reserved
Event timer
Number
3 RW U8
0 RW U16 1ms
2 RW U8
1.Mapped Object
2.Mapped Object
3.Mapped Object
4.Mapped Object
Number
1.Mapped Object
2.Mapped Object
3.Mapped Object
4.Mapped Object
0x60410010 RW U32
0x60430010 RW U32
0 RW U32
0x1A00
0x1A01
0 RW U32
0 RW U8
0 RW U32
0 RW U32
0 RW U32
0 RW U32
Factory
Setting
Index Sub
Definition
RW Size Unit Map
NOTE
0: No action
2: Disable Voltage
3: Quick stop
Abort connection
option code
0x6007
0x603F
0
0
2
0
RW S16
RO U16
Yes
Yes
Error code
bit 0 ~ 3: switch status
bit 4: rfg enable
0x6040
0
Control word
0
RW U16
Yes bit 5: rfg unlock
bit 6: rfg use ref
bit 7: Fault reset
Bit0 Ready to switch on
Bit1 Switched on
Bit2 Operation enabled
Bit3 Fault
Bit4 Voltage enabled
Bit5 Quick stop
Bit6 Switch on disabled
Bit7 Warning
0x6041
0
Status word
0
RO U16
Yes
Bit8
Bit9 Remote
Bit10 Target reached
Bit11 Internal limit active
Bit12 - 13
Bit14 - 15
0x6042
0x6043
0
0
vl target velocity
vl velocity
demand
0
0
RW S16 rpm Yes
RO S16 rpm Yes
If Pr.01.19 is set to 0.1, the
10000 RW U32 1ms Yes unit must be 100ms and
can’t be set to 0.
vl ramp function
time
0x604F
0x6050
0x6051
0
0
0
If Pr.01.19 is set to 0.1, the
vl slow down time 10000 RW U32 1ms Yes unit must be 100ms and
can’t be set to 0.
If Pr.01.19 is set to 0.1, the
vl quick stop time 1000 RW U32 1ms Yes unit must be 100ms and
can’t be set to 0.
E-12
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D How to Use PLC Function|
Factory
Setting
Index Sub
Definition
RW Size Unit Map
NOTE
0 : disable drive function
1 :slow down on slow down
ramp
2: slow down on quick stop
ramp (2th decel. time)
5 slow down on slow down
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
Quick stop option
code
0x605A
0
2
RW S16 1ms Yes
6 slow down on quick stop
ramp and stay in QUICK
STOP
Mode of
operation
Mode of
operation display
0x6060
0x6061
0
0
2
2
RO U8
RO U8
Yes Speed mode
Yes
E.2 How to Control by CANopen
To control the AC motor drive by CANopen, please set parameters by the following steps:
Step 1. Operation source setting: set Pr.02.01 to 5 (CANopen communication. Keypad
STOP/RESET disabled.)
Step 2. Frequency source setting: set Pr.02.00 to 5 (CANopen communication)
Step 3. CANopen station setting: set Pr.09.13 (CANopen Communication Address 1-127)
Step 4. CANopen baud rate setting: set Pr.09.14 (CANBUS Baud Rate)
Step 5. Set multiple input function to quick stop when necessary: Set Pr.04.05 to 04.08 or Pr.11.06 to
11.11 to 23.
According to DSP-402 motion control rule, CANopen provides speed control mode. There are many
status can be switched during Start to Quick Stop. To get current status, please read “Status Word”.
Status is switched by the PDO index control word via external terminals.
Control word is a 16-byte in index 0x6040 and each bit has specific definition. The status bits are bit
4 to bit 6 as shown in the following:
Bit 4: ramp function enabled
Bit 5: ramp function disabled
Bit 6: rfg use reference
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
E-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix E CANopen Function |
Following is the flow chart for status switch:
Power
Disable
Fault
Start
Fault Reaction Active
X0XX1111
Not Ready to Switch On
X0XX0000
Fault
X0XX1000
XXXXXXXX
Switch On Disable
0XXXXX0X
X1XX0000
0XXXXX0X
or
0XXXX01X
0XXXX110
QStop=1
QStop=0
0XXXX01X
or
0XXXXX0X
Ready to Switch On
X01X0001
QStop=0
0XXXX111
0XXXX110
Power
Enable
Switch On
X01X0011
0XXX1111
0XXXXX0X
or
Font=0
0XXX0110
0XXXX01X
QStop=0
0XXX1111
Operation Enable
X01X0111
Quick Stop Active
X00X0111
0XXX1111
QStop=1
E-14
Revision June 2008, 04EE, SW--PW V1.11/CTL V2.11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
Compaq PDAs Smartphones 02CS251 User Manual
Conair Styling Iron cd967cs User Manual
Craftsman Air Compressor 919167321 User Manual
Cuisinart Coffeemaker DCC 1100 User Manual
Earthquake Sound Car Speaker EQ8S8 User Manual
Electro Voice Speaker System FRi 122 85 User Manual
Escient Portable Multimedia Player MP 200 User Manual
Fellowes Paper Shredder S50 P500 User Manual
Fisher Price CD Player B4359 User Manual
Gaggia Espresso Maker Espresso Cappuccino Maker User Manual